Unless it’s a kinetic log splitter, there’s a hydraulic system behind the enormous wood splitting power!
And to keep it that way, the machine needs a fair bit of maintenance. Not only does this involve regular servicing, but it also requires you to know what oil and fluid type is best suited for the system.
Much to the relief, most manufacturers of log splitters explicitly state the kind of oil or fluid to be used. But what if you don’t find that during an emergency? What are the best alternatives out there?
To answer these questions, we’ve documented everything you need to know about hydraulic fluid and splitter oil.
So, let’s proceed!
What Is Hydraulic Fluid?
Before we give you the deets about log splitter oil recommendations, let’s start with hydraulics. As complex as the term may sound, hydraulic is a pretty simple concept. It’s used to explain the relationship between fluids and how they function under certain conditions.
Simply put, hydraulic fluid is a pressurized fluid, which can be used to power an engine. Thus, hydraulic log splitters use the power or force generated by this fluid to operate. Furthermore, a hydraulic system consists of 4 main components, namely:
Reservoir
Like any other reservoir, it stores the fluid for transferring later to the engine. Along with that, it also produces heat and eliminates unnecessary air.
Pump
The pump moves the fluid through the reservoir and works on the basic principle of fluids moving through pressure. In fact, this part is responsible for creating mechanical energy within the system.
Valves
Valves serve the dual purpose of directing fluid movement and controlling the engine operation. Depending on the design, the valves may be engaged using electric, hydraulic, pneumatic, manual, or mechanical methods.
Actuators
Based on the system, the actuators look different from one model to the other. However, their basic purpose is to convert the hydraulic energy to mechanical energy for the engine.
Why Should The Hydraulic Fluid Be Changed?
As you go about operating the splitter, it’s natural for the hydraulic fluid to lose its quality. Exposure to oxygen, high temperatures, and contamination are some of the most common factors responsible for fluid degradation. Moreover, the release of various byproducts (including acids) deposits on different parts, eventually corroding the surface.
All of this ultimately correlates to decreased productivity to the extent where the splitter may even stop working altogether. Plus, several troubleshooting problems can be resolved by keeping an eye on the fluid level and quality. Hence, it becomes vital to change the fluid regularly.
Generally, it’s advisable to change the fluid per 100 hours of operation. But if the splitter has been idle for too long, it’s highly recommended to change the fluid before the next use. And if you have noticed a milky looking grainy substance in the fluid, change it immediately. The exact time of change is recommended by almost all manufacturers.
What Type Of Hydraulic Fuel Should Be Used?
Different manufacturers recommend different types of hydraulic fluids, which depends on the overall mechanism. And in the following sections, we talk about the two most widely used categories.
Non-flammable
Not only are non-flammable fluids less prone to ignition, but they also contain some natural chemicals that don’t encourage foam formation. Without foam, the hydraulic system runs efficiently without the risk of dirt buildup. Beyond that, there’s a synthetic sub-type that runs the risk of corroding the internal parts.
Flammable
Flammable fluids are essentially oil-based and are meant to supply more power to the hydraulic chambers. Furthermore, it prevents erosion but at the cost of a sticky buildup. Other than that, a hydraulic leak with flammable fluid and near a hot engine is a sure shot formula for an accident! So, many brands opt for the non-flammable variant.
Viscosity Index
Any discussion about hydraulic fluids isn't complete without mentioning the viscosity index, represented by an ISO number. The viscosity of a fluid is nothing but its level of resistance to flow. The higher the viscosity, the more time it will take for the fluid to pass through an opening. Plus, it will have a thicker consistency, correlating to difficulty in processing.
Quite understandably, low viscosity refers to a thinner fluid that’s easy to process by the hydraulic chamber. However, the weather and temperature can also affect the viscosity, making a low viscous fluid thick until it's heated.
So, you may choose a thinner fluid for low temperatures and a midrange or thicker variant for regular or high heat generation use.
Fluid Classification
The varied properties and performance of a fluid are expressed by some abbreviations on the package. If you see any of the below-mentioned letters on the bottle, know that they are referring to:
HL- antioxidant, anti-rust refined mineral oil
HM- anti-wear features
HR- VI (viscosity)Improvers that work in a wide range of temperature
How To Change Hydraulic Fluid?
Despite having varied designs, the steps involved in changing the hydraulic fluid of a splitter remain more or less the same. Begin by placing an adequately large container or vessel underneath the reservoir to collect the existing fluid. Make sure that it has a broad mouth so that there’s no spilling.
Also, it’s probably best to place an old rag or cardboard below the container to prevent the surface from getting stained.
Next, carefully pull out the suction pipe located at the bottom of the reservoir. The right method to do it will be mentioned in the instructions manual. Once done, remove the delicate inlet filter and clean it using a soft cloth or paper towel. Ensure that it doesn’t retain any bristle or fiber from the material.
Unscrew the drain pipe and allow the fluid to flow out into the container. This may take some time, so be patient. In most cases, the reservoir has a capacity of 3 gallons, while the entire hydraulic system can hold up to 4.7 gallons. To be on the safe side, get a bucket or vessel with a 5-gallon capacity.
It’s now time to refill the reservoir. Place a funnel above the fill tube and steadily pour the required amount of the recommended fluid. Be careful not to overfill. The dipstick will come in handy for gauging the fluid level. Later, close the drain plug and tighten the fill tube.
Since it’s not unusual to trap air during the entire process, use the control handle to engage the wedge and move it back and forth a few times. This will get rid of any air inside the system. Check for the fluid level again and fill it up to the dipstick mark if necessary.
Should The Hydraulic Filter Be Changed?
Going back to our point about cleaning the filter, a hydraulic filter is used to remove sediments, which can otherwise accumulate on the hydraulic chambers. When a filter stops working, you will notice sticky buildup along the walls of the hydraulic system. This may be a good time to get a new filter.
Again, the filter you opt for will depend on the log splitter, but you may also choose one that’s universally compatible. Whatever be the case, keep an eye for features like durable design and efficient filtering of harmful sediments.
Difference Between Hydraulic Fluid And Oil
Although both may come across as similar, hydraulic fluid and oil are two different things. While the latter is an individual substance, the fluid is a mix of several other fluids like water, salt solutions, water-oil emulsions, etc.
Moreover, oil is highly flammable and not suitable for use near any ignition source. When the oil passes through the high pressure of the hydraulic system, it’s likely to form a spray, which can then easily ignite.
Both oil and fluid are essential components for running a hydraulic system. Not only do they help in power transmission, but they also act as lubricants while doubling up as coolants. Beyond that, fluids find a wide range of use, especially for power brakes, steering purposes, and as a driving force in log splitters.
Since fluids are the primary source of power transfer, it’s crucial to have the right kind of fluid at the right level for uninterrupted machine use.
Types Of Engine Oil
Just like fluids, every brand recommends a specific engine oil to be used. That said, it’s not a bad idea to understand the types of oil available on the market. Based on the source, engine oils can be divided into two main categories, viz., mineral and synthetic. While mineral oils are extracted from minerals, synthetic oils are man-made in laboratories.
A lot of homeowners prefer to have synthetic oil for older machines as it has a reputation for being a more efficient lubricant.
Additive Options
Almost every engine oil has some kind of additive that makes it capable of dealing with a said situation. For instance, you may notice certain abbreviations or terms on the package, which tell you about the condition the oil is made for. The most common ones include:
AW
AW or Anti-Wear oil is a good option to prolong the service life of the splitter, protect and lubricate the parts. Furthermore, AW oil can be divided into AW 32 or AW 64 categories based on their temperature and viscosity.
AW 32 (light duty oil) is ideally meant for ambient temperatures between -20 and 50-degree Fahrenheit. Similarly, AW 46 (medium duty oil) is suitable for temperatures ranging between 25 and 70-degree Ferenheit.
In an ideal scenario, an AW 32 oil uses less energy, thereby running the splitter cooler and inflicting less wear-and-tear. But if you need to regularly operate the splitter in hot weather, we’d suggest taking some ‘cool breaks’ between use.
Besides, you will also find an AW 64 (heavy duty oil) variant used mainly for heavy load hydraulics.
Cold Flow
Used for very cold or freezing temperatures.
Anti-Foaming
The presence of certain substances in oil can contribute to a foam-like consistency, thereby reducing the overall quality. Anti-foaming agents help mitigate this effect making the oil safe and efficient for use.
Antioxidant
Antioxidant oil aids the reduction of sludge deposits and extends the use of the splitter between oil changes.
Anti-Rust
Anti-rust motor oil utilizes a protective coating to negate rust formation.
Environment-Friendly
Also known as biodegradable oil, it’s typically made from rapeseed or other vegetable oils for minimum harmful exhaustion.
Changing The Engine Oil
Now that we’ve talked about changing the hydraulic fluid, let’s take a look at how to change the engine oil. The first step is to let the engine cool completely. For a safer experience, schedule the oil change at least a couple of hours after the last use. And before you begin, touch the engine to ensure that it doesn't feel warm.
Like the hydraulic fluid change, the next thing to do is place an oil pan or any other container under the engine drain pipe. Detach the pipe and let the oil flow out. You can also remove the dipstick to make the drainage faster. Replace the drain plug once the reserve is fully empty.
Use a funnel in the dipstick hole to refill the reservoir with the preferred motor oil. Remove the funnel to check the oil level and, if required, pour some more but never overfill. Finally, lock the dipstick.
Irrespective of the brand and other specifications, the best engine oils offer high performance with anti-wear properties. Besides, they are lightweight and help extend the life of the internal components, including the filter.
Some Other Tips
Since some fluid is absorbed by the cylinder and hoses, it’s always advisable to keep the reservoir full, even when the splitter is not in use. Empty reservoirs will invariably damage the system, which may, in turn, break the warranty conditions.
At the risk of repetition, never overfill the reservoir. The heat generated during operation may make the fluid to overflow and eventually lead to a fire. Ensure that there’s just the right amount of fluid in the system.
Tighten the dipstick properly after a check or refill to prevent air leak.
If not stated otherwise by the manufacturer, make it a point to flush the engine pistons and reservoir with kerosene. This will get rid of any buildup.
Final Words
That’s it from us for today’s guide!
No matter the type of log splitter, the fluid level will definitely demand your attention. With regular fluid and oil changes, you can cut down on professional maintenance costs. And hopefully, we’ve been helpful in this regard.
On that note, it’s time for us to wrap up the guide. But before we leave, here’s one last tip: don’t mix your fluids. You may get away without any damage if the fluids have the same viscosity, but there will be severe problems if you end up mixing a non-foaming with a foaming type.
The HVLP and the LVLP spray guns are two of the most popular spray guns available on the market in 2022.
However, a ton of people do not know the differences between these two spray guns. If you are not an expert, we do not expect you to know all the subtle differences since both these guns look quite similar.
So, in this guide, we are going to take a close look at both these spray guns so that you do not end up making the wrong choice while buying one. Our team of experts has extensively tested both these spray guns and have shared the details with us.
After reading this article, we are confident that you are going to know all the nitty-gritty of both these spray guns.
So, without any further ado, let us get right into it.
HVLP vs. LVLP Spray Guns
HVLP Explained
An HVLP is one of the most commonly used spray guns out there. HVLP means “high-pressure-low-volume.” In simple words, these spray guns are capable of producing high volume output using very low pressure.
What this actually signifies is that you basically spend less material while maintaining high color quality. HVLP spray guns are known to produce around 100 CFM at 3-8 PSI.
However, their pricing is a little higher than LVLP guns since they use a lot more compressed air. HVLP spray guns come in handy for people who are inexperienced and for DIY purposes.
Keep in mind - they are not the best choice when it comes to professional purposes as they perform a lot slower than LVLP spray guns. Furthermore, they use larger compressors and often do not work well with thicker paints.
HVLP spray guns save a lot of materials and avoid wastage because of their high volume, which allows the paint to end up only on the surface. Also, they are ideal for projects that demand immediate solutions. Since it is one of the most commonly used spray guns, it means tech support and training are readily available.
Advantages Of HVLP
It is great for beginners and DIY projects
High-quality finish
Less material waste
Appropriate for being used on metallic surfaces
Disadvantages Of HVLP
Requires larger air compressors
It does not work well with thicker paints
Works slower than LVLP spray guns
LVLP Explained
LVLP spray gunsare some of the premium options on the market. LVLP means “low-volume-low-pressure.” This type of spray gun is popular for delivering top-notch transfer rates, which means premium finishes and less waste. Additionally, it demands just about 10 PSI, which essentially means that you are free to use any kind of air compressor with this spray gun.
LVLP spray guns perform best with thinner paints. So, if you intend to apply metallic paints or work on surfaces that are sticky, we suggest going with HVLP spray guns. When it comes to design, finding out the differences can be quite challenging since there is not much. If you have a keen eye, however, you will definitely be able to spot the subtle differences.
Both HVLP spray guns and LVLP spray guns are built ergonomically in order to reduce fatigue levels.
Advantages Of LVLP
More affordable than HVLP spray guns
Uses lower PSI
Works perfectly with waterborne paints
Sprays a lot faster
Does not need a very big air compressor
Disadvantages Of LVLP
Its pattern size is very small
It does not work well on sticky surfaces
HVLP vs. LVLP - The Differences!
In this section, we will delve a little deeper and find out the exact points of differences between these two popular spray guns. You will have complete knowledge of both HVLP and LVLP spray guns after you go through this section.
Transfer Efficiency Rate
The transfer efficiency rate of spray guns varies from model to model; it also greatly depends on the kind of spray gun you are using - HVLP or LVLP.
Talking about transfer rates, LVLP spray guns do a better job as they can transfer up to 80%, which essentially means that there will be less paint wasted. Hence, it makes LVLP spray guns a more environment-friendly option.
As far as HVLP guns are concerned, the transfer efficiency rate is expected to linger around 65% to 70%. Since the transfer rate is lower than LVLP spray guns, it is a less efficient option. A lower transfer efficiency rate basically means more paint is wasted.
However, both LVLP and HVLP are a lot better than traditional spray guns that provide a transfer rate of barely 35%.
Width Of The Fan Patterns
The width of the fan patterns is yet another major difference between HVLP spray guns and LVLP spray. Not only does it affect its overall performance, but it also affects our comfort of using these products.
When it comes to the width of fan patterns, HVLP spray guns are the clear winners as they offer a larger pattern width than what LVLP spray guns have to offer. An LVLP spray gun usually offers a width between 8 and 10 inches which is deemed small.
Even though this might not be the biggest issue for most people, it is worth keeping in mind, less pattern width means more painting time. It becomes particularly more important for people who are starting new, smaller width fan patterns that affect the quality.
Usability
Usability is more of a subjective thing. What seems easy to use for you may not necessarily be easy to use for somebody else. It all boils down to the experiences you have of using a spray gun.
That being said, HVLP spray guns have been on the market for a long time. As we have already mentioned, you are likely to find better training and tech support while using HVLP spray guns simply because they have been around longer.
On the other hand, LVLP guns are quite new in the business, and there is a high possibility that a lot of people have not used this variant. So, when you buy this spray gun, keep in mind that you are not going to find tech support and training that easily.
We would strongly advise you to buy spray guns from a reputed brand as they provide detailed instructions, be it HVLP or LVLP spray guns.
Pressure
The pressure needed to operate both these spray guns is a very prominent difference between them. As the names suggest, HVLP spray guns provide a high volume but a low pressure which means it requires a big air compressor to do the job.
The lion’s share of HVLP spray guns works at around 20 CFM and 50PSI, which implies that you would need nearly an 80-gallon tank. On the other hand, LVLP guns will work between a range of 10 and 25 PSI and 5 CFM, and this is where LVLP spray guns beat HVLP spray guns.
With an LVLP spray gun, you are free to use any air compressor, making them the more suitable option.
Cost
Both HVLP and LVLP spray guns come in different brands and models, so the prices keep varying. You can expect to get the lower-end models of both these products for under a hundred bucks. However, if you are looking for a brand that offers better specifications and advanced features, then you will have to spend more money on HVLP spray guns than LVLP.
The price of a quality HVLP spray gun can go above $500, whereas top-notch LVLP guns barely hit beyond $400. Also, keep in mind that while buying an HVLP spray gun, you will need to buy a larger air compressor as well, which makes it all the more expensive.
HVLP Spray Guns Are Best For:
Both HVLP and LVLP spray guns are some of the best spray guns out there. Not only do they perform a fantastic spray-painting job, but they are also quite efficient. However, both these guns work on different mechanisms, and hence they are perfect for different scenarios.
HVLP spray guns are perfect for people who do not have much experience in spray painting. Since their spraying rate is on the lower side, it is ideal for DIY projects. HVLP guns tend to waste materials, and hence they are not recommended for professional purposes as they increase the cost of the overall project by a lot.
Furthermore, HVLP spray guns require larger air compressors which makes them less mobile. So, it is better to use HVLP spray guns at home rather than on-site.
LVLP Spray Guns Are Best For:
Since LVLP spray guns are not that common, learning how to use them can be quite a hassle. This is why they are not ideal for DIY projects and people who have very little knowledge of spray painting.
LVLP spray guns, however, are perfect for professionals since they require small air compressors and waste a lot fewer materials. Not only are they portable, but they spray super fast as well. All these factors make them the absolute choice for professionals.
The transfer efficiency is like the cherry on top as it makes them the ultimate cost-saving spray gun option for professionals.
Frequently Asked Questions
What are the safety tips I should keep in mind while using a spray gun?
Safety should be your prime concern! It does not matter what kind of paint you are using, you must always go through the instructional manual first. Most of the elements in the paint are toxic, so you need to ensure that they do not make their way up to your lungs, eyes, or skin. Here are a few points to keep in mind.
Wear safety glasses
Wear oversized clothes to fully cover your legs and arms
Wear nitrile gloves
Most importantly, wear respirators
Ensure that you do your spray-painting job in an open area or at least in an area that is sufficiently ventilated.
What should I mix with the material?
You need to thin down the material before using it so that it can easily go through the spray gun. You can mix fluids like lacquer thinner water or acetone with it to make it thinner. Ensure that your material is neither too diluted nor less diluted.
How can I increase the lifespan of my spray gun?
Increasing the lifespan of your spray gun is very easy; you need to clean it daily. Do not jerk the trigger as it may lead to trigger jams. You also have to ensure that you use good quality nozzles and needles.
Furthermore, if you are a user of coarse materials like Carc, then we would suggest you get a spray gun that has a metal body.
How many years does a spray gun last?
If you have bought a good quality spray gun, it should last for at least a decade, provided you take proper care of it. We would suggest you buy a spray gun with corrosion-resistant materials.
What are some of the best spray gun brands?
Some of the best spray gun brands are
Astro Pneumatic Tool
Spray It Up
Campbell Hausfeld
Final Thoughts
There you have it! We hope you know everything about HVLP and LVLP spray guns now. As we have already mentioned earlier, both these spray guns are for different purposes, so there is not really a winner.
If you are looking for a spray gun for DIY projects, go with an HVLP and if you are looking to use it professionally, go with the LVLP. But before we sign off, we would like to share a couple of pro tips with you.
When it comes to paint spray tools, irrespective of the one you choose to use, you need to keep safety as the topmost priority. Long story short, always wear protective gear while undertaking all your paint projects.
Also, any tool will only last long if you maintain it properly. And HVLP or LVLP spray guns are no exceptions. So, regular cleaning and upkeep will help you make the most of your purchase.
We really hope you found this article helpful. With this, we wish to take your leave; see you soon!
Are you trying to revamp your room by repainting some old furniture? Are you confused about which HVLP spray gun to buy for optimum results?
Worry not, because we have got you covered!
As you probably know, HVLP spray guns are the ideal equipment for your home and professional painting needs. They not only give quicker results than brushes but also cause much less of a mess than their high-pressure counterparts.
In this article, we have handpicked the 9 best HVLP spray guns available on the market today. Apart from detailed reviews of each of our recommendations, you will also find a buyer’s guide to simplify your decision-making process.
So, what are we waiting for? Let’s dive right into it.
This HomeRight HVLP spray gun in the variant “Super Finish Max” provides a very professional quality finish on all surfaces you use it on. It’s ideal for DIY paint projects of all shapes and sizes because of its adjustable mechanisms that help you customize your paint flow. This spray gun is also one of the more affordable high-quality options out there.
PAINT SPRAYER FOR COUNTLESS DIY PROJECTS: The HomeRight...
ADJUSTABLE SETTINGS TO SUIT ANY PROJECT: You can adjust the...
Why Did We Like It?
This spray gun is not only great for more intricate DIY projects but also other larger projects such as painting furniture, cabinets, and so on. It has easily adjustable spray settings and alternative spray tips that allow you to customize the material output and paint flow according to the needs of the project.
Since the spray gun functions on 450 watts of power, it offers a rather powerful spraying experience, making it a versatile product for a variety of projects. It also comes equipped with a cleaning brush that makes the process of cleaning a lot quicker and more efficient.
That’s not all; the USP of this product is the 2-year warranty and highly-rated customer service provided by the company. The spray gun also has a rather large paint capacity (39 fluid ounces) that facilitates longer spraying without having to refill very often.
What Could’ve Been Better?
While this sprayer claims to require little to no thinning of the paint before use, a few customers seemed to have experienced the exact opposite. The tips that this spray gun comes equipped with are very tiny and therefore easy to lose. It is especially easy to lose them down the sink while you’re cleaning. Hence, we recommend having a dedicated plastic bowl to keep and clean your tips in.
Pros
2-year warranty available
Easy to clean and maintain
Superior quality finish
Versatile and can be used for a variety of projects
Next up, this Fuji paint spray gun has an unconventional design and is one of the very best HVLP options available on the market. The product has professional precision and very high durability, which is why it is also one of the most expensive products on the list.
Professional non-bleed Spray Gun with Adjustable Pattern Fan...
1.3mm Air cap set installed
Why Did We Like It?
One of the biggest reasons why this product is so popular is because of its strong and sturdy build as compared to other spray paint models. Moreover, the gun provides a very uniform and precise spray pattern, and an adequately fast spray speed, making it one of our top contenders!
Moving on, we love how this product is non-bleed, which means the moment you release the trigger, the paint automatically stops flowing, thereby avoiding any potential mess. The 25 feet hose that comes with it has an air control valve that significantly reduces overspray and bounceback as well.
Also, this model of the Fuji Spray gun is convertible, meaning it can be switched between the bottom feed cup and gravity feed cup for ease of use. That’s not all; it has an ergonomic stay-cool handle and is very easy to disassemble and clean, which has quickly made it a fan favorite.
What Could’ve Been Better?
While this HVLP spray gun is one of the best 2-spray systems out there, it is significantly heavier - weighing 26.1 pounds. The price of this paint gun is also significantly higher than its counterparts, but we feel that it’s well worth its high price.
This spray gun, while being one of the lowest-priced spray guns on this list, is also one of the highest-rated. It uses high volume low-pressure technology to provide a smooth and consistent finish on all surfaces, from doors to decks to furniture.
HVLP PAINT SPRAYER: The Control Spray Max paint sprayer uses...
USE WITH A WIDE VARIETY OF MATERIALS: Powerful two-stage...
Why Did We Like It?
Like most spray guns on this list, this too has customizable settings to control and optimize the pressure and flow of the paint. Furthermore, the air cap of this tool is adjustable, thereby allowing you to choose your spray pattern - round, horizontal, or vertical.
Moving on, a feature that sets this spray gun apart from the rest is its stationary base and lightweight build that significantly reduces hand fatigue. Since the turbine is placed on the ground, it makes it a lot more convenient to hold the tool for extended periods of time.
That’s not all; we love how affordable this tool is compared to its counterparts with the same features. So, if you’re looking for a budget-friendly HVLP spray gun that has high performance and a year-long warranty, this is the one for you!
What Could’ve Been Better?
This tool works optimally only with light materials like stains or thinned-down paints of different kinds. This makes this tool less than ideal for people looking for thicker coverage on their projects. However, this does not compromise the overall performance of this spray gun.
Pros
Professional, consistent finish with minimal overspray
If you’re looking for a spray gun that has one of the most professional finishes, then this is the one for you. It comes equipped with the latest atomization technology and delivers a superior finish on most surfaces. This product doesn’t come with a motor though, so ideally it’s for someone who is just trying to replace the paint gun from their set.
The New HVLP Finishline 4 series from Devilbiss offers the...
Achieve superior results with its precision machined air cap...
Why Did We Like It?
This HVLP spray gun is most well-known for its high-precision spraying capabilities and is one of the top picks of working professionals. It comes with precise fluid nozzles and high-quality air caps that enable it to deliver superior results. From auto-body work to painting kitchen cabinets, this gun can provide top-notch results.
While it may be on the expensive side, the precision with which it delivers the spray paint is unmatched by most other guns. What’s more, its anodized internal passages make it very easy to clean and maintain while using it on a regular basis.
Also, this spray gun is comparatively lighter than its alternatives, which is a major benefit in our books! So, once you pair this gun with a high-quality air compressor, there is next to nothing that it can’t achieve.
What Could’ve Been Better?
As we mentioned earlier, this spray gun is mostly used by working professionals. One of the major reasons behind this is that there is a certain level of experience and technique required to use it to achieve optimum results. Hence, if you’re a beginner looking to invest in a spray gun, this is not the one for you.
Earlex, just in case you didn’t know, is one of the leading brands of spray gun equipment. The Earlex 5500 is designed specifically for automotive work, serious woodworking, and light contractor work. Long story short, this is another HVLP spray gun that is ideal for professional rather than home environments.
SEMI-PRO PAINT SPRAYER: The Earlex Spray Station 5500 is...
ACHIEVE THE PERFECT FINISH: The professional metal spray gun...
Why Did We Like It?
One of the most impressive qualities of this spray gun is the user-friendly performance that makes it ideal for both working professionals and beginners alike. This, coupled with its sturdy and long-lasting building, makes it an ideal investment for many woodworking enthusiasts.
Furthermore, this spray gun is extremely convenient to carry around because of its handle along with the onboard storage for the hose and the gun. Its all-metal paint gun with stainless steel tip and powerful turbine provides a more polished finish on wooden surfaces as compared to its other counterparts.
Moving on, the innovative push-and-click spray pattern adjuster in this tool allows you to quickly shift between the various spray patterns. It also has a paint flow control dial and comes with a pick-up tube for overhead and downward spraying. This, along with its high non-bleeder gun control features, comes in especially handy while painting with a wide variety of water-based and oil-based materials.
What Could’ve Been Better?
This gun is specifically designed for small to medium-sized woodworking projects, thereby restricting its use. If you’re looking to attempt more versatile projects, then this HVLP spray gun is not the one for you.
Yattich is one of the best brands of HVLP guns on the market today. Its products are not only very affordable but also perfect for home use and smaller DIY projects. The 191 model has a unique design aimed at enhancing user experience. It has a double layer of insulation that makes it very safe to use outside of a professional environment.
【3 Spray Patterns & 5 Nozzle Sizes】Paint sprayer can be...
【Perfect Design For User Experience】Detachable, making...
Why Did We Like It?
This model of the Yattich Spray gun is known for its large variety of nozzle sizes and unique trademarked copper composition. These copper nozzles are not only more versatile and durable, but they also avoid blockage, which reduces resistance and can extend the life of the motor significantly.
What’s more, these spray guns are extremely versatile and can be used on a variety of surfaces, ranging from craft steel and walls to wood. Its suction tube can be easily adjusted according to the angle at which you require it to spray, while its customizable spray modes add to the ease of use.
If that wasn’t enough, this spray gun is quite affordable, thereby making it a rather ideal investment for anyone interested to purchase it.
What Could’ve Been Better?
This product is majorly made of plastic, so it is not as long-lasting as its metal counterparts. This could also be an issue for more environment-conscious consumers who do not wish to invest in plastic equipment.
Wagner is one of the leading companies to manufacture the HVLP spray gun and is best known for its versatility in the same. And that can be said about its model FLEXiO 890 that gives a high-quality consistent finish on projects of all textures and sizes.
PERFECT FOR A VARIETY OF PROJECTS: The FlexiO 890 paint...
PORTABLE PAINT SYSTEM: The turbine sits on the ground,...
Why Did We Like It?
This model of Wagner is built like a high-performance professional spray gun while being priced at a comparatively lower rate, which we love. It’s built ideally for home-improvement projects and can be used both indoors and outdoors with relative ease.
One of the best features of this spray gun is its integrated storage which allows you to easily store the hose and nozzles within the system after usage. Since the turbine base is stationary, this spray gun avoids hand fatigue and has a long 11.5-feet flexible air hose that allows you to cover more area with ease while working.
Apart from being user-friendly, this spray gun has one of the fastest spray speeds amongst all the other products in this guide. This means it can cover a larger surface area in a relatively high-quality shorter period of time making it a very good painting tool. You can also use unthinned paints of all kinds in this spray gun which sets it apart from all its competitors.
What Could’ve Been Better?
The nozzles of this spray gun tend to require cleaning at regular intervals. This makes it kind of a hassle to use, especially for larger projects. The spray tip of this equipment is also not very precise and tends to overspray frequently.
Next up, this model is called the Earlex 6003 Pressure. Known for its professional finishing capabilities and high durability, it’s no surprise that this spray gun is one of our topmost recommendations. Its powerful motor and onboard gun docking system has made this tool gun one of a kind.
HVLP SPRAY SYSTEMS: The Earlex SprayPort 6003 HVLP paint...
PERFECT FOR WOODWORKERS: Designed for the serious woodworker...
Why Did We Like It?
This spray gun is ideal for people looking for a high-performance and durable tool that can spray everything from milk paints to varnishes and lacquer. It is also designed specifically for users who engage in serious woodwork, so it delivers a flawless finish in all its projects.
Moving on, the nozzle of this spray gun is non-bleed and precise, which along with its pressure-fed gun, stay-cool handle, and dual adjusters provide maximum performance. Not only that, but its 360-degree rotating air cap allows you to spray even the most difficult crooks and crannies with ease.
Furthermore, its 25 feet Hyperflex hose gives this stationary spray gun maximum maneuverability in and around any project area. Earlex also provides customers with a 2-year warranty and highly rated customer service which is always a pro in our book.
What Could’ve Been Better?
While this spray gun is marked on the more expensive side, most customers agree that it is well worth its price. Some customers have pointed out that the paint gun is prone to spitting which may hamper the final finish of projects in certain cases.
This gravity-feed HVLP spray gun is great for a beginner in painting projects looking for an affordable tool that gives high quality and consistent finish. It works best on wooden projects ranging from cabinets to door frames and smaller furniture. The product also comes with bonus accessories that include a cleaning brush, a spanner wrench, and a pressure gauge.
Professional Performance: High-performance car paint spray...
Complete Control System: Precision adjustment knobs for...
Why Did We Like It?
This paint spray gun is made for the typical DIY user and can cover regularly to heavy-duty work. Hence, it is very easy to operate even without prior experience using paint sprays. Users rated it rather highly, mentioning that the more you get used to it, the better finish it provides.
Also, it is entirely made of stainless steel and hence very durable. And it comes with the expected one-year warranty and decent customer service. Apart from that, the lightweight build of this tool gives it high maneuverability and provides a beautiful consistent finish on all surfaces.
The 1.44mm spray nozzle it comes equipped with is great for most painting projects. However, you can also replace the nozzle with other differently-sized tips available on the market. This product also has full control over air pressure and spray pattern thanks to its adjustable control knobs.
What Could’ve Been Better?
The gun comes equipped with only one kind of tip which is kind of a let-down for people who do want to be able to do a variety of projects. This gun also works optimally better with thinned paints and pigments which could prove to be another letdown for users.
Pros
Ideal for basecoats
Lightweight and portable
Very easy to use
Durable
Affordable
Cons
Only comes with one tip
Not great with thick paints
HVLP Paint Spray Guns Buyer’s Guide
That brings us to the end of the list of our top 9 picks of the best HVLP paint spray guns. But we understand that 9 options may still seem like a lot to pick one out of. For this reason, we’ve compiled an in-depth buyer’s guide discussing factors to look out for that should help you make this decision.
Spraying Speed
Most HVLP spraying guns have a lower rate of painting speed as compared to their higher-pressure counterparts. Even within the options for this spraying, different tools have different spray speeds. So, you must decide how quickly your project needs to be completed and buy one of these accordingly.
Nozzle/Tip Size
The nozzle and tip at the end of the spray are what determine how smoothly the paint will be applied on any surface. A larger nozzle will help you cover a larger surface area at once while a smaller one will help you zero in on details.
Some guns come equipped with multiple nozzles and tip sizes and that gives the spray added versatility. Hence, depending on the kind of project, you’ll have to choose a spray gun accordingly.
Paint Adaptability
HVLP spray guns have different levels of adaptability when it comes to the kind of paint or lacquer you want to apply on a certain project. If you’re going to be working with a lot of different thicknesses of paint, you’re going to require a spraying gun that supports it. Some guns come equipped with a thinner funnel that helps you thin down paints to the required amount before use.
Adjustability
These spray guns also come with a variety of customizable and adjustable options such as rotating air caps and boost power dials. These variations help you adjust things like the spray rate and help you achieve different types of finishes and patterns.
Length Of Hose and Capacity
If the paint sprayer has a stationary base, then you will require a long hose in order to easily walk around and work in your station. You should also prefer a spray gun that has a larger cup capacity so that you don’t need to waste much time refilling it.
Cost
One last factor to consider while buying an HVLP spray gun would cost. Different brands of spray guns have marked them at different prices. Higher-priced products will usually have more professional level equipment with additional features. However higher price does not always mean higher quality, and hence one should study the features in detail before deciding which one to invest in.
Verdict
With this, we come to the end of our comprehensive guide to the best HVLP spray guns. We hope it will now be easier for you to pick the ideal product for your needs. But if you need another nudge in the right direction, read on.
To summarize, the YATTICH 191 is the most affordable as well as DIY-friendly spray gun. So, if you’re a beginner looking for a low-budget and easy-to-operate product, this is the one for you.
On the other hand, if you’re a professional looking for high performance, high quality and a flawless finish, then Earlex 0HV6003PUS and Fuji 2203G are ideal for you.
Before signing off, we would also like to give honorable mentions to the Earlex HV5500 and TCP Global G6600-14 for their high customer reviews and versatility. Wagner 052902, alternatively, has the fastest spraying speed among all the paint guns on this list.
The Husqvarna YTA24v48 needs no introduction as it's one of the coolest lawnmowers on the block. But is that reason enough to buy it? Unfortunately, this is a discontinued product, and not available in the market. No, other updated products are also not been known.
Well, we don't want to rush you into making that decision right away, as we'd like users to be fully informed before investing in this mowing machine. Obviously, it's an advanced power tool and comparatively more expensive than conventional lawnmowers.
Therefore, we have a lot of features to discuss and points to make in this comprehensive review so you can make an informed choice. However, before we begin, we want to assure you that we tested this product across different parameters to gain a fair understanding of its pros and cons.
So, let's dive into the deets without further small talk!
Husqvarna YTA24v48 Review
Husqvarna continues to be a reliable household brand as it has gained the trust of its customers over the years through consistent quality and performance. And the YTA24v48 model is no exception, so the following are the points we want to discuss to familiarize you with the product.
Performance
To begin with, we want to focus on the engine of the model as ultimately, it's the power source that provides superior cutting performance, making short work of yard maintenance. On that note, the YTA24V48 pedal tractor mower runs on Briggs & Stratton Intek V-Twin engine, generating all the horsepower needed to take care of an acre or more of land.
Also, the model incorporates a high-tech debris management system and mechanical compression release technology to streamline cutting functions. Furthermore, it also comes reinforced with air induction mowing technology, which enhances the airflow, ensuring that the blades yield consistent trims.
Getting the machine started is no hassle at all, as it features a choke less start for instant activation, so all you have to do is turn the key and go. This element will especially appeal to busy homeowners who want to wrap up the job with minimum effort and waiting time.
However, the best part is that this unit can be fitted with trailers, snow blades, brushes, and more, further adding to the versatility of this mower. What supports multi-appliance compatibility is the mower's cruise control and fast pedal-operated automatic transmission enabling steady speed and unhindered mobility.
Word of caution - do not attempt driving this mower over a substantial incline as the machine may fail to make the climb. Despite offering stability and balance across even ground, the mower just cannot navigate over steep terrains. Believe us when we say this, every time we tried to make the ascent, the engine stalled shortly after.
Ease Of Use
Despite its heavy set design, the Pedal Tractor mower is a breeze to operate and pretty straightforward in terms of functions. For starters, it has an ergonomic seat that offers great comfort and control to the users. Once you take on the driver's seat, the lawn essentially turns into a driving zone, which you can maneuver at a chosen speed.
Between the handy cup holder and armrests, this mower is practically a joy to drive, which is unlikely to happen while working with walk-behind models. To further add to your convenience, the unit includes a charging port and electric clutch for improved user experience.
Cut Quality & Options
We are very impressed with the unique cut quality of this machine. Long story short, it features a 48-inch cutting deck providing wide swaths and consistent trims with each pass.
What supplements the precise mowing function is the fender mounted deck lever, spring assisted for smoother operation, and high accuracy. Another thing we liked about it is its top speed of 2.5mph, meaning you finish mowing in a snap once you get the hang of using the machine.
Cutting quality alone is not enough as a heavy-duty motor should also provide superior discharge functions. That being said, the Fast tractor side-discharges and collects clippings efficiently in the attached BioClip kit. Furthermore, it has mulching capabilities as well, so depending on your requirements, that can be a feasible thing to do.
Safety Features
When it comes to user safety, you can always rely on this brand to come up with intuitive features, ensuring a risk-free experience. That being the case, this mower includes a pressure-sensitive switch located beneath the seat, which shuts down the engine and deck as the driver leaves the saddle.
Moreover, the unit has powerful, bright headlights providing high visibility and monitoring functions. Also, you can extend the working hours on the yard, well after the sun goes down because of these high capacity lights. Lastly, it incorporates a Reverse Operation System (ROS) that instantly stops the blades while backing up, for additional safety.
Warranty
The Husqvarna Yta24v48 Fast Tractor comes with a trio of warranty packages that looks comprehensive from the get-go. Besides the three-year limited warranty, a five-year coverage plan takes into account the front axle, frame, and chassis. However, what impresses us most is that the manufacturers back the deck with a 10-year consumer warranty.
What Could've Been Better?
At the end of the day, no piece of equipment is perfect, and they're bound to have one flaw or the other. However, when it comes to lawnmowers, if you're looking for a high-end model, it's best to ascertain the effectiveness and quality of individual parts before investing in an option.
When we tested the YTA24V4824V, the experience was not entirely smooth as we found minor electrical and mechanical issues. Even if we let that bit slide, we don't like that the mower cannot scale sloped terrain. This could be a major inconvenience for users wanting to mow across uneven grounds or inclined paths.
Given the price of the item, this can be a deal-breaker for a lot of buyers as people would expect it to seamlessly navigate across varying terrain.
Pros
Runs on high capacity Briggs & Stratton Intek V-Twin engine
Maximum achievable speed of 2.5mph for faster cutting
Three-tier warranty packages, increase value for money appeal
Ergonomic seat with armrests and a cup holder
Multiple safety features providing risk-free operation
Cons
Mower fails to work on inclined surfaces
Unit suffer from minor electrical and mechanical issues
Husqvarna YTA24v48 Verdict
Despite the flaws, we agree that in the case of the Husqvarna YTA24v48, the pros outweigh the cons. Therefore, if you have a large green space to groom, you must consider this reliable option for neat, professional-looking cuts.
Also, it's pretty low maintenance, so you don't have to worry about costly tune-ups in the long run. Lastly, when you're going for a high-end option, durability is an essential factor that you cannot overlook. With this unit, you'll be tending your lawn for a long, long time, and it will be years later when you need a replacement.
Plus you're getting a great warranty with the package, so you can't really complain about minor faults here and there. So go ahead and get yourself this tractor model.
Also, don't forget to let us know in the comments section below about your experience.
Grow tents are one of the most popular methods of growing plants indoors.
However, when using grow tents, ensuring that your plants have enough moisture at all times can be challenging. This is where humidifiers can be beneficial.
Residential humidifiers come in all manner of sizes and styles, and it is possible to find many options designed to fit in small growing spaces, such as grow tents. However, selecting the one that best meets your needs from many options is easier said than done.
It is a task that requires both time and effort since different types of humidifiers have their advantages and disadvantages. To help you out, we’ve compiled this in-depth review and guide listing the best humidifier for grow tent on the market.
Furthermore, we’ve included a buyer’s guide to help make your task easier. So, without further ado, let’s dive in.
We will be starting with the HCM-350/HCM-35-TGT from Honeywell. For those who do not know, Honeywell is one of the most famous American manufacturers of a wide range of home and office solutions. Unsurprisingly, it is also the manufacturer of top-notch humidifiers for growing plants, offering innovative features and excellent performance.
EVERYDAY COMFORT – This humidifier for home features...
Why Did We Like It?
The HCM-350/HCM-35-TGT is undoubtedly one of the best humidifiers for grow tents, coming from a brand well-known for quality products that offer a great experience. It comes with a range of innovative features such as a wicking filter and UV technology that can improve air quality.
That said, the UV technology ensures up to 99% germ-free humidification. Similarly, the QuietCare technology makes sure that the device operates noiselessly, so you do not need to worry about getting disturbed.
Another excellent feature that makes the HCM-350 an excellent product suitable for grow tents is its continuous operating capacity; it can run for up to 24 hours. And since it is a dishwasher-safe product, cleaning it is incredibly easy.
Furthermore, you can easily adjust the moisture output with the help of the three settings to ensure your plants have the optimal amount of moisture.
What Could’ve Been Better?
Performance-wise, it is hard to find a better product on the market currently. However, this warm-mist humidifier might not be the best option for those with a humble budget. It is one of the costlier options you can get, and several more affordable alternatives are readily available.
Our next item on the list is the HME020020N model from HOmeLabs, another prominent brand dedicated to developing high-performance home and kitchen products. At first glance, the HME020020N is a compact humidifier that provides indoor plants the required amount of moisture they need to grow.
No products found.
Why Did We Like it?
The HOmeLabs HME020020N is one of the most efficient humidifiers we tested while compiling this list. It has a 99.97% efficiency rating that provides the required amount of moisture and ionizes the indoor air for reducing odor. These work with customizable fan settings that allow you to select between low power and high power settings as and when required.
This product comes with clear instructions that help you easily install and use it without any hassles. What is more, the HME020020N measures 6.7 x 6.7 x 7.5 inches, an ideal size for small grow tents.
The humidifier also has an indicator light to let you know when it is time to change the filter. Furthermore, HOmeLabs has excellent US-based customer service that you can quickly contact through email, chat, or phone. They are highly efficient in helping you resolve any issues that you might come across.
What Could’ve Been Better?
Once again, we could not find any significant downside to this impressive product. We only wish the manufacturer had included an option to turn off the blue light that turns on while the machine operates. It can be a slight nuisance at night if you place the humidifier in the bedroom.
The Pure Enrichment PEHUMIDIF has been specifically designed to provide exceptional performance with excellent features at a great price point. It is one of the premium products that can easily be used in grow tents for providing plants with the required amount of moisture.
Instant Dry Air Relief: Ultrasonic cool mist technology...
Year-Round Comfort: High and low-speed settings combined...
Why Did We Like It?
The PEHUMIDIF is one of the humidifiers that can easily be used all around the year. It comes with a 360-degree mist nozzle that makes it easy to balance and regulate the moisture level in your grow tent, creating the ideal conditions for plants to thrive.
This cool-mist humidifier also has a sizeable easy-fill tank that is ideal for use in various spaces, such as bedrooms, offices, etc. Due to the large-sized tank, it can provide plants with enough moisture without requiring frequent refills.
Another thing that we liked most about the PEHUMIDIF is that it comes with all the accessories required. These accessories, such as the AC power adapter, disk cleaning brush, and a replacement cap, can be quite costly when you go out to buy them separately.
Additionally, the manufacturer provides a guaranteed five-year warranty on this humidifier, which makes it one of the best available options.
What Could’ve Been Better?
The only drawback that users may notice about this otherwise impressive product is that it lacks a separate accessory filter for the water. However, it is an extra component that is not required for the operation of the machine. You can even get it for free by posting a review online.
The Crane EE-5301 is one of the most attractive humidifiers capable of impressive performance, thus offering an excellent choice for use in grow tents. Essentially, it is a cool-mist humidifier that can operate for long hours and comes with a huge tank to prevent the air from drying out.
TRANQUILITY: Experience the tranquility of a well-humidified...
ADJUSTABLE HUMIDITY: Take control of your environment with...
Why Did We Like It?
While searching for the best humidifier for a grow tent, we came across the Crane Drop Ultrasonic Cool Mist Humidifier. Among the several impressive features, the 360-degree cool-mist lid immediately caught our eye. It allows users to send the mist in any preferred direction and can be helpful for plants that require a more considerable amount of moisture.
Furthermore, this grow room humidifier comes with variable output settings, allowing you to easily adjust the amount of moisture required at any time of the day. On that note, the standard-setting is ideal for spaces as large as 500 sq ft. When placed in a grow tent, it can quickly provide complete coverage, creating the perfect environment for your plants.
Regarding the design of this product, this ultrasonic cool-mist humidifier features a detachable bottom fill tank that allows you to clean the tank easily at periodic intervals. Similarly, the cap and water level sensor are easily removable for added convenience.
What Could’ve Been Better?
It is one of the best ultrasonic humidifiers for growing plants indoors that also offers a sleek polished design and durable build. Unfortunately, the dehumidifier does become noisy after a few months of use. However, it is an excellent choice to go with if noise is not a major issue.
Unlike most other humidifiers, the Levoit ultrasonic cool-mist humidifier has been explicitly designed to be suitable for growing plants using grow tents. Its ultrasonic technology ensures a uniform spread of fine mist that keeps the tent moisturized so that your plants have enough moisture and can bloom and blossom.
Most humidifiers that people use for growing plants are general-purpose products placed in a grow tent. WIth the Levoit ultrasonic humidifier, the manufacturer has focused on making it specifically suitable as a grow tent humidifier.
This ultrasonic cool mist humidifier has an effective range of up to 376 ft² / 35 m², making it an ideal choice for a grow tent. Not only tents, but you can also use them in grow rooms since they offer complete coverage with their uniform spraying technology.
Moreover, the product is equipped with unique features, including an essential oil tray. Indeed, you can now enjoy the benefits of aromatherapy while providing your plants with adequate moisture.
Also worth mentioning is the four-liter tank that enables the machine to perform all day efficiently, while the auto shut-off feature turns it off when the tank is empty.
What Could’ve Been Better?
The one thing you need to remember when going for this product is that it is not compatible with smart outlets. That is why it is not possible to operate the humidifier remotely. Needless to say, don’t forget to check for compatibility before going with this option.
The Raydrop Cool Mist Humidifier is an ideal choice if you are looking for the perfect combination of style, a compact design, and stellar performance. Moreover, the slim and practical design includes a powerful spray that makes it great for any grow tent.
The slim design is the most striking feature of this grow tent humidifier that separates it from similar products. This design makes it widely applicable in all sorts of spaces. Even if you have a small grow tent, the Raydrop cool mist humidifier will fit in with ease.
This humidifier also comes with a dial knob control, enabling you to select the moisture output conveniently and make adjustments as required. Besides that, the smart indicator lets you know when there is no water left in the tank. And, the shut-off feature will automatically turn off the device in such situations.
Plan on getting a humidifier for a long continuous operation? You will be delighted to know that this cool mist humidifier can run continuously for up to nine hours. Also, it makes very little noise so that you won’t get distracted or disturbed.
What Could’ve Been Better?
The manufacturer has included a small window in the tank so that users can see how much water is left. Unfortunately, the window is too dark to see the water level in practice. However, this minor design flaw does not affect the working of the device.
Reliable, innovative, and high-performing — the Pure Guardian H964AR is an excellent ultrasonic cool mist humidifier that can easily control humidity levels indoors. It is incredibly easy to use and promotes healthy plant growth with its excellent coverage.
The Pure Guardian H964AR is one of the most dependable products we found that made providing indoor plants moisture a simple task. It comes with a one-gallon tank that can easily cover spaces as large as 320 sq. ft.
Besides offering superior coverage, this ultrasonic humidifier can run continuously for up to 70 hours. In the case of extremely dry indoor conditions, this device is one of the most effective ways of ensuring that your plants do not die from a lack of water.
Another impressive feature is the clean tank, which does not allow mold to grow on the tank surface, a common problem with such products. Furthermore, the aromatherapy tray allows you to add essential oils to the tank to create a pleasing and calming environment.
Add to that a low-water indicator light and a night light feature, and you get one of the best products in the category.
What Could’ve Been Better?
It is also one of the more compact humidifiers you can get at this price point. However, in our experience, we found this product to be comparatively difficult to clean. The tank does not come with handles, making it difficult to hold for cleaning purposes.
Vicks is a household name, generally known for over-the-counter medications. However, what many people do not know is that the American brand also manufactures a range of excellent home products, such as this V745A/V745-JUV humidifier. It is one of the best grow tent humidifiers that offers easy operation and powerful performance.
Breathe Better, Live Better - Maintain ideal humidity levels...
Portable, Easy to Use and Clean - With a top fill, 1 gallon...
Why Did We Like It?
Unlike most products on our list, the Vicks V745A/V745-JUV is a warm mist humidifier that releases a fine spray for maintaining the desired humidity levels. What makes it especially suited for a grow tent is its ease of use, helping you effortlessly maintain humidity levels at 40-60%.
We really liked the filter-free design, which helps in saving effort and time since you do not need to change filters. Combine this with the wide tank opening provided for easy filling and cleaning, and you get one of the best grow room humidifiers on the market.
This humidifier comes with a one-gallon tank that allows it to run continuously for up to 24 hours. You can simply place it near your plants in the grow tent and let it run. Furthermore, it operates without noise and the two different settings are great for adjusting the moisture levels easily.
What Could’ve Been Better?
As with most warm air humidifiers, the Vicks V745A/V745-JUV is also highly susceptible to mold growth. To prevent that, you will need to clean it very frequently. One way to prevent mold growth is by using purified or filtered water, which hinders the growth of fungi.
If you are looking for a humidifier that can be used for long hours continuously without the need for monitoring, the Everlasting Comfort cool mist humidifier is a great choice. It is an ultrasonic humidifier with a 1.6-gallon tank and comes with an excellent replacement policy.
6L TANK FOR BEDROOMS & WHOLE HOUSE: Our ultrasonic cool mist...
EASY TO CLEAN FILTERLESS DESIGN: Built with a wide water...
Why Did We Like It?
This ultrasonic cool mist humidifier is one of the most powerful items on our list and can operate continuously for up to 50 hours. This feature makes it an excellent choice for promoting healthy plant growth indoors.
Equally impressive is the fact that it can easily cover spaces as large as 500 square feet, efficiently removing dry air to improve the humidity level. It is one of the cool mist humidifiers that come with an essential oil tray, enabling you to add pleasing fragrances to the water.
Furthermore, this is a filterless humidifier, helping you save effort and time while providing your plants with the required amount of moisture.
You will also be pleased to know that the Everlasting Comfort humidifier comes with a two-year replacement warranty. In case you encounter any issues, the manufacturer will quickly replace the product or parts, or provide a complete refund.
What Could’ve Been Better?
There is no doubt that this device can easily last for many days without refilling. According to the manufacturer’s claims it can last for up to six days, but it only lasted for five during our testing phase. It is still a reasonable period, and you won't be disappointed with this product.
As we near the end of our list, it is time to introduce to you the Magictec Cool Mist Humidifier. Magictec is an American manufacturer of high-quality home products for comfortable living. This product is one of the best cool mist humidifiers on the market that is great for growing plants indoors.
Magictec is known for its quality products that offer impressive performance, and this cool mist humidifier is no exception. It comes with a 2.5-liter water tank that can be quickly filled from any sink. It is large enough to allow the humidifier to operate continuously for 24 hours.
Then, there is the 360-degree humidifier mist nozzle that you can use to direct the mist in any direction you require. This feature doubles as an air humidifier for grow tents since it can even reach plants kept away from the humidifier.
Included with the adjustable misting settings is the power-saving auto shut-off feature which helps turn off the device when the humidity level is not too low. You can save on power bills easily while getting the best output with this device.
Finally, the device operates at less than 30 decibels, making it an excellent whisper-quiet option on the market.
What Could’ve Been Better?
These cold-mist humidifiers are highly effective in improving relative humidity levels in any space. However, it comes with a complicated water tank that requires a lot of effort for removing, refilling, and reinstalling it. The manufacturer should work on the design to make it more user-friendly.
Coming to the final product on the list, the Vornado HU1-0048-43 is an exceptional product that comes with an innovative design and intelligent humidification function. It is a powerful humidifier that can easily be used for growing plants in a grow tent by controlling the humidity level in any room.
INTELLIGENT HUMIDIFICATION — EV100 senses how much...
Why Did We Like It?
The Vornado HU1-0048-43 comes with deep pitched blades that work efficiently to pull large volumes of dry air with the help of the 360-degree air intake. The device also offers complete humidification of all spaces with the help of the signature Vortex action.
The HU-0048-43 also impressed us by its intelligent sensing technology, due to which it can estimate how much humidity and circulation is required. This device can easily maintain the humidity level that is ideal for your indoor plants.
Furthermore, the simple push-button controls help you select from 3 different fan settings and six output levels, depending on the preference. The fan can be set to low, medium, or high, according to how much moisture the plants require.
Another impressive feature is the SimpleTank System that makes refilling and cleaning the device very easy, helping you save time and effort.
What Could’ve Been Better?.
While the Vornado HU-0048-43 performs as the manufacturer claimed, the included humidistat does not display the humidity levels very accurately. We tested it using other products, and the humidistat was off by a significant margin. If you are not concerned about the working of the humidistat, then this is an excellent product.
Pros
Easy to use
Efficient performance
Attractive design
Superb build quality
Cons
Inaccurate dehumidistat
Humidifier For Grow Tent Buying Guide
Now you know about the best humidifiers available on the market for use with grow tents. However, knowing about them is winning only half the battle.
Several factors need to be considered when buying a humidifier for your grow tent. We’ve compiled a detailed buying guide that lists all these essential factors in the following section.
Going through them will help you understand the elements that should be considered before making a purchase.
1. Humidifier Type
One of the first things to consider is the type of humidifier you plan to get. Generally, humidifiers can be broadly classified into warm mist and cool mist humidifiers.
Warm mist humidifiers are also known as steam vaporizers and are generally the cheapest option on the market. However, they do use more energy than cool mist humidifiers. On the other hand, most humidifiers available on the market are cool mist humidifiers,
Cool mist humidifiers may use evaporative technology or ultrasonic technology. For providing your plants with enough moisture, both types of humidifiers can be a great option.
2. Humidifier Size
The size of a humidifier plays a crucial role in determining several aspects of using a humidifier. It affects how long the device can function, where you can place it, what is its water holding capacity, etc.
For grow tents, which are smaller in size, humidifiers having a compact form factor are the best choice, while you can use larger humidifiers in grow rooms. Smaller humidifiers are also more portable, so you can easily move them about as required to ensure that all your plants are getting enough moisture.
You need to be careful when selecting a humidifier, as getting a very large one can lead to extra condensation on surfaces, which can be detrimental to plant health. Larger humidifiers can also lead to too much moisture in the atmosphere, leading to the growth of mold as well. Smaller
3. Tank Size
The size of the tank directly influences how much water a humidifier can hold. The bigger the tank, the longer the period for which a humidifier can run. Larger tanks also help save time and effort since you do not need to keep refilling them at frequent intervals.
Generally, small-sized humidifiers have a water holding capacity ranging from 200 to 300 ml and can run for 12 hours. You will need to refill the tank about twice a day in such cases. On the other hand, humidifiers with 6-liter tanks can even run continuously for 60 hours.
However, just as is the case with the humidifier itself, a smaller tank is much more manageable and portable. It can also be cleaned quickly and easily. You will need to select between a more manageable or a large capacity tank.
4. Ease of Use
Easy to overlook, ease of use is a significant factor when buying a humidifier. Before buying, you should check how easy it is to empty and refill the tank and operate the humidifier. Many devices offer several settings that let you make precise adjustments as required.
Also, when looking to use it for growing plants indoors, make sure to check how easy it is to move about. In the case of humidifiers that utilize evaporative technology, make sure that the wick is economical and straightforward to replace. Additionally, the controls should also be user-friendly and should not require technical know-how to operate.
5. Maintenance
The level of maintenance that a humidifier requires is also one of the most important things to consider. The easier to maintain a humidifier, the more convenient an option it is. Maintenance involves cleaning the device and taking other steps to ensure that it can run for as long as possible.
You can find humidifiers that come with easily removable tanks, caps, and other components that make them very easy to clean and maintain. Additionally, spare parts such as caps and tanks should be easily available on the market for a product that you plan to use for a long time.
6. Additional Features
Manufacturers offer various features to provide a good user experience for their customers. These features may be in the form of night lights, automatic turn-off functionality, mist adjustment, and more.
Night lights are an aesthetic feature that can help you sleep better at night. Additionally, they can also enable you to see how much water is left in the tank. Similarly, the mist adjustment feature allows you to control the amount of mist being dispersed by the humidifier.
The auto-shutdown feature is one of the most useful features that automatically turns off the device after a specified time or when the water tank becomes empty. It can also help extend the life of your humidifier, as running on an empty tank can damage it.
Several options on the market offer different types of features. However, keep in mind that a greater number of features also results in a higher cost. Alternatively, it can even make the user experience unnecessarily complicated.
7. Customer Service
The first thing to look for in this case is how easily you can contact the manufacturer. The manufacturer’s customer service determines how easily and quickly issues can be resolved. They may provide different means of contacting them, such as by phone, chat, or email.
Also, speak to other buyers to know how quickly and effectively the manufacturer resolves any issues. The manufacturer’s ability and willingness to honor warranties and guarantees and offer replacements or refunds all form a part of the customer service.
8. Budget
Last but not the least, your budget will determine which humidifier is the most suitable for your needs. Generally, larger humidifiers and those that offer more features are more expensive. Smaller humidifiers may be more affordable, but make sure such products do not compromise quality and performance.
To be safe, select a product that is neither too costly nor misses out on too many features for the best experience.
Verdict
Now, it is time for us to wind up. It’s been an exciting ride, and we hope you enjoyed reading our guide as much as we did putting it together. But before we go, we would like to let you in on our favorites from the list.
Our top pick would have to be the Honeywell , which offers excellent performance with unparalleled ease of use. Then, there is the HOmeLabs , which is more suitable for those who want a customizable option at a great price.
Finally, you have the Pure Enrichment PEHUMIDIF, which comes with a great warranty and all the accessories included in the box. With that said, it is time for us to sign off. Be sure to leave a comment below and let us know what you think of our favorites.
In this tech-driven day and age, a drawing tablet is an indispensable tool in any graphic artist’s arsenal.
Not only have these amazing products made designing digital art a smooth breeze, but the level of efficiency and accuracy they offer is simply unmatched. And the best part? They are available in various sizes, allowing users to choose as per their requirements.
Thus, if you are a graphic artist, going for such a product would certainly be a wise decision. However, since the market is flooded with various cheap brands that offer below-par performance, choosing the right one can seem like a daunting task.
That’s why we have compared two of the most renowned drawing tablet brands, Huion and Wacom, to help you decide which one would be a better option for you. And to make matters a bit more interesting, we’ve provided detailed reviews for some top-quality drawing tablets from both brands.
So, make sure you read the entire article!
Huion Vs Wacom | Brand Overview
Huion was founded in 2011 in China and is best known for manufacturing and designing LED light pads, pen display tablets, and a range of other interactive input devices. It is dedicated to optimizing user experience and bringing their requirements to life, which is why it has customers from across the globe, including the USA, Japan, Canada, and more.
On the other hand, Wacom is a Japanese brand founded in 1983 that mainly focuses on producing graphic tablets and other related devices. Also, it is known for offering solutions to top educational and medical companies and top-notch user interface technologies. The brand has many creative customers globally, from auto-design and manga to cinema and animation.
Huion Vs Wacom | Detailed Comparison
Here, we have provided a detailed comparison between both brands.
1. Multi-touch And Express Keys
Multi-touch enables graphic tablets to identify different points of contact at the same time. Thus, it helps improve the functionality of the device, especially when it comes to zooming in and out and rotating. You can enjoy this feature in Wacom tablets across its Cintiq and Intuos series but not on any Huion tablet.
But even though it is a handy feature, it is certainly not a must-have like the express keys, so it is not a deal-breaker for most people.
Speaking of the express keys, they are common in pretty much every drawing tablet as they are useful for functions such as zooming, saving, and undoing. The main difference usually lies in how many buttons the drawing tablets come with. Generally, you get to see more buttons on bigger tablets, which can help make the workflow easier.
Now, as far as Wacom graphics tablets are concerned, all of them sport such functional keys, with Wacom Intuos pro featuring a unique touch ring. This touch ring enables you to zoom in and out by simply sliding your finger on the wheel. Huion tablets also come with express buttons except for the 420 models.
2. Connectivity
There are mainly two types of connectivity available on the market: wired and wireless.
If you are someone who has to spend a significant amount of time working outside or away from the desk, make sure to choose a wireless option. However, if your work is mainly desk-oriented, a wired model, we think, would be a better option.
Moving on, the Bluetooth connectivity available in Wacom Intuos models do better than the 2.4Ghz RF wireless in some Huion tablets, as the former can be connected wirelessly. On the other hand, the 2.4Ghz wireless technique of Huion means that you will have to plug it into the USB adapter.
Thus, it can be safely said that Wacom beats Huion in terms of connectivity.
3. Design
Both Wacom and Huion tablets feature aesthetically pleasing designs. If you compare the Huion Kamvas 22 Plus with the Wacom Cintiq 22, you can see that both of them are essentially screens without express buttons like other drawing tablets.
However, you can get a Wacom express key remote featuring 17 customizable keys and a touch ring for the Wacom model. Unfortunately, the Huion Kamvas model doesn’t offer a matching accessory. You will have to connect it with an Android device and then work on the graphic tablet.
Apart from that, both the models feature an adaptable stand that enables users to adjust the height as per their requirements. However, the Wacom stand is more flexible as it has an angle adjustment ranging between 16 and 82°.
The Huion stand does a great job as well, with an adjustment range between 20 and 80°, but certainly doesn’t match the flexibility offered by the Wacom stand. Therefore, Wacom is a notch better than Huion in terms of design.
4. Pen/Stylus
The stylus/pen is perhaps the most important of a graphic tablet. And in order to get the most out of your product, always ensure that it comes with a battery-free digital pen.
Such pens are not just durable and easy to use, but they also last longer. And unlike the ordinary styluses, they don’t use batteries but the inductive current from the tablet’s surface to power themselves.
Almost all Wacom models come with battery-free styluses. On the other hand, Huion provides them only in its Kamvas tablets, but don’t worry; you can purchase them separately. Also, both types come with express keys and pretty much work the same way.
Apart from that, another important factor that you should consider is how the pen erases. Graphic tablets such as the Cintiq Pro from Wacom come with a unique feature that allows users to turn their stylus upside down and erase the art. However, other digital pens from the brand need the artist to push aside the button to erase the drawing.
Nevertheless, Wacom’s Pro models allow for the most natural erasing motion. Plus, with Wacom tablets, users can customize the pen functions through the tablet properties. A pen tilt feature, for instance, detects the angle at which the tool and the drawing tablet are inclined. This results in natural-looking pen, brush, and eraser strokes in apps that support tilt sensitivity.
While talking about digital pens, it is difficult to keep their nibs out of the conversation. Both Wacom and Huion tablets come with extra nibs so that you can replace them when they wear out with time. Additionally, Wacom tablets come with flexible nibs, made using soft plastic in addition to the ordinary ones, which we are sure a lot of users love.
Lastly, it is worth noting that Wacom tips are not compatible with Huion tablets and vice versa.
5. Display
When comparing the displays, the tablet monitor size is a crucial factor to consider as it directly determines the cost of the tablet.
The Kamvas tablets from Huion boast outstanding colors. In fact, the Huion Kamvas 22 Plus features a 140% sRGB color gamut, which, we must say, is quite impressive. This is because of its special Quantum Dots Technology, which offers a 1:1,200 contrast ratio on the screen.
You might be surprised to know that it is the same technology used in Samsung OLED panels, making it one of the best displays for drawing tablets. The same thing goes for the Huion Kamvas Pro 16, which has a 120% sRGB color coverage, slightly better than the 96% of the Wacom Cintiq 16.
Finally, both Wacom and Huion tablets include matte, anti-glare displays that make them easy to use under bright lighting conditions.
6. Pressure Sensitivity
Both brands design their drawing tablets with top-notch pen pressure sensitivity that ensures they offer a natural and fun drawing experience. Thus, it means the amount of pressure a user exerts on the screen determines the heaviness/lightness and thinness/thickness of the lines they draw, just like a real pen.
Although, when the number of levels crosses 1,000, it becomes very difficult to point out the difference between the devices. This is because all drawing tablets can pick up details from even the minutest of variations in the applied pressure.
However, since Wacom and Huion are two of the leading manufacturers of drawing tablets, they offer at least 2,048 pressure sensitivity in their digital pens. Therefore, it is pretty much useless to compare the level of pressure sensitivity between the two brands, as you will barely find any difference.
7. Resolution (LPI)
Measured in lines per inch (LPI), the pen resolution of a tablet dictates how well the tablet can detect minor changes. Newer drawing tablets can capture up to 5,080 LPI, thereby offering artists an incredible level of detail. However, even a tablet with 1,270 LPI can provide enough detail to capture projects perfectly well.
Although there are differences between the Wacom and Huion tablets in this aspect, both of their pen resolutions are sufficient for most users.
8. Performance
When it comes to performance, the tablets of both brands are outstanding. Wacom offers a refined texture on their drawing tablets, which is neither too smooth nor too rough to draw on. On the other hand, Huion tablets aren’t as smooth as Wacom tablets, yet they still work well.
9. Warranty & Support
Usually, Wacom and Huion drawing tablets are backed by a one-year warranty. But the tablets from the Wacom Pro series provide a two-year warranty. And while Wacom offers 24/7 online chat and phone support, Huion provides support through email, Skype, and chat. Thus, in terms of warranty and support, Wacom beats Huion.
10. Price
Huion tablets are economically priced. So, naturally, that makes them a perfect choice for newbies that want to use the tablets occasionally and for those on a limited budget.
On the other hand, Wacom tablets tend to be three times costlier than Huion tablets. That is because they do a better job, be it in terms of providing customer service quality, multi-touch functionality, pens, etc. Not to mention, Wacom tablets are made using high-quality and durable materials and therefore can resist rough usage and drops better than Huion tablets.
Huion Vs Wacom | Top Drawing Tablets
Here, we will be taking a look at some of the top drawing tablets from both brands to help you make an informed purchase.
1. Top Drawing Tablets For Professionals
These are the best drawing tablets for professionals from both brands:
Pro-level Picture Quality: Enjoy the 4K UHD (3840x2160)...
Precise Color Expression: Featured with industry-leading...
Apart from providing one of the best digital drawing experiences, the Huion Kamvas Pro 24 can meet all your online teaching needs by allowing you to use various teaching software. Artists and online tutors from all across the world have praised this device for its highly functional features. So, let’s dig a little deeper.
Why Did We Like It?
Straight off the bat, this pen display tablet boasts a full laminated screen, which minimizes the parallax effect and delivers an incredible aesthetic experience. Coupled with this is an anti-glare glass that lessens the distracting glare caused by the ambient lights and enhances the brightness and viewing angles of the display.
Thus, the pen tablet not only enhances your drawing experience but also protects your eyes from the harmful “glare” effect.
Apart from that, it comes with a battery-free pen, which allows you to work continuously for prolonged periods without having to worry about the pen running out of juice. Furthermore, the pen supports the tilt function, thereby offering a natural drawing experience with top-notch accuracy, which is no less than a bonus in the books of professional graphic artists.
Additionally, this Huion tablet sports two touch bars and 20 customizable express keys, allowing users to scroll the page or zoom in and out of the canvas without breaking a sweat. And the best part? It is designed for right and left-handed users, unlike ordinary pen tablets.
Last but not least, the HUION KAMVAS Pro 24 is backed by a one-year warranty. So, you don’t need to worry about defects and technical issues; at least for the first year, the brand has got you covered.
Stunning 23.6" touchscreen display with 4K resolution so you...
True-to-life color with 99% Adobe RGB & 97% sRGB color...
Now, let’s talk about the Cintiq Pro 24 from Wacom, which is meant for designers and artists looking to add a revolutionary pen-on-screen drawing experience to their PCs. Sporting a beautiful 4K display, this Wacom drawing tablet brings a powerful array of capabilities, which professionals wouldn’t want to miss out on.
Why Did We Like It?
We were impressed with almost everything this Wacom tablet had to offer. However, what caught our attention right from the start was its 4k display, offering spectacular viewing angles and incredible color accuracy. Therefore, users can see every minute detail of their artwork. On top of that, it is etched, thereby reducing reflections and glare while offering a tactile and distinct drawing experience.
The graphics tablet offers users one of the most advanced digital pen performances. With four times higher pen pressure sensitivity and accuracy than the previous Wacom pens, the Pro Pen 2 offers unmatched results in creative control. Thus, you can rest assured that it will provide a realistic pen-on-paper feel to help you achieve outstanding results.
Moving on, the express key remote sports 17 customizable buttons within easy reach, which is great. But especially fascinating are the radial menus and the on-screen keypad that further offers one-touch shortcuts. Naturally, one of the best graphic tablets that any professional graphic designer can hope to get their hands on.
Pros
Offers top-notch pen performance
Delivers spectacular viewing angles and color accuracy
Reduces reflections and glare
Offers decent battery performance
Cons
Sports an expensive price tag
2. Top Drawing Tablets For Beginners
These are the best drawing tablets for beginners from both brands:
Android Supported - HUION H610 Pro V2 is compatible with Mac...
Innovative Tilt Control System - Provide you better pressure...
If you are an amateur hobbyist or a new designer looking for an affordable yet quality drawing tablet, then the HUION H610 PRO V2 is for you. With no software or fiddly drivers to download, the product makes for a practical solution to all those who have little to no experience of using a drawing tablet. Keep reading to know all the features on offer.
Why Did We Like It?
First things first, the drawing tablet features eight programmable express keys, which provide easy access to your set shortcuts. Thus, it not just helps improve your efficiency but also saves you precious time. Additionally, the product works with drawing programs such as Clip Studio, Illustrator, Paint Tool Sai, Photoshop, which gives it an edge over other tablets in a similar price bracket.
Plus, it comes with OTG connectors out of the box that let you effortlessly connect the drawing tablet to your Android device and draw on the go. So, compatibility should be the least of your worries with this product.
With the highly advanced pen tilt technology, its PW100 battery-free pen performs like traditional markers, pencils, and brushes. Thus, you get to have more fun while drawing. And since it is battery-free, you can start working immediately without charging.
At under 3 pounds, it is ultra-thin and portable, thereby making it easy for you to put it in a bag and carry it around wherever you want. Finally, it sports an affordable price tag, which ensures it delivers good value for money.
Pros
Good value for money option
Boasts a lightweight construction
Supports a wide range of drawing applications
An ideal choice for beginners and amateur hobbyists
Wacom Intuos Small Graphics Drawing Tablet: Enjoy industry...
Works With All Software: Wacom Intuos tablet can be used in...
The Wacom Intuos CTL4100 has been specifically designed for those who are fairly new to editing photos, writing, or drawing on their Android device or computer. Sporting a large drawing area, this drawing tablet helps bring your best ideas to life. From our experience with this product, we can assure you that it has almost everything that would help you get creative digitally.
Why Did We Like It?
To begin with, it comes with a pressure-sensitive pen that offers both control and top-notch accuracy at the same time. Plus, it has been designed for both right and left-handed users, making it an instant hit among the masses. Oh! And did we forget to mention that it’s battery-free? Thus, you can use it whenever you want without any issues.
Additionally, the two programmable express keys on the pen and the four on the drawing tablet deserve special mention as they keep your favorite shortcuts at the push of a button. Now, users owning a Chromebook will be glad to know that the drawing tablet has been tested to the compatibility standards of Google and hence is compatible with a Chromebook.
Lastly, when you register the product on the computer, you get access to premium software like Clip Studio Paint Pro, Corel AfterShot Pro 3, and Corel Painter Essentials 8. Overall, one of the affordable yet high-quality drawing tablets currently available on the market.
Pros
Comes with a top-quality pen
Available at a reasonable price
Sports a fairly large drawing area
Easy to use
Cons
Takes a while to install the necessary drivers
Verdict: Huion or Wacom?
So, which is a better brand, Huion or Wacom?
In our opinion, a Huion drawing tablet, in many ways, can perform as well as a Wacom drawing tablet for an affordable price. So, if you have budget constraints, we strongly recommend going with Huion as it has some really exceptional options in its repertoire.
Also, if you will be using the drawing tablet to enjoy your hobbies rather than professional purposes, go with Huion without a second thought.
However, if you want the absolute best experience and your budget permits, then Wacom would be the brand to go with. That is because Wacom tablets come with better styluses, sport a durable construction, and offer top-notch customer service quality. Not to mention, 4K resolution and multi-touch functionality are also available on some Wacom products, but not on any Huion tablets.
Hopefully, now you will be able to make the right choice as per your requirements. So, on that note, we’ll call it a wrap. Until next time, take care!
A standard size for water volleyball is about 30 ft. x 60 ft., which can be limited based on the players involved. Visual boundaries can be set if the pool size exceeds the play area.
If you’ve ever attended a pool party, then you know how exhilarating a game of water volleyball can be. Slinging a ball over the volleyball pool nets to score a point is probably the best feeling for any water sports enthusiast!
But if you want to play water volleyball at home, knowing the size and shape requirements of the pool is important. So, let’s see how wide your pool needs to be for playing volleyball with family and friends.
Factors Governing The Ideal Water Volleyball Court Size
It goes without saying that a water volleyball court must match the players using it. That is to say if the players can’t play comfortably and have fun on a court, the court size is far from ideal.
So, here are the factors you should consider when sizing a pool up for a game of water volleyball.
1. Swimming Potential
Movement in water is slower and more tiring than on land, which makes it important to consider how well the players can swim. If the players are not experienced swimmers, a shallow pool that isn’t particularly large will do just fine.
At the other end of the spectrum, experienced swimmers may need more room to maneuver in, making a standard water volleyball court ideal.
As for people with moderate swimming experience, like me, they can play in a medium or standard-sized pool. The only point to note is that such people will receive quite the quad workout during play.
2. Player Age
Younger players will need a more shallow water volleyball court than older and taller players. As such, pool safety becomes a much larger point of concern for children than for adults.
Thus, water volleyball courts can be deeper for adults than for children, seeing how the former are typically taller and more experienced with swimming. For children, the upper limit of volleyball depth is around two feet.
3. Player Stamina
Water volleyball is a true test of how well your cardio exercises are working, as I found out during my first game.
People in strong cardiovascular shape will be able to perform well in shallow or deep waters, as well as larger volleyball courts. Such people have built their shape through daily exercises, be it on land or in water. Those who skip cardio exercises? Not quite so.
Those who are not in peak cardio shape will require a smaller or shallower pool for them to have fun with the game.
Water Volleyball Court Size
The standard water volleyball court size is 30 ft. x 60 ft., but it needn’t necessarily match for you to host a game comfortably. These measurements are similar to the sand court, but your pool needn’t be as large since movement is less in water than on sand.
That said, your pool needs to be large enough to accommodate all the players. You don’t need to follow the Olympic guidelines for a simple backyard game, and the court can follow suit. After all, it’s no fun if players don’t have enough room to maneuver around comfortably.
For a 3v3 game, your pool can be about 16 x 24 feet for each player to comfortably move around in. This size is also not so large as to become an issue when switching sides mid-match.
Water Volleyball Court Depth
Water volleyball courts are not particularly deep, being about four or five feet deep at most. Depending on the age and stamina of the players, this depth can be lower, with the shallowest water volleyball courts being about two feet deep.
The Ideal Pool Type For Water Volleyball
You can use in-ground or above-ground pools for water volleyball, so long as they are the right size. The only place where they differ is with the net installation kits, which affix to the pools differently. And if you want, you can make the volleyball net a permanent fixture.
Tip
You may want to note how you keep the pool clean, as certain cleaning compounds can corrode metallic mounting kits. This is particularly the case if you use salt water for pool cleansing, which can seriously damage an in-pool mounting kit.
The Best Size For A Water Volleyball Net
The standard net width for water volleyball is 24 feet, but it doesn’t necessarily have to match or exceed the width of the pool. Feel free to install a net that fits the best with your pool size and game requirements, provided that the net can be installed comfortably.
As for its height, a standard volleyball net stands at 7’11 ⅝” (seven feet, 11 and ⅝ inches) in a typical water volleyball game. You can also customize the net height so that players don’t have a tough time launching the ball over.
Pool Shape
The pool shape can make or break the possibility of being able to play water volleyball comfortably. Rectangular or oval pools face no issues, providing ample room for everyone involved to partake in the activity comfortably.
But dimensions alone don’t make for a good water volleyball court. There must be an equal amount of space on either side of the net, so neither team has their movements restricted. Hence, I do not recommend round pools and other abstract shapes, as they can hinder this equal playing field.
Setting Up Boundaries
If you have a differently-shaped pool with a large enough area to accommodate both teams in an equal capacity, you may want to establish boundaries. Indicators that float on the water can act as said boundaries, and if the ball lands outside, it can be considered out-of-bounds.
In case you don’t have such boundary markers, you can improvise and put chairs, shoes, or spare poles as visual indicators for the boundary.
Where Can I Buy A Pool Volleyball Net?
Sports stores typically have pool volleyball nets available for purchase, with a wide range of net types and sizes. You may also find nets in retail stores like Home Depot and Walmart if you’re looking for a quick purchase without worrying about pro-quality nets.
If you so wish, you can come up with DIY pool volleyball net ideasto serve as a makeshift net. This can be as simple as a pole on either side of the pool to something more elaborate, such as a suspended cloth mesh.
Warning
If you want to use a backyard volleyball net for water volleyball, remember that beach volleyball nets are differently sized. They are larger than what is needed in a typical game of water volleyball, making them unfit for the purpose.
How Wide Does A Pool Need To Be For Volleyball Conclusion
A water volleyball court can be as large as 30 ft x 60 ft, but it can be sized as per player preferences. The court size and depth can be altered to suit everyone involved, and if the pool is larger than the court, you can set visual boundaries.
All you need to remember is to cater to the ability and skill of the players you host. After all, having fun is the priority in a game of water volleyball, and the court should not deter that.
So, set up your own house rules, plant a net smack-dab in the middle of the court, establish boundaries and play away!
While it is not child’s play, wiring an outlet is not impossible either!
Wiring a 220-volt outlet can be a tad bit risky if you do not know how to go about it. Since you are dealing with electrical points, you must go by the book.
But on the bright side, once you master this process, you will be saving so much money that would otherwise have to be paid to an electrician.
We have detailed the process in the form of steps to make it easier for you to follow.
Read on to know the process of wiring a 220 outlet!
How to Wire a 220 Outlet For a Welder
Step 1
It is essential to first switch off the circuit breaker. The breaker must be powered off, and the handle needs to be locked. After all, the primary circuit cannot be functioning during the process. Once you have made sure that this is done, move on to the next step.
Step 2
Firstly, remove the metal cover. This is important to get access to the breakers. After making sure that the circuit breaker is dead, plug in a 50 amp two-pole breaker into the box. The box should be able to support a two-pole breaker. Check beforehand if there are two spaces available to put in the two.
Once you are done determining, you can go ahead and hit the hardware or the electrical supply store. You need to purchase a breaker, some electrical wire, and an outlet.
Step 3
It is time to attach the flush mount to two gang boxes on the wall surface. Make sure that it is adequately fixed and cannot be moved (use screws for this purpose). After you are sure the gang boxes are in place, proceed.
Step 4
This is a crucial step - it is time to fix the wires. You must have a minimum of 6 inches of wire already inside the receptacle box. Some sheathing should remain exposed in both boxes. This includes the circuit breaker box and 2-gang box.
Now using that same cable ripper, you need to slowly pull out about 6 inches of the plastic sheath off the wire. The wire is the same one that is used inside our 2 gang box. Once you have achieved this, move on.
Step 5
It is time to pull out 12 inches of the plastic sheath of the wire used. Use the same cable ripper to do that. This part of the wire will go inside the circuit breaker box. Please maintain the exact measurements while conducting the process.
Step 6
Here you would need to strip off 1 inch of the sheath with the wire stripper. Be careful not to strip off any more than that.
Step 7
It is time to fix the wires. Bring one end of the wire inside the circuit box and connect the other end inside the 2-gang box.
Step 8
The next step involves implementing the wire connection. First, concentrate on the wire inside the 2-gang box to provide a connection with your outlet. To make this happen, you will require 3 wires - a black, red, and a bare one.
The bare one is the ground. There will also be a fourth white wire, but it is neutral, and you need to skip using that. To prevent any mistakes, wrap the white wire with electrical tape and seal it securely inside the 2-gang box.
Step 9
After the wires are in place, put some non-corrosive agent at the tip of all those wires. This will keep the connection from corroding.
Step 10
Now take the black, red, and bare wire and connect them to a receptacle. Hook up each colored wire against the correct screw. The black and red wire should be attached to the two-prong terminal, while the bare one needs to be connected to the ground terminal.
Place it with the screw facing up and now put the cover back on. You need to fix the cover properly to ensure that the job looks professional.
Step 11
After you are done, connect the three wires to the breaker. Here you will again have the white wire which you need to fold and keep securely inside the box. These wires need to be stripped, and the non-corrosive stuff has to be attached to the end.
Step 12
It is time to hook up the ground wire. Also, hook up the black and red wire in accordance with the breaker manual, and you are done.
Conclusion
When you go over to a hardware shop to buy the required products, make a note of the quality of the specified products you are purchasing. An overloaded circuit can be extremely hazardous and can cause a fire to erupt, or someone could get electrocuted. The whole equipment could also be damaged in one go.
Always choose a breaker rated at or above the required amperage for your welder. The gauge wire for the circuit size should also be perfect. Also, choose an appropriate outlet to match your welder’s plug. If you are not sure which one to go with, ask the dealer for help.
And with that, you are good to go - you can now proceed to set up your outlet.
Different pool testing kits are available to test the chemistry and water quality in a swimming pool. However, the instructions for using each test kit usually vary, and not all kits offer accurate readings of the pool chemicals.
When it comes to testing the chemistry and quality of your pool water, you need only the best pool test kit offering impeccable accuracy.
Testing water health is the best way to regularly maintain and take care of your swimming pool. Merely checking the water temperature isn't enough for proper pool maintenance. Instead, you'll need to conduct thorough chemical tests using the right pool testing kit. Today, we'll discuss how pool testing kits work.
Why Do You Need To Test Pool Water?
What's a swimming pool without water? A large hole in your backyard!
But simply having water in your pool isn't enough to enjoy a fun and relaxing time. You need to make sure that the pool water is clean and healthy to avoid health risks.
Multiple people use swimming pools at any given time, especially if it's a public pool. So, it's crucial to test the pool water and treat it regularly to keep it crystal clear and prevent the spread of infectious water-borne diseases. Plus, clean water can significantly enhance your pool experience while preventing erosion and damage to the pool itself.
What Are The Tests To Check Pool Water?
If you want to keep the pool water sparkling clean and maintain its water chemistry, you need to ensure that certain factors are kept in check. The water chemistry of a clean and healthy swimming pool should have the following characteristics:
Water pH: 7.4 to 7.6
Total alkalinity: 80 to 120 ppm
Calcium hardness: 200 to 400 ppm
Free available chlorine: 2 to 4 ppm
Bromine: 3 to 5 ppm
Cyanuric acid: 30 to 50 ppm
Metals: 0 ppm
Phosphates: 0 ppm
Total dissolved solids (TDS): 0 to 2,500 ppm in non-salt pools
Pool kits might show slightly different results when testing the pool water, but that's usually normal. Try to adjust the water chemistry levels regularly to keep them as close to the ideal range as possible. If you test and treat the pool water regularly and consistently, there's no need to worry.
Special Pool Tests
Standard pool testing kits can accurately perform four or five tests, such as pH, total alkalinity, chlorine, and acid demand test. However, there are specialty tests that come in handy under certain circumstances.
For instance, the biguanide test strips work for the biguanide water treatment systems present in some pools. These test strips determine the pool pH, sanitizer levels, calcium hardness, and alkalinity. Similarly, you should use a salt test strip to test the salt levels in saltwater pools. You'll also need to check for chlorine if there's a salt-chlorine generator.
Furthermore, you need a phosphate test kit to check the phosphate levels of the pool water. Phosphates can leach into the pools from lawn fertilizers or other sources and can cause algal growth. On the other hand, if your pool surface shows water stains, you can check for metals, like iron and copper, using special test strips.
You can also use a DPD kit to test for chloramines. A ShockCheck test strip will help you determine when to perform shocking to get rid of chloramines. At the same time, you can use the SafeDip test meter to check the TDS levels of your pool water.
Warning
People often ignore discoloration of the pool walls, but it signifies algal deposition. Your pool water will need frequent testing and super-chlorination to remedy the situation.
What Are The Different Pool Test Kits?
Different standard test kits are available to test your pool's water chemistry and chemical levels. These standard test kits are primarily responsible for testing the pool's pH, acid and base demand, chlorine, and alkalinity. So, let's take a look at these different test kits for your pool maintenance.
1. Pool Test Strips
Test strips are the most inexpensive way to test your pool water, and they are fast, fairly accurate, and easy to use. There are some basic testing strips that you can use to check the individual chemical levels while testing pool water. But it's best to use the 7-in-1 or 4-in-1 testing strips to carry out several tests using one test kit to check different pool chemical levels.
One of the standout features of these testing strips is they are super simple to use. You can dip them in your pool water, shake off the excess water, and get the readings within seconds. Most test strips are color-coded, so you can quickly identify which strip to use for a particular water test. They also have an easy-to-read guidance chart on the bottle for your reference.
2. Liquid Test Kit
A liquid test kit is more accurate than test strips when measuring the pool water's chemical levels. If you want to compare these liquid titration pool test kits vs. strips, the former is more expensive than the latter but offers a complete and superior testing solution.
These kits come with chemical reagents, which you add to the collected water sample drop by drop. You can determine the pool water testing results depending on the amount of reagent added and the water sample's subsequent change in color. Some liquid testing kits are low-maintenance and easy to use, while others, such as the DPD test kit, need careful maintenance.
3. Digital Pool Testers
People often ask - are pool testing strips accurate? They are not 100% accurate, and that's why you have digital water testers. These digital testers are the fastest and most accurate at detecting the chemical readings of your pool water. They usually come with an LCD display, a waterproof housing, and a memory chip to record and view previous test results.
Unlike other water tests, you don't need to color-match the water sample. Instead, you can get the digital readings straight from the device. You can use digital testers having electrodes to detect the pool chemical levels because these testers can offer the most accurate readings.
There are also hybrid digital water testers that use a reagent or test strips to determine measurements. These digital testers are better at reducing any margin of error related to determining results with your naked eye. Plus, they are excellent for pool owners having color blindness.
Warning
Keep in mind that any digital pool tester will be more expensive than regular test strips and liquid test kits. So, if you want to purchase a digital tester, always consider your budget.
How Frequently Should You Test Pool Water?
Even though there's no thumb rule, it's best to test the pool water once a week. You can increase or decrease the chemical levels of your pool water after testing it. However, if you use the swimming pool frequently or the water shows some clarity issues, you might require frequent pool water testing - around twice or thrice a week.
Moreover, some pool owners prefer to test the chemical levels of their pool water on a daily schedule. You can stick to the following schedule to test your pool water:
Chlorine test: Twice or thrice a week
pH test: Twice or thrice a week
Acid demand test: Whenever the water pH requires adjustment
Total alkalinity: Weekly, but also test it when the pH level changes
Total hardness: Once a month
Cyanuric acid: Once a month
TDS levels: Once a month
The levels of other components, such as phosphates and metals, usually change much more slowly, so you can test for them once a month under normal circumstances. Most standard test kits are enough for fulfilling your weekly pool testing requirements. However, you might need to buy a larger or more robust pool water test kit for accurately conducting the monthly tests.
How To Test Pool Water Using A Kit?
The type of pool test kit you choose will depend on your budget and the kit's accuracy. Although test strips are the most affordable, they are not ideal for getting accurate readings. On the other hand, digital readers show the most accurate readings but can be pretty expensive.
Liquid testing kits offer the ideal balance between price and accuracy since they are much more accurate than test strips but a lot cheaper than digital testers. So, we've discussed the steps to use a standard 4-in-1 liquid kit to test the residual and free chlorine, pH level, acid demand, and total alkalinity of your pool water.
1. Collect Water Sample
Dip the tester in your pool and draw the water sample from at least a depth of 18 inches to get accurate readings. Since the chemical levels can vary based on the water depth, ensure to maintain the 18-inch depth measurement while collecting the sample.
Fill the vials until the water reaches the line marked as "fill" because you need to maintain precise pool water to test the solution ratio to get accurate readings.
2. Test For Residual And Free Chlorine
To test the water sample's residual and free chlorine levels, add some drops of the chlorine testing solution to the vial. Follow the dosage chart to add the right amount of the solution.
Some test kits come with chlorine tablets instead of a liquid chlorine solution to determine the free chlorine level. In that case, add the number of tablets mentioned in the instruction guide to your water sample.
Next, close the vial caps and shake the vials gently to mix the solution or tablets with the water. After a few seconds, you can see the color of the water sample changing. Now, compare the color inside the vial with the provided color chart on the tester to get the free chlorine reading.
Then, wait a few more minutes before comparing the colors again to check the residual chlorine level. Some popular test kits come with different solutions or tablets for the free and residual chlorine tests, so make sure to follow the instruction guide closely.
3. Test pH Level
Clean and rinse the tester thoroughly and take a new water sample like before to perform the pH test. Then, add one drop of sodium thiosulfate solution to the water sample, a chlorine neutralizer, for the pH testing and swirl the vial gently.
Next, add five drops of the red phenol indicator and mix it with the water sample by swirling it to see the color change for an accurate pH reading. Now, compare this color with the color standards provided by the tester to detect the pH levels of the pool water.
Warning
Don't conduct this test if your pool water's residual chlorine level is more than 3.0 because the pH reading won't be accurate. Adjust the residual chlorine to the standard range before checking the pH.
4. Test For Acid Demand
Take a sample of the water you used for the pH testing to accurately test for the acid demand. Slowly add the acid demand titrant and carefully count every drop while swirling the sample between each drop.
Keep adding the titrant until the sample color matches the 7.4-indicator on the tester. Check the acid dosage chart to evaluate how much acid you must add to the pool water to adjust its pH balance.
Warning
Avoid this acid demand test if the water's pH is more than 7.5 and its residual chlorine level is more than 3.0. Bring the residual chlorine to normal levels before this test.
5. Test For Total Alkalinity
Rinse the tester and fill the vial upto its lower alkalinity line with a fresh sample of your pool water to test for total alkalinity. Now, add one drop of the chlorine-neutralizing solution and mix it well to get accurate readings. Then, add one to three drops of the total alkalinity indicator solution (blue in color) and swirl the vial or test tube until the sample turns blue.
Next, add the titrant solution drop by drop and carefully track the number of drops you're adding. Keep adding the titrant until the water in the vial changes to light green or light yellow. Lastly, multiply the total number of drops of the titrant you added by 10 for total alkalinity.
Warning
Don't test for total alkalinity if the water's residual chlorine level is more than 3.0. Adjust the chlorine to a proper range before performing the TA test.
What Are The Common Mistakes To Avoid While Using Pool Test Kits?
There are certain things to keep in mind to avoid common mistakes while purchasing and using a pool test kit. For instance, don't buy excess pool chemicals because they expire over time. The reagents in a liquid testing kit usually last around a year.
Furthermore, it's best to avoid using test strips because they don't produce accurate results, and the chances of error are high. Also, if you're using a liquid kit, you can buy replenishment bottles to replace individual testing solutions once they run out instead of buying a whole new kit.
How To Use Pool Test Kits Conclusion
After going through the guide, you must've gathered a better understanding of how the most popular test kits work in detecting the chemical content of your pool water. That said, we highly recommend using a liquid testing kit because they are easy to use, accurate, and fairly affordable.
However, as a pool owner, if you want professional testing, you can collect the water samples and take them to a local pool store. You can also purchase special testing supplies to test for metals, phosphates, total hardness, salt, and other chemical compounds in your pool water.
No matter which chemical tests you perform or what test kit you choose, always maintain consistency and regularity to maintain good water health in the swimming pool. Also, if you enjoyed reading this informative guide, don’t forget to check other articles like “how do wireless doorbell systems work” on our website.
Until next time!
An angle grinder must be used at the right angle and with the right pressure for the particular job. At the same time, you must maintain all the safety precautions to use the tool for cutting or grinding different materials with ease.
There’s no denying that an angle grinder can be a very useful tool for cutting through metals and other materials. However, using the tool properly is the key.
And without the proper knowledge, even the best power tools won’t work well and become a threat to you. So, today, we will tell you all about how to use an angle grinder and what are the important points that you must keep in mind for the best results.
How To Choose An Angle Grinder?
As you may already know, an angle grinder is a versatile tool that can help users tackle multiple tasks like sharpening your lawn mower blade, cutting metal, or removing excess mortar and cutting through rusted bolts. Besides, you can use it on flammable materials, sheet metal and more.
Depending on the type of task, the angle grinder can be equipped with either a cutting wheel or a grinding disc.
For example, if you're working on wooden projects or plan on using one as part of your regular work, look for one with a larger blade size so that the tasks can be completed quickly.
But if you want to use an angle grinder for metalworking projects such as cutting down rebar or welding together pieces of scrap metal (like when building fences), then opt for a model with a shorter blade. Aside from that, choose an angle grinder that has a good quality motor with smooth bearings and the best angle grinder attachments so that it runs quieter and smoother. This will make it easier to control when working with heavier materials like stone or concrete—and easier on your arms!
If you're looking for versatility (or if the tool is going to be used by multiple people), get one with variable speed control settings. And always start with the lowest speed setting to reduce the chances of injuries.
Steps To Use An Angle Or Hand Grinder Correctly
First and foremost, make sure the angle grinder is set up for your needs. For example, if you're using an electric angle grinder and need to get into tight spaces, choose a smaller disc with less power. Likewise, if you want to work on metal or concrete surfaces, we’d advise going with an aluminum oxide grindstone disc rather than diamond grit one.
Next and most importantly: wear personal protective equipment like work gloves, as some materials can cause injury even if they don't cut your hands open immediately. And you may also choose to wear ear mufflers, too.
Aside from that, don’t forget to use the blade guard attached properly, especially when cutting steel.
Step 1
Make sure the angle grinder is switched off unless you’re completely ready to use it. Otherwise, you may risk injuries and damages from the sudden spinning blade or grinding wheel.
Step 2
Make sure you have a firm grip on the tool at all times so that it doesn't slip out of control , especially when working with maximum speed on the electric motor. We’d strongly recommend clamping down the material on the work surface so that it doesn’t move when you start working on it.
Step 3
Make sure that you are using the right size disc for the job, which is suited for the job and rated for use with the particular model of the angle grinder. Using the wrong disc can result in overheating or electric shock, both of which can be dangerous and cause injury or death.
Step 4
Clean the sides of the disc and spindle nut with a wire brush so they're nice and shiny. This will help prevent overheating (which can damage your tool) as well as reduce friction (which could cause slippage during operation).
Step 4
Now, hold the angle grinder with both hands. This way, you will have a firm grip on the same and will be able to operate the machine in a safe way. Never take your hands off the machine as that might lead to serious injuries.
Allow the angle grinder to reach its full speed before you make it come in contact with any metal or wood. This will ensure the optimum production of your machine for rendering precision cuts.
As for the pressure application, we’d suggest starting with light pressure, unless you’re working with a thicker material. You can always apply more pressure later to achieve the desired result.
Step 6
Always keep the cutting disc moving so as not to leave any part of yourself exposed for too long.
Step 7
While the movement of the cut will depend on the cut you’re making, keep rotating the disc slowly in circular motions in order to maintain control over it while working.
Safety Precautions To Be Kept In Mind
Safety is important to everyone, but it's especially important when operating a power tool like an angle grinder.
Hence, always ensure that you wear the right-sized safety goggles before starting out. It's also a good practice to wear long sleeves and pants while using one. All these will help minimize your exposure to the flying debris while cutting or grinding the materials.
On that note, grab a dust mask if you don’t want to inhale the smaller particles.
Another thing to keep in mind is that using an angle grinder around construction sites will need you to be more careful. Loose clothing, like jackets or pants flapping around can become entangled with rotating parts or the lawn mower blades within your tool's housing causing injury if not careful enough attention paid!
The answer to this is yes, you can. However, you first need to determine whether your angle grinder is compatible with one by checking the diameter of your current rotary tool. If it measures between ¼ and ½-inch in size, then it should be able to support a wire brush attachment. If not, consider upgrading to a more powerful machine with larger dimensions.
For the unversed, a wire brush is a tool used for cleaning and polishing metal objects. It consists of a piece of wire with abrasive tips that removes rust, dirt, paint and other particles from surfaces.
Wire brushes are made from different kinds of metal wires such as steel or brass. They can be attached to an angle grinder using a wrench or Allen wrench depending on the type of attachment you need.
These brushes come in several different sizes, each with its own set of uses. So, you should know what type of brush is right for your needs before using it.
Firstly, you need to determine the size of the brush, as they come in different diameters. And you’d want to get one that fits your machine perfectly so that it doesn't slip or fall off when using it on different surfaces.
To determine what size of wire brush you need, just measure around the circumference of your current one and then add 2-3 cm (1 inch) for good measure.
If you don’t have an angle grinder and are considering purchasing one, we highly recommend it. This is because the standard drill bit that comes with most corded drills mayl wear out quickly when used for installing wire brushes.
That’s why you'd want a sturdy tool like an angle grinder that can withstand constant downward pressure (as the bit works its way on the surface).
How To Install The Wire Brush On Your Angle Grinder?
Before you start, you will need to determine how the brush attaches to the grinder. This can be in a variety of ways, but there are a few general rules to follow.
For one, if the brush is a large screw-on attachment or has threads on its backside, it will probably go overtop of the handle of your grinder. But if it has two holes for screws and no threading on its backside, then it will likely be held in place with two metal clamps that go around the handle of the grinder.
Once you’ve determined the installation spot, secure the brush onto your angle grinder using a wrench. For this, loosen the nut on the rear of the angle grinder, which is located behind the wheel guard and in front of the power cord. Then, slide the brush into place between this nut and its housing.
Make sure that there's enough room for you to tighten it later, but don't over tighten it. You’d still want to be able to get both hands on it easily when you're installing or removing it from the angle grinder.
Next, you need to set the angle grinder at the right speed for the job. This will depend on the type of material you're cutting and how hard it is.
Generally speaking, a slower speed will make it easier for the brush to cut through whatever you're working on. However, if you start with a higher RPM (revolutions per minute) for a material that’s too soft or thin, it may get damaged.
Moreover, the angle grinder may end up getting overheated to interrupt your work. Not only that, but it may also get damaged prematurely.
To determine what speed will work best for you, try taking an old piece of metal that has been painted over many times. Use the brush attachment on it at different speed settings until you find one that works well enough but doesn't damage the metal.
Is Your Angle Grinder Compatible With Different Accessories?
Another thing that you’d want to check is if your power tool has any existing mounting holes on its body that would allow for easy installation of an accessory such as a wire brush. If not, don't fret! You can still add one by drilling through the center of its side handle—but doing so will require some extra work on your part.
This will require buying some drill bits, based on the size of the slots or holes that you need to make. Make sure that the drill bits should be able to hold up against whatever type of material makes up the attachment's outer casing (aluminum or steel).
Can You Use An Angle Grinder On Wood?
Another very frequently asked question is can you use an angle grinder on wood? Well, if you're an experienced carpenter or keen DIYer, you'll probably already be aware that angle grinders aren't just for cutting through metals! These powerful tools can also be used to cut wood, so long as you take the necessary precautions.
However, the speed of the blade determines its power when working on wood. The faster the blade spins, the more powerful it is and the better it can cut through different densities and thickness of wood.
Apart from that, there are a few other factors to look into before starting work.
For example, you should first consider the type angle grinder that you need for the job. Electric angle grinders are generally more popular and powerful, but they cannot be used in wet conditions. On the other hand, compressed air-powered angle grinders are less powerful but can operate in wet conditions.
The second thing to know is that electric grinders tend to be quieter than their pneumatic counterparts. This can be a great advantage if you will be working on your lawn or an open space without troubling the neighbors too much.
Using Angle Grinders For Sanding Wood
Many DIY enthusiasts and even professionals prefer using angle grinders to sand wooden surfaces. This is a good way to smoothen out the surface as well as remove marks and stains before using the wooden blocks or slats for building furniture or fences, among other things.
The best disc for this purpose is a flap disc, which is made from overlapping sandpaper sheets surrounding its center. It has a large surface area to sand more wood at one go, helping you complete the job quickly and more efficiently. Besides, it’s among the most inexpensive angle grinder attachments.
Flap discs come in different variants depending on their thickness (or grit), so you can choose one according to the thickness of the wood.
Are There Any Limitations To Consider?
Of course, there are some limitations when cutting wood with an angle grinder. For example, an angle grinder will struggle with hardwoods as they are too tough and dense for the tool to cut through easily.
So, be careful when using an angle grinder on wood, and make sure you follow all the safety tips we've given above. If you're not sure how best to use your angle grinder with wood, then seek expert advice from someone who has used it before.
How To Use An Angle Grinder Conclusion
That’s everything we had for you today!
It’s true that angle grinders aren’t very difficult to operate, but that doesn’t mean you should let your guard down at any point. If you think you're losing control of the tool, switch off the power immediately and readjust the grip or angle.
Likewise, if the blade is vibrating too much, switch off the grinder, let the blade stop completely, and use the angle grinder tools to tighten it. This should put you back on track!
We will be back with more such reads. Till we meet again!
If you have never been in a sauna, you are missing out on one of the most relaxing experiences out there.
It is not only good for your body but also your mental health. The heat helps fight depression and will provide you with much needed benefits. Be it a solo session or one with a friend or family member; you will gain a lot out of it.
But if it is your first time, certain things need to be kept in mind to use the sauna right. Have you been embarrassed to ask your friends about it? If so, let us guide you through the nitty-gritty.
The safety measures have been carefully detailed down and are followed by the tips to remember. We have also made a note of the types of sauna baths so that you have complete knowledge about it.
Without further ado, let’s get going!
How to Use a Sauna Right
Safety Measures To Take
Regardless of whether the sauna is public or private, some measures should be taken to ensure that you remain safe. Go through the following points carefully, and you should not have anything to worry about.
Consult A Doctor
Many health issues could get aggravated because of high temperatures. So, consult a doctor before you enroll for a session. If you have high blood pressure, heart failure issues, diabetes, or unstable angina, doctors will advise you not to go for these sessions or limit it to 5 minutes.
Make sure that you cool down slowly, so the body can adjust its temperature, and there are no sudden changes. Doctors may also advise you against saunas if you are on medication. The change in temperature may not work well with it, and you may be asked to wait for some time until your dosage is over.
Further, if you are feeling under the weather, it is best not to expose your body to such high temperatures. Book your sessions once you are feeling well again.
Besides, if you are pregnant or planning to conceive, there might be complications that may arise, and consulting a professional is a must beforehand.
Avoid Being Intoxicated
First of all, you must stay hydrated as you will be exposed to a large amount of heat. Drink water before and after the session and stay away from any form of intoxication.
As a rule of thumb, do not drink alcohol or indulge in any form of drugs before and after the bath. Recreational drugs are also to be avoided as that might make you feel too hot or too cold. Avoid having any large meals too before the bath, as that may make you feel ill.
Build Up Your Tolerance
It is best to limit your time to 10 or 15 minutes at maximum. If you are new to it, try for 5-10 minutes per session and then slowly increase it to 15. It is best to build up tolerance slowly and see how much your body can take.
There is a chance that you may fall ill if you decide to spend 15 minutes or more for the first time. Different individuals have different tolerance capacities, and you got to understand yours. Always remember that you can leave the room if you feel ill at any point.
Affects Sperm Count
Saunas can have an effect on your sperm count as it leads to the rise in temperature of the scrotum. If you regularly take steam baths, the sperm count may be reduced temporarily, which could be problematic for those trying to conceive.
Avoid Sudden Change In Temperature
According to the Finnish sauna tradition, one has to dive into icy cold water after the steam bath in order to cool themselves. While this might work out for some, it is not a suggested method for anybody with a health condition. If you have a weak heart, diabetes, or you are pregnant, avoid this altogether.
In fact, ensure that the change in temperature is gradual, as we already mentioned. Otherwise, you may feel dizzy or unwell. If this happens, leave the sauna, sit outside, and breathe deeply. Ask for a glass of water, which will help in hydrating the body.
This should not be a concern for those who go for frequent sauna sessions, as their bodies will already be used to the heat. In fact, some people want a quick change in temperature and believe it is good for the skin. As a precaution, it is best to take tiny steps towards this and see if your body can adjust well too.
Things To Be Left Outside
It is vital to remember that you cannot carry any electronic devices inside the room. Leave your mobile phones, watches, and any smart device that you have outside. This is because the heat can mess up the hardware and can damage your gadgets.
Most places will already have ambient music for you to enjoy while you are inside. Even if there is none, this is the best time to enjoy the silence.
Also, make sure that every piece of jewelry is removed from your body. This is important because metal heats faster and may lead to skin burns.
Besides, if you have been thinking of applying cream or lotion beforehand, do not do so. It will only clog your pores up, and this destroys the whole purpose. The skin needs to breathe freely. Once you are done with the session, wipe your face with a towel to clean off the excess oil that is released.
Avoid Heavy Workout Prior Sessions
While a post workout sauna sounds very relaxing, it is important that you keep a gap between your sessions. After finishing heavy exercises, make sure that you indulge in lighter activities like walking or cycling post which you can enter the hot room. This will help your body get back to its normal pace and your pulse to stabilise.
Also, it is best to get done with the exercise before you go for a session. This is because your muscles will be very relaxed and it might be harmful to indulge them in heavy exercise just after.
Beside, your energy levels also reduce and you will not find the enthusiasm to go ahead with a strenuous workout.
Saunas can be dehydrating and will leave your body heated up. Exercising could lead to overheating and may make you feel light headed or dizzy. So, if you do have to exercise, drink a lot of water post your session and relax for a while before you begin. This will give your body enough time to rejuvenate and prepare for the upcoming activity.
Tips To Remember
Having a sauna at home is one of the best things to happen to you! There are almost no rules that you need to follow, as you will not be sharing the space with strangers.
But if you are going to use the same sauna with others, it is vital that you abide by certain norms. Read on to know more about it.
Always read the instructions carefully before entering the heated room. Every sauna will have some specific rules that will be written out outside, and it is best to have a look at them beforehand.
In case you are going to a gym sauna, make sure to take a shower after working out and before you enter the hot room.
Try to always reach on time. Public saunas will have specific timing, and if you are late, you will miss out on some precious minutes which could otherwise be spent relaxing inside.
Ask about the kind of clothing that is expected to be worn inside. The gym officials will be able to help you out with it. In some places, nudity is not looked down upon, and you can leave your clothes behind. But in others, you will have to opt for a bathing suit or a towel.
Do not throw wastes of any kind inside the room. This will include bandaids, pins, or hand gear too.
Avoid exercising in a public sauna. We know how beneficial hot yoga can be but it is not something to pursue in a public place. Either do it in your own houses or join a hot yoga class.
Always enter quickly. Saunas are rooms where the temperature is controlled, and hence it is made to remain airtight. Some amount of heat escapes whenever someone opens the door, and hence you need to enter quickly.
You might feel extremely comfortable inside but follow the decorum and try not to stretch inside if there are other people in it.
Whether you are nude or wearing clothes, remember to never sit on the bench directly. Because it is a shared space, always carry a towel on which you can sit and carry it when you exit.
It is best not to have loud discussions. Imagine coming to a public sauna to relax, and then finding two chatty women gossiping about their family lives right beside you!
Stay away from arguments and fights while inside.
Grooming inside the sauna is not a good idea. Stay away from shaving, tweezing, or combing your hair.
How Does A Sauna Function?
There are different methods of saunas that are popular today. The Turkish method involves using wet heat and will have steam bathing rooms. These are very popular and are designed to function like large hot baths.
The Finnish model, on the other hand, uses dry heat along with steam. There are buckets kept with ladles, and you can pour some of the hot water from a bucket in addition to the dry heat. There are other models, too, which uses only dry heat. We have listed down the different methods by which this heat is generated below:
Steam
This basically involves the Turkish style saunas, which use steam that has been created from hot water. The humidity levels are elevated due to this, and you will be able to enjoy wet heat. We found that steam baths are the most popular among the other options and are not only restricted to Turkey.
Electricity
When it comes to health centers, gyms, and clubs, heating via electricity is very popular. They use electric heaters to heat up rocks in the room, which then help in maintaining the high temperatures.
The major difference between steam and electricity is that the latter produces dry heat and maintains low humidity levels. You will not sweat as much while your body gets the heat needed.
Wood
There are some places that still prefer using older traditional methods to heat water. This involves burning wood to heat rocks or produce embers, which then maintains the temperatures. Water is generally ladled onto sauna rocks every few minutes to keep them warm and to add to the humidity constantly. You will mostly find these in boutique hotels and old clubs.
Infrared Lamps
These produce the lowest temperature among all the other methods. If you like the temperatures to be around 140 degrees Fahrenheit and not go any higher, this will be a great choice.
So, these saunas utilize lamps to create electromagnetic radiation. The radiation, in turn, heats up one’s body and not the room. There is a major difference between this and its peers, as you can book sessions that last between 45-60 minutes. Since the heat is lower, one can spend more time in it.
Dry Heat v/s Steam Rooms
Steam rooms are mostly airtight and small to preserve the heat. It is usually made of tiles or acrylic, which can withstand high temperatures and constant moisture in the air. You will also find generators that are the primary addition to the room and convert boiling water into steam.
These rooms are extremely humid and are kept at around 110 degrees Fahrenheit with 100% humidity. This will make you feel hotter, and you will probably perceive the temperature to be around 150 to 190 degrees Fahrenheit.
Rooms with dry heat work a little differently. If infrared lamps are used, you can settle in one position, and your body will be heated accordingly. There is no moisture involved in the process.
In other cases, sauna rocks are generally used which emanate heat leading to the rise in temperature of the whole room. Also, the temperature rises towards the top of a room, and hence most saunas will have seats at different heights. If you are a beginner, it is best to sit at a lower bench and then slowly move towards a higher seat.
Final Words
Saunas can provide a very relaxing experience and will help you release stress. When half the world is facing major health problems because of work-related pressure, this can be the perfect option to make sure that your health stays fine.
Also, it will be a great help for anybody who is into strenuous physical activity. The heat will soothe muscle pain and help your nerves relax. You must already know how relaxing a hot bath can be. Now, imagine if the benefits could be doubled with humidity rising to 100%!
But yes, please remember to consult a doctor in case you have any health problems. We cannot stress on this enough as it may lead to serious complications if your body is not prepared to deal with such temperature changes.
With this, we will take our leave, and we hope you have an enjoyable sauna session. Let us know if you have any further queries in the comment section below.
When mincing meat for your spaghetti bolognese, classic lasagna, and sloppy joes, the best home appliance is a manual meat grinder.
The question now is:how to use a manual meat grinder?
To help you find the answer to that question and have you use your manual meat grinder properly, here is a complete guide for beginners. Let's get grinding!
In using the meat grinder, these are the things you need to remember: preparation, grinding, and cleaning.
Here are the six quick steps to using a meat grinder!
1. Fix the Meat Grinder
First, you must assemble the meat grinder and fix its position on a stable surface intended for it or your countertop.
Ensure that every part is properly attached before using them. You can even crank or rock the meat grinder to ensure its stability.
2. Prepare the Meat
Afterward, ready the meat you will run through the manual grinder machine. To help you, here is how you can prepare your meat:
Trim the cartilage, excess tendon, and excess fat of your meat
Cut your meat into smaller pieces with a cutting knife
Put your pre-ground meat without excess fat in the freezer until it feels cold
Once you get the cold meat out of the freezer, you can proceed with the next step.
Tip
Putting it inside the refrigerator or fridge will help keep the flavorful-essential fat intact.
3. Get the Bowl Ready
The next step is to get a bowl and position it under the exit end of the manual meat grinder.
Bear in mind that the bowl you will use to catch your fresh ground meat should have the following characteristics:
Sterilized
Clean
Dry
Large
One of the expert tips we can share is that freezing your bowl can do the trick if you don't have a sterilizer. Just ensure you put in the clean bowl to freeze for at least 10 minutes.
4. Start Grinding and Crank the Meat Using the Handle
Lower the first piece of meat chunks into the manual meat grinder using a meat pusher to guide it through the hopper. Then, rotate the handle to push ground meat out through the exit.
As you continuously rotate the handle, simultaneously insert, in a gradual manner, the remaining meat pieces. Repeat this process until you have transformed your protein into delicious ground meat.
5. Remove the Last Few Bits of Meat from Your Grinder
Once you've run all your meat into the manual meat grinder, it's time to clear it out.
To do this, you will need moist bread pieces. These bread slices will be inserted into the manual meat grinder as you did to the meat.
With this process, you get to sweep the remaining meat from the meat grinders to save on cleaning time and make the process more hygienic.
6. Disassemble and Clean the Meat Grinder
An indispensable part of using the manual meat grinder is disassembling and cleaning its parts after every use.
When cleaning the manual grinders, make sure that you wipe the nooks and crannies, or else the following may happen to your manual meat grinders:
become rusty
develop molds
get infested by insects
attract rodents
develop stinky smell
Aside from wiping it clean, please ensure the grinders' parts are dry before you store them properly in your designated storage space.
How to Assemble a Manual Meat Grinder - A 4-Step Guide
Of course, before you can use manual meat grinders, there is a need to assemble the equipment. Here is a step-by-step guide to assembling manual meat grinders:
1. Clean the Meat Grinder Components
In assembling, you should always start by cleaning the manual grinder. Here is how you can clean it thoroughly and correctly:
Disassemble
Soak the metal and steel parts in warm soapy water
Hand-wash all the components
Clean the internal and external parts of manual grinders
Dry with a cloth
2. Fix the Handle
After cleaning the grind machine, you can proceed by fitting the handle into the main body of the meat grinder.
The key here is to fix it as tightly as possible because wobbly handles will make grinding difficult. It can even damage your grinder.
3. Fix the Grind Plate and the Cutting Blades
When the handle's in place, fix the grinding plate and the cutting blade. In doing this, ensure you use the appropriate plates and blades to easily cut the meat pieces perfectly for your burgers.
4. Mount the Meat Grinder
The last step in assembling meat grinders is to place them on the kitchen surface or anywhere that will stabilize them. Also, the surface where you will put the meat grinder must be firm for quality results.
How Does a Meat Grinder Work?
A meat grinder machine uses its plates and blades to slice cold meat into the desired texture and shape based on what type of plate and blade you incorporate.
For this, the smaller the holes are in the plate, the better the meat quality it produces.
You then use a hand-cranked mechanism to spin the blade that finely chops the meat. This crank is secured by a screw and a built-in clamp. It's connected to the auger to grind the meat.
Essential Parts of a Meat Grinder
To help you get acquainted with the grinding machine, some of the important factors to know are its parts. A grinder consists of the following:
Auger
Chopping blade
Grinding plate
Handle or hand crank
Hopper
Ring
Screw and clamp
Is a Manual Meat Grinder Worth It?
Yes, a manual meat grinder is worth it because of the following advantages:
Straightforward process when using a manual meat grinder
Easy grinding of meat chunks used for cooking in any food or recipe (e.g., sausage)
Space-saver
It can be used to mill vegetables, a fruit, and a bone
Common Problems When Using Hand Crank Grinders
You can also encounter some problems when you use a manual meat grinder. Some of these problems are listed below:
You need a helping hand to maneuver the hand crank while you insert the meat or vice versa
If you're not careful and don't use a pusher, you may lose your fingers
Manual vs. Electric Meat Grinders
If you're torn between using a manual grinding machine or an electric meat grinder, here are the things that you should know:
A manual grinder will save you money because it's cheaper
A manual grinder is not dependent on electricity, lowering electricity costs
A manual grinder is lightweight compared to an electric one
Tip
To know the best manual meat grinder and the best meat slicers, check out these articles!
Manual Meat Grinder FAQs
The following are the frequently asked inquiries about manual meat grinders:
Are Manual Meat Grinders Worth It?
Due to the required labor, manual meat grinders are best for people who won’t need to process much meat at once.
Yet, they are significantly less expensive than electric meat grinders, making them an excellent choice for people on a tight budget.
How Hard Is It to Use a Manual Meat Grinder?
Because most manual meat grinders only require turning a crank to grind meat, they are simple to use.
Yet, if you have to handle a lot of food at once, the design’s simplicity can also be one of the largest obstacles because it can lead to hand and arm fatigue.
How Do I Choose a Manual Meat Grinder for My Home?
The best meat mincers and grinders should have strong, heavy-duty motors, a large cutting group, and anodized aluminum and stainless steel construction to withstand corrosion.
A crucial component is a switch that reverses the flow to clear obstructions.
Is Bellemain Meat Grinder a Reliable Brand?
It is easy to assemble, take apart, and clean up. The best hand meat grinder brand out there is this one. Amazing quality is present.
Now that you know how to use a manual meat grinder, you'll be able to grind meat efficiently, even if you're not a butcher. Cooking and meat-based recipe work have now become even more accessible.
Remember that the key to using a meat grinder is summarized in these three processes: preparation, grinding, and cleaning.
Wondering how to work that clamp meter? We're here to help you with the ultimate guide, specially drafted keeping beginners in mind.
Let's just start by saying that operating a clamp meter is pretty simple once you figure out all the subtle mechanisms. Also, you're already halfway there if you know how to use a general-purpose multimeter.
But, then again, it's essential to know the minor differences between the two, which will help you decide better while testing and troubleshooting.
Furthermore, this nifty gadget benefits users in numerous ways and is the least complicated when it comes to handheld tools. So if you're a serious DIY-er or tech enthusiast, it's time you learned all about this super cool gadget.
Now without further ado, let's begin.
What Is A Clamp Meter?
Long story short, a clamp meter is an advanced variation of a digital multimeter, but the primary points of difference between them are the design and capabilities.
The former has a jaw-like structure on the business end that enables contactless measurement of current and voltage. So basically, you can 'clamp' this top part around conductors (like a wire) to detect the current flowing through it.
That being the primary working principle, new age clamp meters perform multiple functions for measuring several quantities and come with features that simplify troubleshooting and analysis. But most importantly, they are equipped with safety measures for convenient use.
Since you neither have to plug testing probes to live circuits manually nor disconnect the system to record a measurement, clamp meters truly ensure safe applications overall. And that's why it's no surprise that they have become one of the indispensable tools in a technician's kit.
Chief Differences Between A Clamp Meter And A DMM
Before you begin using a clamp meter, it's critical to understand how it's different from a digital multimeter (DMM). Following are the key notable dissimilarities...
Firstly, a digital multimeter mainly measures voltage, but it has some current measuring capabilities. On the other hand, a clamp meter does just the opposite, meaning it's ideal for measuring current, but falls short when it comes to voltage.
Secondly, DMMs are high-resolution devices, calculating in units like millivolts and milliamps, whereas clamp meters only measure to the nearest tenth or hundredth. The latter usually works fine for electrical work, but don't expect minute measurements.
Lastly, DMMs are far more accurate and provide users with direct readings, but they're comparatively much slower and not that safe.
Therefore, it's wise to have both the tools at your disposal, though for certain situations, clamp meters are crucial.
Basic Components And Structure Of A Clamp Meter
Before we get into the nitty-gritty of using a clamp meter, it's essential to learn about the basic components of the unit. Following is a list of major components commonly found on most clamp meters.
The clamp – the jaw-like appendage on the top, which is wound around conductors to detect and measure current (and other parameters)
Tactile barrier – A prominently visible zone that protects your fingers and hands from electric shocks
Hold – A switch on the side that freezes display reading until pressed again
Dial – Turned for changing quantity and resolution
Display screen – Usually LCD
Backlight button (optional)
Min-max button – Measure the highest, lowest, and average magnitudes of specific quantities (generally available in most models)
Inrush current button – Negates inrush current from any measurement (optional)
Shift button – Enables users to select multiple functions on the dial
Lever – Used for releasing the jaw
Alignment marks – The conductor ideally should be positioned between these two marks
Input jacks – Most models usually feature three jacks
These are the components that you will usually find in most digital clamp meters. However, based on the model that you buy, the elements and functions may vary.
How To Use A Clamp Meter?
Since analog models are mostly out of use, we suggest investing in a digital model with multiple features and improved user safety.
Also, in the following guide, the steps elucidated are for measuring DC amps or AC amps only. For all other quantities, the procedure is similar, but you'll have to select the respective function on the dial.
Steps to Follow While Using a Clamp Meter to Measure Current
Step 1: Turn ON the meter and remove the probes (if connected)
Step 2: Select the AC or DC function using the dial. At this point, the display should show a jaw sign, which confirms that the measurement is being recorded through the clamp (read the manual to see how your unit indicates this)
Step 3: Open the jaws using the side lever and insert the conductor through which the current is to be measured. Usually, technicians do this one-handed while they note the measurements with the other one.
Step 4: Close the jaws and level the conductor between the alignment signs inscribed on the top structure. However, If these signs are missing on your model, try to adjust the conductor to the center of the clamp.
Step 5: The display will now generate the appropriate reading. Users may modify the resolution as per requirements, but most meters do so automatically.
We recommend taking measurements from conductors that are adequately insulated. Do not measure around live wires as that could result in a fire hazard.
A Side Note For Clamp Meters With Flexible Current Probe
Some models also come included with a flexible current probe, which is used to measure current and voltage of conductors in tighter places that are inaccessible to the rigid clamp.
So first, connect the other end of the probe to the unit and then proceed.
The process after that is similar, with the only change being that you have to ensure the probe is correctly wound and then attached back to the meter.
Select the appropriate function (meters with this accessory usually have a separate feature on the dial). The display will then instantly show the corresponding data.
Few Useful Tips While Measuring with a Clamp Meter
We want to ensure that you have a smooth experience using the tool from the get-go. That's why here a few tips for the first-time users that will come in handy while working on your initial projects.
While measuring current, do not clamp around two conductors simultaneously as the current flowing through them will cancel each other (if they are passing in opposite directions). So make sure always to use the tool on a single conductor
Always put on industry-standard safety gloves while operating a clamp meter
Disconnect the test leads/probes before using the clamp meter to measure current deploying the jaws
Make sure to keep your fingers behind the tactile barrier at all times
In most models, the reader will indicate if the current measured is below 0.5 A
We recommended using the "zero" function while measuring direct current, which removes DC offset from the measurement, providing accurate results
When results seem inaccurate, always check the selected function first before checking anything else
Maintaining The Clamp Meter
Let's be real — clamp meters will pinch your pocket. Naturally, you'd want to ensure that yours lasts as long as possible.
How do you do that? First off, start by storing the unit in a secure place. It can be inside a drawer, toolkit, or car compartment. Also, you should keep the meter in a clean, dry area to avoid the risk of rust. Besides, ensuring the meter itself is clean is equally essential as dirt and grease will affect the accuracy of readings.
Furthermore, it's best not to put anything on top of the meter that would push the jaws out of alignment. In case they're not appropriately aligned, the magnetic circuit won't close. Although most digital clamp meters have self-aligning properties, it's better to be safe than sorry.
Do not, at any point, start using your meter to pry things apart. That self-aligning mechanism will only fix so much.
Conclusion
Clamp meters have become popular tools among professionals and DIY enthusiasts, primarily for two reasons - safety and convenience. That being said, clamp meters enable electricians to bypass the traditional method of cutting into a wire, and inserting test leads into the circuit to record in-line measurements.
Those jaws of the meter not only provide contactless functions but also allow users to work without compromising on safety. And the best part - it is not mandatory to shut off the circuit carrying current, which was otherwise necessary while applying old techniques.
On that note, we've come to the end of this comprehensive guide, and we hope you have all the information you need to get cracking with your new gadget.
So, take out your new tool and measure away. But if you get stuck with something, just refer to this guide for a quick fix.
Till next time!
Rollers and brushes can take a backseat now that the Wagner Spray Gun is here!
No disrespect to these age-old tools, but the new generation of high-volume low-pressure paint sprayers are re-defining how DIY-ers paint their homes. From highly detailed cabinets to large rugged surfaces like popcorn ceilings, the Wagner Spray Gun gets paint into all the nooks and crannies.
And, all this in a fraction of the time it would take to roll paint over home exteriors or brush between the crevices of furniture. Needless to say, the finishing on projects will have neighbors asking for your painter’s number.
But, of course, the new hand-held spray guns from Wagner are easy-to-use for professionals and amateur painters alike. In case you are using the Wagner spray paint at home, remember to thin the latex paint during prep.
Follow this guide to know how you can do it yourself!
How To Thin Latex Paint For A Wagner Spray Gun
There are a slew of options to choose from when it comes to paints for your Wagner Spray Gun, but one thing is for sure – they all have to be thinned before use.
Failing to do so will leave you with a clogged nozzle that takes some hard scrubbing and about 15 minutes to clean. Frustration aside, this is enough time for dried paint marks to form – thus, undoing the even finish and time-efficiency promised by the spray gun.
At the same time, thinning the paint too much will leave you with wastage and an ugly mess. With that being said, it is important to follow this guide meticulously. So, without further ado, let's get started by preparing the paint!
Step-By-Step Guide
Step 1| Prep The Paint
For the first step, you will need your choice of latex paint, of course!
Prepping the latex paint means ensuring that there are no lumps and bits stuck to the bottom or sides. These hateful little clumps are a direct ticket to a clogged nozzle, so don’t look past them.
Begin by holding the can of paint by its handle and swinging it back and forth for about a minute. Usually, store-bought paints come premixed and don’t need any more mixing, so unless your paints have been lying around for some time, you can afford to skip this step.
However, premixed or not, you should use a wooden stir stick or a mechanical stir stick to mix the paint once the lid is off. While stirring, make sure that the paint at the bottom has been mixed well and is not clumpy.
Step 2| Pour
The next step is to pour about a quarter of the prepared latex paint into a clean paint bucket.
At this point, use a stir stick to lift some of the paint and let it drip into the bucket. The visibly heavy drops mean it is still too thick to go into the spray gun. With that being said, you are looking for a paint that has a runny consistency, and which drips down in one long line resembling a string.
Step 3| Add Water And Conditioner
To reach the target consistency, start by adding a little bit of water at a time. Additionally, you can add a conditioner like Floetrol for a smoother finish.
As a rule of thumb, ½ a cup of water for every gallon of paint is the recommended number. However, it’s best to start with an ounce – adding more if the need arises.
While experienced painters can usually tell just by looking if the paint is done, beginners may have to experiment a bit. But, don’t be too nervous about getting it too thin. After all, you can always add some more paint to the mixture to thicken and fine-tune it gradually.
Step 4| Mix
Using a wooden stir stick, keep stirring and lift it occasionally to check the consistency.
Keep in mind that a powerful stir stick attached to a drill may be a swift method to mix thick paint, but it might also create air bubbles if used on this diluted mixture. And as you may already know, air bubbles will disturb the evenness of your paint job in the long run.
Now, once you are done concocting the mixture and it forms a long runny line, move on to the next step for the ultimate consistency test.
Step 5| Testing Consistency
To know if you have reached that sweet spot between too thick and too thin, you can go about it two different ways. One is by running the paint through a mesh funnel, while the other utilizes a viscosity cup.
The funnel test is the go-to method for more seasoned painters, although the latter provides a more accurate picture. Moreover, some paints are sold with a viscosity cup as part of the package itself. However, it is worth noting that mesh funnels also serve the purpose of filtering out any contaminants and paint flakes that may clog up the spray nozzle.
Nevertheless, if you have a funnel with a thin spout, then pour down some of the paint through it into the bucket. In case it doesn’t run through smoothly, add some more water and mix again before testing.
On the other hand, if you are planning to use a viscosity cup, then make sure to have a stopwatch ready before beginning. Once ready, dip the cup inside the mixture and lift it instantly. At the same time, start the clock and stop it as soon as the viscosity cup completely runs out of paint.
Ideally, the time it takes for the cup to become empty should be about 35 seconds. However, anything between 25 and 40 seconds will do the job.
Optional Step
Once you are successful with the consistency test, don’t forget to jot down the ratio of water to paint that has been used. In fact, do this the first few times and experiment a bit with the ratios. And before you know it, you will be eyeballing quantities and mixing like a pro.
And, that’s it – you now know how to thin latex paint for a Wagner Spray Gun! To maximize every spray painting experience, read ahead to learn about some neat tips that you won’t find anywhere else.
Tips And Tricks
Using Old Paint
You don’t need to go out of your way to buy a fresh can of paint if you already have some lying around the house. However, old paint tends to coagulate and form big globs that need to be broken down.
To do this, grab the can holder and sway it back and forth for a few seconds. After this, hold it in front of your chest with the back end facing you. What you want to do is shake the sediments that have been collected at the bottom. Now, do this by simply shaking vigorously in a front-to-back motion for about a minute.
Additionally, you can pour the paint through a funnel to get rid of dirt, debris, and big chunks of paint that may have dried up.
Mixing With A Wooden Stir Stick
Apart from preventing air bubbles that would come from a mechanical stir stick, mixing water and paint manually provides a feel of the paint thickness against the stir stick. In other words, you can tell if the paint is thin enough and mixed well just by stirring it around.
In fact, just a few sessions of thinning latex paint, and you won’t even have to do any tests anymore!
Consider Weather Conditions
Temperature and humidity – both can affect how much, or how little, thinning agent has to be added for the perfect consistency. Heat and humidity, especially, are every painter’s worst enemy as they dry up latex paints in no time. On the other hand, lower temperatures decrease the adhesive properties in paint.
The best way to combat these inconsistencies is by following the instructions on the spray gun and setting the airflow accordingly. Moreover, if you are painting during summer, it is highly advisable to thin and work with small quantities of paint before beginning another batch.
Using A Conditioner
As mentioned earlier, the Wagner Spray Gun is suitable for all types of paints, although the paints will need to be thinned accordingly. Latex paint is water-based so it mixes well with water.
However, oil-based paints would require you to buy commercial paint thinners from the market. At the same time, you cannot use these paint thinners on water-based products.
In case you do want an oil-based finish on your latex paint jobs, Floetrol is one fan-favorite you can trust. To cut things short, Floetrol is a paint conditioner that leaves a shiny and professional finish on spray paint projects, while also making paint more workable under extreme weather conditions.
Test Patches
Apart from the two consistency test options mentioned in the step-by-step guide, there is yet another test that your paint mixture must pass to be certified ready-to-use.
Yes, we are talking about a patch test. Go ahead, get a piece of plywood or any surface that can stand upright. Then, test-spray on this patch and wait for it to dry.
Overly thinned latex paint will be runny, messy, and unable to cover the area where it has been sprayed. Other signs are drip marks and a long drying time.
On the other hand, paint that resembles the texture of an orange peel after drying needs to be thinned more. In the end, the right consistency will have you spraying mist-like paint that creates even layers that don’t run.
Frequently Asked Questions
Can paint thinners be used as a thinning agent for latex paint?
Latex paint is water-based, whereas commercial paint-thinners are mostly reserved for oil-based paints. In other words, paint thinners and mineral spirits are petroleum-based products that will completely strip the adhering properties of latex paint.
With that being said, unless you want to completely ruin your latex paint, don’t think about using paint thinners. Water-based paints like latex paint have been formulated to be best suited with water – hence, water is your safest and most readily available option.
Why is my latex paint not covering my wall even after thinning?
Although there are other signs to look for like runny lines of paint, the most common reason for less coverage is over-thinning. Apart from this, you should check if the product is from a trusted brand and not damaged.
In case it turns out that the paint mixture is too thin, simply begin by adding little amounts of paint to it and mix the contents together with a stir stick. After this, follow the viscosity tests given in the guide and adjust some more if the need arises.
Do I need to hire a professional to paint with latex paint and an HPLV spray gun?
Hiring a professional is always a good idea, but it is far from necessary! The new generation of HPLV spray guns, such as those by Wagner, are small, hand-held, and easy to use devices. However, research well before you begin spray painting if you don’t want to have a frustrating experience.
Perhaps, the most important rule to follow is thinning the paint before spraying. Other than that, forgetting to check whether the spray gun itself is compatible with latex paint is a common rookie mistake.
Moreover, humidity, air pressure, temperature, and the type of spray gun you want to use – all of this will alter the required water to paint ratio for thinning latex paint. Needless to say, it might take some time to become an expert at spray painting with latex paint, but it can be done!
Do all paints need to be thinned before painting with a Wagner Spray Gun?
Generally, all kinds of paints need to be thinned when used with a Wagner Spray Gun because the nozzle has been engineered to diffuse thin, mist-like layers of paint. Naturally, a thick consistency clogs the opening and dries up.
Water-based paints like latex and acrylic are thick so they undoubtedly need to be thinned and filtered out. At the same time, oil-based paints such as enamels, despite being a thinner variant, still need to be thinned to prevent the spray gun nozzle from choking.
Final Words
While most people preach “think before you say,” a seasoned spray painter swears by “thin before you spray.” And, rightly so!
Using a Wagner Spray Gun is one of the fastest ways to get a gorgeous and even coating of latex paint in any part of the house. But, you can’t get there unless you know how to efficiently thin each batch of paint.
And now that you have our 5-step guide and handy tips to lead the way, the only thing left to do is practice and trust the process. Just remember to write down the ratios of water to paint each time you finish a batch.
Also, now that you know how weather can tip the balance even in tried-and-tested concoctions, making notes about it next to the findings is a great exercise. With all this in mind, soon enough you will discover the secret formula for thinning latex paint, come rain or shine.
In the absence of a testing kit, the amount of chlorine present in pool water can be tested using distilled water and red cabbage. Testing strips, liquid test kits, and digital testers are other reliable methods for testing chlorine levels in pool water.
Having the best pool test kits at your disposal allows pool owners to test chlorine levels of swimming pool water.
Besides, these kits are useful for testing total alkalinity, pool salt, calcium, bacteria, and other contaminants. But how would you test pool water when these kits aren’t available? – That’s what this guide is all about.
We’ll walk you through some DIY ways to test your pool water without a kit. Let’s dive in, then!
Why Should You Test Your Pool Water?
Testing the pool water regularly will help you maintain its water chemistry, but that isn’t the only reason you should conduct a pool test. By testing your pool water on a regular basis, you can prevent the growth of algae and bacteria in the water. And since our skin is highly sensitive, swimming in pools with low pH or high chlorine levels and bacteria can cause irritation.
Additionally, if the water contains a high amount of chlorine or is acidic, it can damage the pool walls and corrode its metal parts, like ladders and rails. The high acidity of water is especially problematic if you have a heated pool because it erodes the copper element of the heater very quickly.
How Frequently Should You Test Your Pool Water?
Several factors determine how frequently you should test your pool water, but ideally, the initiative should be undertaken at least once a week. But in seasons when the swimming pool is used more frequently, such as in summer, it’s advisable to test the pool water twice a week.
You must also consider testing your pool water after rain and heavy storms since such phenomena can alter its chemical balance. As a pool owner, you must test the water whenever you notice muddiness or a color change.
The frequency of pool water testing also depends upon the types of tests you conduct. For instance, pH and chlorine tests must be conducted twice or thrice a week, whereas testing alkalinity once a week is enough. Furthermore, cyanuric acid must be tested no more than once a month, and acidity testing should be done whenever you need to adjust pH levels.
Testing Your Pool Water Without A Kit
Want to test the chlorine levels of your pool water but unsure how to do without a kit? Well, don’t worry, for we have mentioned some of the most effective ways that you can adopt to test pool water in the absence of a testing kit.
1. Distilled Water And Cabbage Method
To test chlorine levels in pool water with this DIY method, you’ll have to have red cabbage and distilled water, which can easily be purchased from the market. You will also need a strainer, pot, clear container, and knife, all of which are household items.
The first thing to do is to cut the cabbage leaves into small pieces and pour the distilled water into a pot to boil. Once it starts boiling, immerse the cabbage in the water and let it boil for at least 30 minutes. Keep stirring the solution with a spoon or ladle every now and then; after 30 minutes, the crystal-clear water will turn purple.
Then, strain the purple water to remove the cabbage leaves from the solution and get some water from your pool in a container to conduct the test. Next, add just a few drops of purple water to the pool water container.
After a few minutes, you’ll notice the water changing its color depending on the pH level of the water, helping you determine the amount of liquid chlorine present in it. Higher amounts of chlorine can reduce pH levels and make the water acidic.
If the water becomes slightly red, it is acidic, but if it turns light green, it is alkaline. In case the water remains purple, it is neutral. If you have any doubts, use a pH test chart to understand what the color changes indicate.
DIY Tip
To make things easier, you can make your own DIY pH indicator using filter paper as a testing strip. The process will involve soaking the paper in the cabbage water and letting it dry. Once it dries, put a small amount of water onto the strip, which will change its color depending on the pH levels of your pool water.
2. pH Testing Strips
Strip testing is among the easiest and most cost-effective methods of testing your pool water and provides quick and accurate results. Basic test strips test pH, chlorine, and alkaline levels, but others can test copper, iron, salt, and more. Some testing strips can test as many as seven chemicals.
To test the chlorine level, take a sample of the pool water and simply dip the testing strip into it. The test strip will change color depending on the pH level, and the color can be compared to the indicators on the pH chart. These indicators are also mentioned on the back of the bottle of the testing strip.
For those wondering, are pool testing strips accurate, let us tell you that they are highly reliable and can eliminate human errors effectively. Hence, you can use them to test chlorine in the absence of a pool testing kit.
3. Liquid Test Kits
Another method of testing pool water is to use a liquid test kit, which offers even more accurate results than testing strips. To use such kits, you need to add certain reagents to the sample of pool water, which may include phenol red and orthotolidine (OTO).
For testing the pool water using a liquid test kit, collect samples of the water in vials included in the kit, ensuring you fill them up to the fill line. Once the vials are filled, add a few drops of the required reagent to the water sample.
Make sure to check the instructions that come with the kit to know how many drops need to be added for testing different chemicals. After the reagents have been added, shake the vials to mix them with water, and then compare the color of the resulting mixture with the provided color chart. You may repeat the process if need be and use different reagents for testing various chemicals.
And if you’re wondering, “do pool test kits expire,” let us tell you that most come with a shelf life of more than two years.
4. Digital Testers
Pool owners can use a digital water tester to test pool water and check the free chlorine or pH levels present. While such testers tend to be more expensive than other types, they offer certain advantages over other testing techniques.
Digital testers offer an accurate reading of the chlorine levels, so you won’t have to depend on the pH scale to determine the pH levels. One advantage of digital testers is that you won’t have to refill them, which adds to their user-friendliness. Though expensive, they are reusable, making them a cost-effective option compared to liquid test kits and testing strips.
There are different types of digital testers– some need to be dipped into the water sample, while others come with testing strips. In the latter case, a testing strip is dipped into the pool water and later inserted into the tester to get a reading of the chlorine present in your pool.
How To Test Chlorine In Pool Without Kit Final Thoughts
Whether you have stone, PVC, or concrete pools, regularly testing pool water is crucial to make sure it is safe for swimming. In the absence of a pool test kit, you can try using these methods for testing chlorine and pH levels.
These simple DIY methods will help you maintain proper pool chemistry, prevent bacteria and other microorganisms from thriving, and keep it safe from corrosion. And if testing pool water every week or so seems like a challenge, it’s best to hire professional pool maintenance service providers for the same.
With that, it’s time to call curtains for the day. No matter which testing method you opt for, you can rest assured that the results will be accurate.
See you later!
The yellow color is the most cheerful color in the world, and we can spot it all around us in nature yet few modern homeowners decide to add it in their homes in some daring and bold ways nowadays.
Are you thinking about adding this lively color in your home?
What do you say about a yellow sofa?
The yellow sofa would naturally become the focal point in the room and thus it's going to set the tone for the rest of the home. We invite you to scroll down through the photos below and see How To Style Around A Yellow Sofa. Watch out, these interiors are contagious, and you won't stop thinking about a yellow sofa after you see curated gallery, believe me!
neutral tones
If the rest of your home is decorated in neutral tones then the yellow sofa is the perfect pick for you since it will spice up the decor and will break the monotony in the room.
When you add a yellow sofa in your living room there are no boundaries when it comes to choosing the rest of the colors to incorporate in your living space. Choose colorful artistic pieces, pillows, carpets and other small details which will make your home playful, cheerful.
The exposed bricks and the sofa in the happiest color are a perfect match, they create a vivid and warm atmosphere in the living room that all family members will greatly enjoy!
When you combine this sofa with blue or emerald green walls, you are bound to get some fascinating living areas which are super modern and contemporary. These contrasting colors catch the attention immediately and create an impression that will last !
What do you think about the simple ideas below on how to style around a yellow sofa? How would you do it? We would love to hear your thoughts in the comment section below!
Hey there coffee lovers! I believe that many of you have tons of coffee cups of different sizes, shapes and colors in your homes, so if you are running out of place for storage, stay tuned. Here I'm going to show you How To Store Coffee Mugs In Excellent Ways, so you have them right within the reach of your hand.
We are all rushing to enjoy a coffee early in the morning and we want all the mugs to be easily accessible. These designs are really affordable, you don't have to spend a fortune to make them. If you are up for a DIY project, find your inspiration in the photos below!
The first idea showcased below invites you to create your mug storage by using wood pallets and old spoons to make hooks for your coffee mugs.
If you want to show off the beauty of your coffee mugs, choose a design that makes them easily visible. The one below should definitely be shortlisted.
You don't have to do much to get yourselves a wonderful mug storage. All you need is a huge piece of wood and lots of hooks. The project won't take you more than 20 minutes.
The composition looks extraordinary, simply beautiful.
There are people who want to keep their mug behind closed doors, so if you are this type of person maybe the best way to store your mugs is to keep them in a drawer.
Here comes one of my favorite ways for coffee cup storage. A peg board! You can have fun with it and color it so it can match the rest of your decor, it allows you to store hundreds of mugs.
The heart-shape coffee mug storage is just perfect for those who want to show their love for coffee to everyone who visits their home. Use wood and some hooks to make this stunning design.
Source
All of these designs are awesome, and you may even find it hard to pick just one design of them all. If you are having a hard time deciding, then we suggest you to have another look and see which idea will fit best into your living space!
Woodworkers do not believe in wasting any part of the wood, especially if the piece is beautiful. However, sometimes, the wood can become too soft to use.
Wood stabilizing will help in using up all the parts of wooden planks, ensuring almost zero wastage. Since wood is a precious resource today, this is something that artisans and woodworkers prefer to do.
Now there is a lot of information about this process on the internet, and you might initially find it too confusing. So, we decided to create a guide for you about how to stabilize wood.
All the information regarding the types of wood and the different stabilizing methods used have been listed down for your benefit. We will begin by explaining the process in general so that you have a clear understanding of what you are dealing with.
So, grab a cup of your favorite beverage and read on!
How To Stabilize Wood
What Do You Mean By Wood Stabilizing?
Wood is not always very hard, and softwood can easily be damaged. Hence, wood stabilizing becomes necessary to ensure that they last long and remain protected from moisture. To create a stable and hardened piece of wood, you will need to inject softwood with resin.
Once you have injected it, the resin will fill up all the air pockets and gaps in between the grains in the wooden block, hardening the wood from within. You can then add a layer of resin to the top to provide a glossy layer that will prevent moisture from entering.
The Process Of Stabilisation
Before you begin the process of stabilization, remember to consider the desired hardness that you aim to achieve. For example, if you want to make a wooden toy from hardwood, then the toy could turn out to be very heavy, making it difficult to play with.
How To Prepare For The Stabilisation Process?
Some steps need to be taken before you start with the stabilization process. First of all, keep all the required materials in one place. If needed, make a note of the items needed beforehand and check the list again before beginning work. This is important as otherwise, you will have to stop work in between to find the missing material, and that could hamper the workflow.
Next, you will have to do a thorough checkup of the equipment that you plan to use. This means checking and cleaning every part so that all the dirt is removed. Dirt can cause problems in the curing process, and hence, clean up becomes an important step. Also make sure the equipment is working fine and will be able to cure the resin well.
Other than that, you will need all your safety gear in one place, which involves gloves, glasses, and an apron. Resin can spill, and it will be very difficult to get the marks out of surfaces. Hence, we will recommend that you cover the surrounding area well before starting off.
Clean your hands well and rinse off any container that you have used with the resin as soon as the job is over. It is best not to let the resin or any other stabilizing medium stick anywhere as that could then be very difficult to remove.
In case you are going to use a vacuum chamber, check the machine well for any kind of damage before beginning the curing process. The machine has to be in perfect condition in order to stabilize the wood well.
Moreover, we’d suggest keeping the tools in a place where you can access them easily. This would ensure that you have a smooth and error-free process.
How To Stabilize Wood?
With Epoxy Resin
If you are working with softwood, then using epoxy resin is a great idea to stabilize the wood. When mixed with hardener, epoxy resin will form a hard layer to cover the surface of the wood and keep it safe.
For best results, process the wood at 20 degrees Celsius. However, you should know that this type of resin will not seep into the wood, and hence, the entire piece will not be hardened.
Now before you begin working, the wood needs to be prepared, and you will have to clean it well. Ensure that there are no small pieces of wood sticking out from the sides. Then sand the top if possible to have a clean surface.
If dirt gets stuck inside the resin layer, it will look unattractive, and naturally, you would not want that. Hence, the wood has to be thoroughly cleaned before stabilizing it.
Furthermore, we will recommend wearing gloves during the entire process so that you do not get any of the fluids on your hands. Once you are wearing proper gloves, get some thinner and mix it with the epoxy resin.
Now you already know that the resin does not penetrate wood well by itself as it is thick. The thinner is needed so that it can penetrate the surface to some level and ensure that the wood hardens a little more.
With Thermal Hardening Resin
The thermosetting resin is another great alternative that can be used to harden softwood. It will penetrate the topmost surface of the wood, and the heat will soak in, hardening the entire block at once. But you will have to be careful about not letting any moisture interrupt this process.
Moreover, the wooden piece has to be completely dry before this process can begin. Since this method requires some heat to be added, you might have to put it in the oven. In this regard, we will recommend heating the oven up to 104 degrees Celsius and then drying the piece for the next 24 hours inside the oven.
This will remove all the moisture and will ensure a smooth hardening process. Remember that one of the reasons behind adding resin is to keep moisture away. Hence, you should ensure that the piece contains none of it before resin is added.
Cactus juice is another type of thermal hardening resin, which can be used after mixing with other necessary chemicals. Remember that it needs to be stored in a dry place, as otherwise, the chemical properties of the fluid might change.
Also, we will add a small tip here: when the stabilization process is done, clean all the tools and equipment with soapy water immediately. If you let the remains dry up, then they might be difficult to remove later.
With Vacuum Chamber
Another way of stabilizing wood is by using a vacuum chamber for the purpose. Now, if you do not have a vacuum chamber, then purchasing a new one is a good idea. Please select one, which will remove moisture from the wood as well as cleans the epoxy fluid. It should be able to eliminate all the organic material and essential oils from the fluid so that it is perfect for use.
Next, you will need to decide upon the capacity of the vacuum chamber before purchasing one. This is again a personal preference and will depend upon the kind of projects that you need it for.
Moving on, this method is generally used for rotten or old wood, which has been damaged by moisture to some extent.
With Wood Hardener
In case the softwood is damaged, then many people stick to using wood hardeners for the purpose. This is a transparent fluid that is largely used by wood artisans for their products.
And the major reason behind its popularity is that it does not change the color of wood at all. Instead, it will just add a transparent layer on top, which will make the wood hard and will protect it from moisture.
However, there is one problem here, and that is the wood hardener does not penetrate into wooden surfaces. That would mean that it would not harden the entire block of wood but would only protect the sides. So, it will stabilize the wood to some extent, but you may need to use some other agent for the complete protection of wood.
With Thermosetting Resin
When the resin is cured at 95 degrees inside an oven, it is known as a thermosetting resin. The wood needs to be dried completely before the process can begin. Hence, you can use the oven to dry the wood at 104 degrees Celsius for 24 hours. Then use the resin to cover the wood and the pores will absorb it slowly.
You will need dry wood, a vacuum pump, a vacuum chamber, aluminum foil, an oven, hardened resin, and a coloring agent, along with proper safety gear. Collect all the items needed and then start curing the wood.
How To Use A Vacuum Chamber?
The most common method of stabilizing wood is by using a vacuum chamber. We have divided the process into steps so that it is easier for you to understand.
Step 1| Laying The Wooden Pieces
The first step in this process involves laying out all the wooden pieces in the chamber. Now there is a chance that after laying them in place, they might float or move away. To prevent that from happening, you can use an anti-float mat. This would keep the wooden planks in place, and you can move on to the next step.
Step 2| Filling Up The Resin
Next, you will have to pour the resin onto the wooden planks in the vacuum chamber. We will recommend pouring in 15 mm and seeing if all the pieces are well soaked. You can fill it up to 30 mm so that the woods are deep inside the resin. This would ensure that the planks would soak up a lot of resin, and that would make the wood harder.
Step 3| Air Extraction
After the resin has been poured, you can close the vacuum chamber. Then the air extraction will begin, and all the air trapped within the wooden pieces will be released and extracted. Once the air is sucked out well, the resin can enter the blocks.
You will soon see the resin boiling once the vacuum chamber is closed. This process should begin right after extracting all the air. Also, make sure that the resin does not foam too much while boiling.
Step 4| Letting The Wood Sit
Once the process has been completed, allow the wood to stay in the container for a while before taking them out. Also, open the lid of the chamber carefully as it would be extremely hot.
Step 5| Drying The wood
Then you will need to take the woodblocks out from the chamber and allow them to dry. Keep them on a paper towel and let them stay in the open. While they dry, we will ask you to immediately pour the resin from the chamber into an airtight container.
You can store it in a dry place, and the resin will last for a long time. It can be used again for stabilizing wood the next time you plan the process. Also, wash all the equipment used immediately with detergent and water. They should be cleaned immediately as it would be easier to remove all the resin while it is still hot.
Step 6| Using An Aluminum Foil
Once the wooden pieces have dried, you will need to wrap them in aluminum foil. The shiny side needs to be on the inside, and the matte one should be facing you on the outside. Wrap the wood well so that the foil clings onto the wood.
Step 7| Heating The Oven
The oven has to be preheated before the wood can be placed inside. To do this, set it at a temperature of 71 degrees celsius and wait for it to get heated. Once the oven is hot, you will need to put the aluminum-covered wood blocks inside. Here, you might lose some amount of resin from the surface, but that should not cause an issue.
But if you are losing too much resin, then you would know that the surfaces had not dried well. Hence, please wait for enough time before placing the wooden pieces in the oven.
Moving on, after they are placed inside, leave them there for an hour and a half to bake.
Step 8| Removing The Foil
You can remove the foiled wooden pieces from the oven when they have been baked completely. Then you can wear your gloves and remove the foil from the wood. Now, this process can be difficult as the foil might not come off easily.
In that case, you can use a knife or any sharp tool to poke the foil. Then the foil can be pulled off from the top of the wooden pieces.
You will be able to see how the pieces have become hard, and there should be a huge difference from when they had been put in the oven.
What Types Of Wood Can Be Stabilized?
All types of wood cannot be stabilized as they do not have equal absorbing capacity. However, there are certain types of wood that come with larger pores, and these work the best. As the pores are bigger, the density is lower, making the wood perfect for stabilizing.
The stabilizing medium can be poured over the wood to make it harder and better protected. Plus, the big pores will provide more space for the medium to settle, and that would make it harder. So, the major types of wood that can be stabilized are,
Beech
Polar
Birch
These types have larger pores, and the resin can easily settle in them. That provides the final product with a good structure, and you can then use the stabilized wood for multiple purposes.
Moreover, you can use coloring dyes with the stabilizing medium, and the finished product will look beautiful. MMA can be used along with resin to get the desired color and shine. If you are confused, ask the local store, and they will tell you about the popular colors that are being bought.
However, there are some wood types that do not work with a stabilizing medium at all, and they are softwood, olive, ebony, and rosemary. These have tiny pores and an oily nature that prevents them from absorbing the stabilizing medium. Also, if the wood has a lot of tanning medium, then it will not stabilize as there are very limited empty pores remaining in the wood.
What Is Stabilized Wood Used For?
Craftsmen and artisans who work with wood often stabilize wood before using them to make items. If you are wondering what stabilized wood can be used for, think of all the things that you would use good quality wood for.
The list would range from knives, dishes, pans, bowls, frames, and other daily use objects. These need very tough wood as otherwise they can easily get damaged or break over time.
Tips To Remember
Please remember that taking out all the air from the wooden plank is essential before moving forward. The more the air leaves from the deepest of pores, the more resin can get into the spaces. That would make the wood harder and better protected against moisture or damage.
Next, keep an airtight container ready to store the excess resin from the vacuum chamber. If you are prepared beforehand, then you will end up saving a lot of resin, which can easily be used again.
Additionally, the stabilization process should be done under controlled conditions to prevent the wood from hardening up too much. While hardwood is what you require, if it is too hard, then it cannot be used for many purposes. You might not be able to cut or carve it well.
Also, hardened wood can become very heavy and difficult to manage. Imagine writing with a very heavy pen and then facing hand fatigue every now and then. So, keep these factors in mind before you actually purchase a product.
How To Stabilize Wood Frequently Asked Questions
In this section, we will be listing down some of the frequently asked questions about stabilizing wood. This should help in clearing up your queries too and hence, read through carefully.
Can Water Enter the Wood After Stabilizing?
Yes, while stabilizing fills up the pores, wood can still absorb water and puff up. This happens through capillary action, and the water stays stored inside, destroying the wood. Hence, please make sure that you keep the wood in a safe and dry place.
You could also add a protective resin layer on the sides of the wood after the furniture has been made. This would protect the wood from moisture and water to a great extent, and you do not have to worry about accidental spills.
How Much Time Will The Entire Process Take?
The time period will largely vary depending on the type of wood, the density, and the weather conditions. You can expect it to take 6 to 24 hours and hence, do not plan anything in the next 24 hours. The resin needs to cure well, and you will need to keep a watch on the entire process while it happens.
Moreover, if you are working with high-quality wood, then it can easily take 24 hours to cure well. This is because all the air needs to be pulled out and eliminated so that the pores become free. Then the stabilizing medium can fill them up easily.
However, if you are working with lower quality wood, then you will need around 6 to 8 hours for curing.
Can You Use Glue Instead Of Resin?
Yes, you can use PVA glue instead of resin for stabilizing wood but be careful with the amount. It can be too thick, and hence, you would need to add some water to make the consistency thin. The softwood can then be soaked in this mix for the night before you take the wood out and dry them.
Final Words
Stabilizing wood might have seemed like a job that is best left to professionals, but after reading this guide, you should be able to do it on your own. Just keep all the ingredients handy and follow the instructions.
If necessary, you can check up videos on YouTube to see how the process looks. We will also recommend taking the help of another person so that the work is done flawlessly.
One person can keep a note of the instructions while the other can focus on the job at hand. Having said that, it is time to wrap up as we are sure that you have a clear idea about the wood stabilizing process.
Let us know if you have any doubts in the comment section below. We will try to address them in our next guide.
Have your reel mower blades gotten blunt lately? Hate it when that happens. But what if instead of tossing it away, you could sharpen its blades?
Well, as busy home homeowners, we like our tools being ready for use at all times, and when it fails to work, we either replace or try to fix it. Not all appliances can be repaired, but you can definitely fix things when your reel mower’s blades hit a snag.
Even though these blades are designed to retain their sharpness for a long time, they eventually wear and stop working altogether. While that's unavoidable, there are several effective ways to sharpen a reel mower's blades. And you can do it yourself by following a few simple steps and taking some precautions beforehand.
Without further ado, let's get down to business.
How to Sharpen Reel Mower Blades?
Safety Measures Before The Job
You don't need to hire a handyman or a technician to get the job done, but you need to follow certain safety procedures. So, before we discuss the sharpening methods, we want to elaborate on the precautions. Here we go...
Make sure that the reel is secure.
Do not, at any point, place your hands on the cutting edge.
Avoid all distractions while going through the process.
While sharpening the blades, wear well-fitted clothes and take off all jewelry. This is necessary as with loose-fitting clothes and jewelry, there's a risk of the mower parts getting hooked on to them.
Wear resistant and non-slip footwear as well as full-length pants to keep your legs covered and protected at all times. While sharpening the blades, it's essential not to wear slippers, sandals, or any type of shoe that will leave your feet exposed.
Wear a face shield and safety glasses. While sharpening the blades, a lot of tiny metal particles, sand, stone bits, and other small matter will fly around and may reach your face. Hence, you must cover your face, especially the eyes, properly to avoid any injury.
All these measures are ways to ensure a safe experience and prevent any mishap or injury. So, it's best that you follow this basic routine before getting started.
File As a Sharpening Tool
This is by far the most cost-effective method of sharpening reel mower blades. It's pretty easy and helps you hone the edges of the blades until they regain sharpness.
Get rid of the debris
Before using the files, scrape off the stone chips, sand and other debris stuck on the blades. For this task, you can use a wire brush or a coarse sandpaper. After you finish cleaning, put the mower on a workbench or tabletop and chock the wheels with a piece of wood so that they don't move.
Secure the blades and file
Lock the blades in position by inserting a broom handle through the mower's blades. Thereafter, press the toothed end of the metal file on the bevel edge of the first blade. Angle the file and simply scrape on the blade between 3 to 6 times, dragging it down towards the end of the beveled edge.
Work till the midpoint and beyond
Continue filing your way down the blade until you reach the midpoint, repeating the brushing motion. Since the blades twist, you'll have to stop near the midpoint, remove the broom handle and reposition the reel to work on the rest of the first blade. Continue filing the blade applying the same motion but now start from the other end of the tool.
Repeat on all blades
Once the entire blade is sharpened, reposition the reel so you can perform the same course of action on the second blade, third blade, and so on, until all of them have been sharpened.
Finish with a lubricant - Once you're done with the blades, lubricate them so that they resist rust. You can either spray lubricant directly on the edges of the blades or apply some on a rag and then wipe it down the edges.
How to Sharpen Reel Mowers Blades Using A Sharpening Compound
Using a back-lapping sharpening kit is yet another quick and productive way to sharpen dull mower blades. The kits usually come with a handle and the sharpening compound. That being said, sharpening compounds are grainy substances which when applied to the mower's cutting edges sharpen them as the blades rub against each other.
This procedure involves attaching the handle to the driving gear of your reel mower, then using a paintbrush to apply the sharpening compound on each blade. Coat the blades generously and make sure to apply on all the blades. After that, push the reel mower backwards so that the blades rub against each other and regain their sharpness.
The reel can be driven back manually, but it is somewhat a tedious process, requiring a lot of effort. However, you always have the option of using a power drill to crank the reel more quickly, which speeds up the process, making it less stressful.
How to Adjust the Blades of a Reel Mower
We often mistakenly assume that the blades of our reel mowers have become dull, and need sharpening. But this may not be the case always as misalignment of the blades can also hinder the smooth operation of the mower. Fortunately, with these simple steps, you can realign the blades and resume work in a snap.
Below are some tips on how to adjust the blades of your reel mower:
Step 1
Lay your mower on a flat surface like a tabletop or a workbench. Wedge the wheels to prevent any movement.
Step 2
Spin the reel to determine the type of adjustment necessary (they are not the same always). While spinning, if you hear a screeching noise, it's an indication that you have to reposition the blades away from the cutting edge. However, if it spins loosely, then you must move the blades nearer to the cutting bar.
Step 3
After ensuring the type of adjustment needed, if the blades need to be moved nearer, place a flathead screwdriver in the screw hole and tighten the screws. Conversely, if the blades need to be positioned farther away, unscrew the bolts a little until the desired distance is achieved.
Step 4
While tightening or loosening the screws, make sure it is done a little bit at a time. If it's too much, the blades may be over-adjusted.
Step 5
Turn the screws of the cutting edge in the direction opposite of the reel screws. This should also be done slowly, bit by bit, to prevent over-adjustment.
Step 6
Continue spinning to find out other adjustments needed.
If this procedure is followed correctly, you can quickly fix any misaligned blade. If the blades are still blunt, then you should sharpen them employing any of the methods explained above, to get the mower working once again.
Conclusion
It is totally unnecessary to pay a professional for a job that you can complete yourself in the comfort of your home. That being the case, reel mowers are bound to get blunt with use over time, so it's best that you master the skill to undo the damage.
However, before we leave, we once again advise caution as sharpening any tool should be done carefully by following all the safety measures. If, at any point in time, you feel uncomfortable handling sharp parts, it's best to ask for help.
On that note, we've come to the end of this guide, and we hope we can answer all your queries.
Let us know in the comments section below if you have more tips to share.
Thought that rusty bow saw from your grandpa’s garage will give up on you? Well, you are in for a surprise!
Buying the required tools for any project is just half the job done. Depending on the type of tools, we must clean and sharpen them regularly. Proper maintenance ensures durability and peak performance in the long run. After all, such tools are quite expensive, and who would want to shell out all that money only to discard them after a few uses?
Regular sharpening of cutting tools not only increases their lifespan but also makes your job easier. Believe it or not, a sharpened saw works three times faster than an unsharpened one. Thus, you will need less force and time to cut through that log of wood. However, sharpening a bow saw is no child’s play, so we are here to help you with that.
Bring out your tool kits, and let’s get to work!
How To Sharpen A Bow Saw?
Observe The Blade
The edge of the blade consists of a combination of teeth. The cutting teeth are triangular, and the raker teeth are shaped like fishtails — both of these need to be sharpened differently. Before beginning the process, we recommend that you wear work gloves and take all safety measures to prevent injuries.
In addition, check that the bow saw does not bear specialized hardened teeth. If it does, a regular saw file will not work on it; you will need a diamond file instead.
Filing
If the bow saw has been sharpened before, chances are its teeth may be uneven. The shorter teeth are no longer able to reach the object you want to cut, requiring more effort from the user. Therefore, it is essential to file/ trim the blade so that its teeth retain the same shape and height.
Set up the saw in a vise with the edge of the blade pointed upwards. Now, take a flat file and run it back and forth across the blade until all the teeth reach the same height. At this step, you need not worry about the rakers that are shorter than cutting teeth.
Sharpening The Cutting (Triangular) Teeth
Use a slim taper file or any three-sided file to sharpen the cutting teeth. Try to maintain an angle of 75 degrees and do not exert unnecessary pressure. Each tooth should get no more than 3-4 strokes of the file. This step is crucial, so we recommend that you do not rush and work on one tooth at a time.
If the bow saw has been frequently sharpened before, it may not show much results, and you could require a new one. In other circumstances, this time-consuming process will produce a visibly significant difference.
Sharpening The Raker (Fishtail) Teeth
Unlike the cutting teeth, the fishtail rakers should be sharpened into chisel tips. Ensure that you maintain a 90-degree angle while sharpening the raker teeth. As mentioned before, we do not recommend putting too much force on the file, and the bow saw should remain put throughout the process.
Finishing Up
Now that we are almost done, it is time to set the cutting teeth. Note that this step does not include the raker teeth. We recommend using adjacent cutters to alternate and set each tooth. Point the edge outwards while doing so. This step is essential for widening the kerf and achieving better friction.
Check The Results
Test your bow saw on a piece of wood or anything that catches your fancy. It is highly likely that your saw cuts more smoothly and quickly than it used to. If that is not the case, you may need to sharpen the blades further.
And that is how you resurrect your ancient bow saw! But hold up… You would not want to repeat this tedious task time and again now. Right?
Of course, sharpening is part of the maintenance and needs to be done periodically to increase the longevity of your cutting tools. But in our fast-paced world, where everyone is in a rush, who has the time to sharpen a saw after every few months?
Hence, before we sign off, here are a few maintenance hacks that will keep your saw in top-notch condition. Note that these steps will be beneficial for bucksaws, pruning saws, and other sharp tools as well.
Bow Saw Maintenance Tips
Proper Storage
Since these cutting tools are made of metal, keeping them away from humidity and heat helps a great deal in maintaining their sharpness. Thus, whether you hang them in a garage or keep them in a toolbox, saws must be stored in a cool, dry, and dark place.
Lubrication
Remember to lubricate the blades after each use to prevent rust and maintain the sharpness of your bow saw. There are tons of options to choose from, with the most popular ones being gun oil and paste wax.
Furthermore, always read the instructions of the lubricating agent before using it since all of them have different procedures. While gun oil can be wiped off immediately, paste wax needs to sit on the blade for a while. Not following the correct lubricating procedure can cause more harm than good.
Oiling
While the blade of the saw does the most work, the handle needs some attention too. Especially, wooden handles must be oiled regularly, if not after every use.
Note that this step is different from lubricating the blade. While the blade needs to be wiped off immediately or after a while, depending on the lubricant, it is not the same with the handle. Let the oil stay on the handle as it acts as a protective layer against dust and moisture.
Additionally, if you notice some rust on the handle where it touches the blade, pull it apart and clean the area. You can opt for sandpaper or steel wool to scrape off the rust and stains if any. Finish it off with oiling.
Removing Rust
In case the blade of your bow saw starts rusting, a razor blade can come in handy. Take off the handle and lay the blade on a flat surface. Keep the razor at a low angle and run it over the saw blade. Be extra cautious since you will be working with two sharp objects, so it is best not to speed up.
There may be some stubborn stains on the blade but nothing that a steel wool or sandpaper cannot handle. Simply rub it over the stains, and they will be gone in no time.
Using The Bow Saw Correctly
Other than proper maintenance, using it the correct way also helps in getting the most out of your handy bow saw. Hence, here are some useful tips and tricks on using your bow saw correctly and safely.
Uses Of Bow Saws
Bow saws are ideally meant for cutting small and medium-sized logs of wood and branches. While bigger bow saws, often operated by two or more people, can tackle large pieces of wood, a regular bow saw is not meant for that. Limit your bow saw uses to camping, sculpting, minor carpentry, etc.
Sharpness And Friction
Always start a project with a clean, and sharp bow saw. As mentioned earlier, use a lubricant and oil to clean it. This maintains the perfect amount of friction between the blade and the object in every use.
Cutting Branches
Start by making an undercut below the branch before cutting it. Cut it gently by drawing the bow saw back and forth. Be careful about your hand that is stabilizing the branch or any other object. We recommend keeping your hand about 10 inches away from the blade.
Protective Gear
If possible, always wear protective boots, gloves, hats, and goggles while working with a bow saw. After all, it is better to be safe than sorry.
Carrying A Bow Saw
While carrying a bow saw, hold the handle with the edge facing away from your body. If you happen to be near children, be extra vigilant while handling the sharp tool. Try maintaining a safe distance of at least 10-feet from them.
Do Not Work Alone
It is best to have someone around while you work with a bow saw to avoid hazardous mishaps.
Conclusion
There you have it! A clear step-by-step tutorial of sharpening a bow saw with maintenance tips. Although sharpening is a long-forgotten skill, there is no harm in honing it, especially if you enjoy woodwork. Not to forget the boost of confidence and self-satisfaction that comes with doing something all by yourself!
So, fetch that abandoned bow saw which is collecting dust in some corner of your storage. It is time to give it a makeover with your newly learned skill!
A new cast iron skillet is an investment you won’t regret. Cast iron skillets are safe and versatile cookware for making the most delicious food you can ever imagine!
Whether cooking on a stovetop, baking in an oven, or grilling outdoors, cast iron pans can be used well!
But cooking with cast iron is not always the easiest. Some maintenance is required to keep this type of cookware in mint condition.
Worry not; there is no reason to get intimidated. This article will show you the easy steps to season cast iron skillets for perfect use every time. Keep reading!
Before diving into the steps to season cast iron cookware, let’s first understand what cast iron seasoning is all about.
You might think we’re adding salt and pepper to a new pan. Besides, isn’t that what “seasoning” in cooking is all about? In this case, no.
The oven seasoning process involves creating a protective coating for your skillet by heating incredibly thin layers of fat or oil. In short, seasoning is carbonized oil baked onto cast iron.
As the oil heats, the fat bonds to the metal and converts it into protective plastic. This is the process called polymerization.
You probably imagine getting a greasy coating. But the ideal result after you season a cast iron is a hard, blackened skin that protects metal from corrosion.
The seasoned surface becomes a hydrophobic protective layer, creating an easy-release cooking surface. Its nonstick surface makes cast iron skillets better than today's best non-stick pans.
Creating this thin layer of protection works not only for cast iron cookware, but you can also season the cooking surface of carbon steel pans.
How to Season Cast Iron Pan in 5 Steps
Although most new cast iron skillets will come pre-seasoned, seasoning cast iron with additional layers of protection will only increase the lifespan of your new cast iron pan!
Many cast iron cookware sites will give you similar steps on how to season cast iron. They're pretty straightforward to follow.
Later, it would be best to pop your skillet into a hot oven. Preheating the oven to 230 ºC (450ºF) ahead of time is best for better time management.
Step 2: Wash and Dry Your Pan
Have you heard of comments saying soapy water will destroy the surface of your cast iron pan? Although there is some truth to it, a little soapy water to get your cast iron skillet ready for seasoning won't hurt.
Prepping to season a cast iron requires the smoothest surface possible. Some soap, hot water, and a brush to clean the entire pan will do the trick.
Make sure to remove all food particles on the surface. A chainmail scrubber or pan scraper gets the job done faster.
If your cast iron pan is rusty, grab a ball of steel wool and scrub off all tough rust spots to create a clean pan.
After a good wash and scrub, dry the skillet with a fresh paper towel. Make sure to remove all lingering water droplets.
You don't want any surface moisture on there. To ensure it is completely dry, put it on the stovetop for a few minutes to remove any excess water.
Once your skillet is neat and dry, add a small amount of neutral cooking oil to the skillet.
We suggest unsaturated cooking fats like flaxseed, grapeseed, sunflower, or vegetable oil. These are easier to spread compared to saturated fats like shortening or lard.
Although flaxseed oil results in a nicely seasoned cast iron skillet, be wary that it has a very low smoke point at just 225 ºC (437 ºF). Your kitchen may get a smoky atmosphere during the baking process. And because of this, we don't always recommend it.
Next, use a paper towel to coat the entire pan, including its top, bottom, sides, and handle. Remove any excess oil. A thin coat should do.
Rub the cooking oil all over and buff thoroughly, so the pan doesn't look the slightest bit greasy. Any excess oil will make the pan sticky after heating.
Your oven temperature should be at 230 ºC (450ºF) by now. It's time to place your cast iron skillet upside down and bake for about an hour.
Oven temperatures might vary depending on the cooking oil you use. Some advocate changing oven temperatures during seasoning, especially as it gets a little smoky in your kitchen.
Make sure to keep your space ventilated when this happens.
Placing the pan upside down may cause a few oil drips. Feel free toset a large baking sheet or aluminum foil under the skillet for easier cleanup.
After baking, give the pan some time to cool. It will be extremely hot. An oven mitt will come in handy!
At this time, the oil will polymerize and form the first of many plastic-like coatings for your cast iron.
Step 5: Repeat 3 to 4 Times
After your first hour of heating, you should have a good initial layer from your own seasoning.
Take your cast iron out of the oven and repeat step 3. Rub your pan with more oil, buff it out, and pop it back in the oven for another 30 minutes.
Perform the oiling and heating process for a 3rd and 4th time. Once you are done, switch off the oven and let the pan cool with the door closed.
You should now have a polished, non-stick black surface. Your cast iron pan is seasoned and ready for cooking!
What Are Common Mistakes When Seasoning Cast Iron?
Seasoning cast iron is not that difficult once you get the hang of it. But there are still a few mistakes people overlook. Here are a few:
It is a common understanding that soap can deteriorate the nonstick characteristics of your cast iron skillet.
However, many experts have agreed that a little soap to clean your cast iron cookware is fine. Just make sure to rinse it before oiling and heating it fully.
A seasoned cast iron skillet should remain perfect for cooking for a long time. But a word of caution, avoid cooking acidic foods on it for long durations. This can increase the chances of corrosion on your skillet.
If you need another cookware for your pizza recipes, you might want to check out the Best Portable Pizza Oven and Best Wood for Your Pizza Oven.
Heating the pan after oiling is crucial, so the oil bonds to the pan to become a protective layer of seasoning. This should be done at least 3 to 4 times.
Your cast iron pan is stronger than you think! They can last for generations.
It is unlikely you'll scrape off the surface with your metal utensils. If you notice black pieces flaking off, that's most likely burnt bits of food from your previous cooking session.
When Should You Get a New Cast Iron Pan?
Well-seasoned cast iron cookware is known to last ages. Many families even pass it on from generation to generation, along with their secret recipes.
You are seasoning your cast iron cookware every time you use it. So every use should strengthen the bond to the metal.
However, avoid using cast iron for cooking highly acidic foods like long-simmering tomato sauce. This eats up its protective coating.
If you notice food sticking more often, the black patina wears off, and it is time for a re-seasoning.
If a crack appears in your cast iron pan, it's time to give your cast iron skillet a rest.
Even a hairline crack will expand and contract when heated and cooled. This can eventually cause a split which is extremely dangerous when it happens while you are cooking.
Cracks are also breeding spaces for bacteria and rust. Consuming food cooked from a broken cast iron skillet is already a health hazard.
Testing countless methods to season cast iron pans is unnecessary. You've got this article to guide you in our tried-and-tested method on how to season cast iron.
Follow the easy steps above and avoid common mistakes. You should get the hang of it soon!
Just remember that a well-seasoned cast-iron skillet used frequently allows the building of new layers of seasoning every time. Your skillet should stay in your family for generations to come.
What are you waiting for? Get busy seasoning and cooking in the kitchen now!
You probably have a globe at home which you don't use anymore. Most kids get globes when they are at school, and later they put it somewhere away and simply don't use it anymore. If you have a globe at home, and you are looking for some fun DIY projects, you are at the right place.
Here you will see How To Repurpose A Globe In A Fun Way and give it a second life in no time and with ease. These crafts are super easy and they don`t require experience or particular skills, so you may want to give some of them a try. Scroll down and make a pick!
If you love hanging plant holders, this is the perfect idea for you. The globe will come in handy here perfectly well, and you will have a planter that is one of a kind.
Did anyone said barbecue? Barbecue time is the best time spent with family and friends. If you want to update your old barbecue and give it a brand new look, here's how you can do it without spending a cent!
Just color the globe in one color and add flower decorations to it if you want to get an eye-catching decorative piece that will make a statement in your home.
What do you say about coloring the globe in chalkboard paint? In this way you will have a wonderful surface where you can write your favorite quotes daily and motivate yourselves and the people around you!
Yes, the globe can be easily transformed into a clock! Just make a tiny hole, and insert the clock mechanism from an old clock, and you will get a unique teller of time!
Do you have the habit to save money? If yes, this way to repurpose the globe is the ideal for you!
Many people turn the glove into a lighting fixtures, and there are many varitations to this purpose. You can check them all out and pick your favorite!
I totally love this design! The globe is repurposed in such a way, that people can leave their cards on the party they are attending in it. If you are hosting a party soon, this is a cool idea that you should try.
Which is the design in which you would love to repurpose your globe? We would love to hear from you in the comment section below!
As essential as wood glue is for any DIY woodworking project, it comes with a couple of negatives too.
And the worst of them is when it accidentally drops on hardwood flooring or spills over a workpiece during a project. Removing it might be quite a struggle, something that every DIYer is acquainted with. But at the end of the day, you need to get done with the removal.
Don’t worry; there are some effective methods to tackle this mess, too, as with other materials. And that’s what we’ll tell you about in our extensive guide. Just follow these accurately, and you’ll be relieved from the headache of wood glue spills.
With all said and done, let’s begin!
How to Remove Wood Glue
Some Essential Tips And Quick Tricks
When it comes to removing wood glue, the first thing to keep in mind is that all glue products on the market aren’t the same. Each has its own set of characteristics, and when used on wood, it might create a different kind of glue mark that you must remove.
While using wood glues, they often drip from the bottle or tube and form globules that can be difficult to remove immediately. However, once they harden a bit, you can remove them more easily with the help of a mechanical procedure.
All you need to do is take a scraper or chisel and chip away the unwanted globules, which will take just a few minutes. But the only sticking point with this procedure is that some paint might also be removed, or the wood surface might get damaged sometimes.
Another possibility is the glue getting blotched and forming undried lumps that might filter into cracks and spread out on the wooden surface.
You can adopt several methods to tackle such stains, which include using warm soapy water and wiping off the glue. Again, you need to be extra careful while wiping the glue off as certain wood surfaces can get damaged easily. That’s why it will be best to use a less abrasive technique that will preserve the wooden surface.
Proven Methods For Removing Wood Glue
To ensure that wood glue is removed effectively, it’s essential to consider the wood surface you’re dealing with. That’s because every technique might not be suitable for all types of surfaces.
However, there are two proven methods that will be equally effective on any wooden surface. And we’ll begin by discussing these procedures.
This process works wonderfully in softening and removing powerful vinyl glues and is quite simple. Just set your hairdryer at a particular heat setting and position it above the part with the dried glue for about five minutes.
And you’ll soon find the glue softening and loosening out. Once you spot this, scrape or peel the glue off the surface, and it will be back in its original form. Thus, applying heat is the best technique when you need to remove dried and hardened glue.
If the surface you’re working on is slightly raised and the glue covers a fairly large portion of the area, this method can prove to be quite useful. It requires you to soak a cloth in hot water and place it on the site stained with dried glue. Let it soften for some time, and then scrape off the softened glue from the surface.
Brake cleaners can be found in any hardware store, so you won’t have any difficulty fetching such a product. For this method, you just need to spray the cleaner onto the stained area and then clean it with a dry cloth till the glue is totally removed.
Sometimes, spraying once isn’t enough, so you’ll need to do it several times to ensure that all the glue is softened and can be wiped out easily.
Other Materials You can Use
If the glue turns dry in some hard-to-reach areas on the surface and you require removing it, some other materials can be used for the same. Your choice will vary according to the surface that you have to clean and the stubbornness of the dried glue.
Here are some materials that can be beneficial for getting rid of the unwanted wood glue:
Ammonia
Vinegar
Acetone
Salt and lemon
Methylated spirits
Special glue removers
Choosing The Best Wood Glue Remover
If you opt for a glue remover among the above products, choosing the right product becomes important as not all are equally suitable for your purpose. So, these are factors you should consider while making a choice.
Ingredient
Glue removers come with a particular active ingredient that makes removing sticky substances easy. While some are formulated with chemicals, others consist of natural ingredients such as soy or citrus oils.
Remember that apart from being truly effective in removing the glue, the product must also be safe to use. Speaking of chemical-based removers, these emit a strong odor and have a harsh formulation that’s harmful to the skin. On the other hand, citrus-based removers come with a pleasant fragrance and are much safer to handle.
That’s why you must read through the reviews to ascertain whether the product is efficient as well as safe to use.
Form
Adhesive removers are available in the form of liquids and sprays, so you can choose between either form as per your convenience. Liquid removers are the best to go for in case you mostly work in areas with limited ventilation since they don’t produce chemical odors. But if you work in well-ventilated spaces, sprays will be perfect for the job.
When you’re working with raw or bare wood, you must ensure that the surface doesn’t have any unwanted marks after the removal procedure is complete. Using some particular materials will make sure no damage is caused to the surface.
1. Using Baking Soda
Firstly, soften the undesirable glue on the wood surface using a hairdryer and then scrape off the softened part with a spatula. Follow this by mixing some baking soda with hot water and spreading that paste all over the unwanted marks of glue on the surface. You’ll have to wait for around 15 minutes and then wash the entire surface with soapy hot water.
2.Using A Nail Polish Remover
Though it might sound surprising, the chemical used to remove nail polish can be quite beneficial for getting rid of wood glue. But make sure that the remover doesn’t have acetone, as that will create unwanted marks on the surface.
Using this product is quite simple, as you just need to apply some of it on the area which has the glue and allow it to set in for a few minutes. After this, you can use steel wool, emery paper, or steel sponges to take off the softened glue from the surface.
Working With Painted Wood
If you need to remove glue from painted wood, it will require much more work than what we’ve discussed till now. The extra effort lies in trying to protect the underlying paint from any damage or removal. For this, you’ll have to start off by removing the bigger chunks of hardened glue with a hairdryer or plastic spatula. Then you may follow any of the two techniques described below:
Again, this fact might seem surprising, but cooking oil is indeed excellent for getting rid of wood glue. You can access some cooking oil anytime you want since it’s available in every household. And most importantly, it will never damage either the bar wood surface or the underlying paint.
Soak a piece of cloth in some cooking oil and wipe it over the area with the wood glue. You’ll also need to apply a little elbow grease along with the oil. Finally, wash the wood surface with warm soapy water, and you’ll soon find that the wood glue has been removed.
Another non-toxic yet highly effective way of removing wood glue is by using vinegar. Take a piece of cloth, soak it in vinegar, and pat it softly on the part with the glue. This will cause the glue to loosen from the surface. Now, take another cloth piece, dip it in hot water, and wipe it over the surface. The loosened glue will then come off easily. But in case there’s still some glue left on the surface, use the steel wood to wipe that off.
Dealing With A Range Of Wooden Surfaces
The wooden surface that you’re working with might not always be of the same type. Moreover, it might be used in different furniture and other parts of the house, such as floors and decks. All these types of surfaces have different applications, and hence you will need different methods to remove glue from them.
1. Hardwood Surfaces
While using wood glue for your projects, you will often find some spills on the floors, and in case they’re made from hardwood, getting rid of it can seem difficult. However, there’s a way you can get through this task, but you need to be very cautious at every step. That’s because hardwood flooring is more prone to damage than other materials.
Here’s how you’ll have to proceed:
Step 1
Begin by softening and loosening the dried glue with a hairdryer. Then scrape off the softened glue from the hardwood floor using a spatula.
Step 2
Mix some baking soda with hot water and apply the paste to the glue stain on the floor. Wait for some time to let it sit in.
Step 3
Now, wipe off the undesirable stains using a cloth soaking in warm soapy water.
2. Wooden Tables
Simple items in your kitchen such as salt and lemon will be enough for removing wood glue from any wooden table. A solution of lemon and salt is highly effective in getting rid of glue stains and won’t have any adverse effects on the wood.
All you need to do for the procedure is squeeze a little lemon juice on the area stained with glue and leave it to soak in for around 15 minutes. Follow this by sprinkling some salt on the area and let it work for some more minutes. As a result, the glue will loosen and can be lifted off quite easily using a spatula.
3. Waxed Wood
You’ll require using a slightly different process when you’re working with waxed wood, and it has lots of wood glue stains. These are the steps you must follow for removing wood glue from such surfaces:
Step 1
Use absorbent paper or paper towel to cover the glue stain.
Step 2
Then heat an electric iron and run it all over the paper or towel so that the glue softens. Be careful not to heat the iron too much as it may burn the paper in that case.
Step 3
The paper will now absorb the softened glue stain, and the surface will soon be clear of all the glue.
4. Parquet Floors
Parquet is a rare and appealing flooring type that consists of a geometric mosaic of several wood pieces assembled to create a decorative effect. And like hardwood floors, this type is also easily affected by undesirable glue stains. To get back the much-loved original look of a parquet floor, you can proceed in two different ways as per the form of glue used.
In case the stains have been caused by a solvent-based glue, they will be much simpler to deal with. Just use a scraper to remove all the unwanted glue chunks. Then apply a paste of warm water and baking soda to the affected area and clean it off with a cloth.
However, removing vinyl glue will be slightly more difficult as it’s much more brittle in nature. Begin by removing the worst of glue stains using a spatula and finally wipe the area with a clean cloth. Remember that you should use the spatula gently as applying more force might end up damaging the floor.
5. Teak Wood
Teak is a particular variety of hardwood that is widely used for making furniture of different kinds. The aesthetic appeal of this variety and its high termite and moisture resistance make it an ideal fit for the purpose.
But teak is still prone to being stained by wood glues. Hence, in case you’re struggling to remove wood glue spills from your favorite teak furniture, the following procedure can do the trick:
Step 1
First and foremost, you’ll have to soak a sponge in warm water and wipe it gently over the glue stain.
Step 2
Follow this by dipping some balls of cotton wool in methylated spirit and rub over the stain gently so that it comes off.
Step 3
In case you find the wood surface to be slightly uneven after cleaning off the stain, use some sandpaper of fine grit to smoothen the surface.
6. Varnished Wood
Varnishing a wooden surface provides it with a layer that can be damaged very easily. As such, while removing glue from surfaces, you should be gentle throughout the procedure.
First, you’ll have to soak a piece of cloth in warm water and dab it gently over the stained areas. But if this doesn’t work, you can try applying cooking oil in the same way. And in case the stains still persist, you can use white spirits as these won’t affect the varnish. Dip a piece of cloth in the spirit and rub it over the stains gently, and they’ll surely soften and come off.
Removing Wood Glue That’s Still Wet
It’s always better to treat glue stains while you’re working with wood pieces, as they are less stubborn and hence easier to clean. Plus, treating them then and there also saves the effort and time you’ll have to put into it later on.
This procedure requires you to soak a piece of cloth in warm water and then wipe the glue off the surface. But in case there’s a large glue blob on the surface, you should ideally let it turn slightly dry and then remove the blob with a spatula. If you find that glue has turned too hard, apply some acetone on it, and you’re good to go.
After you’ve looked at various methods to use for removing wood glue, let’s look at some essential things you need to know about working with wood glues.
Preparing Wooden Surfaces Before Applying Wood Glue
When starting a woodworking project, you’ll naturally aim to create perfect fixtures and joints and cuts to ensure the perfect outcome. As such, it’s essential to prep your wood pieces so that you’re able to achieve long-lasting bonds using wood glue.
Gluing Edges, End Grains, And Faces
For gluing each of these parts of the wood pieces, you must create pockets, dovetails, or a tenon and mortise joint as per the space you need for the job. Usually, face and edge gluing is easier since there is more surface area for the wood to create a bond. But to use the end grain, you’ll definitely have to create any of the joints or fixtures that we mentioned.
Sand The Wood
Remember that wood glue bonds best to wood pieces that are properly sanded or smoothened. But in case there’s a finish such as a sanding sealer on the surface, the glue won’t bond well and create a weaker fixture.
Hence, make sure you check all the wood pieces for any such finish before you start the work. If you come across such a finish, you must remove it completely.
Precautions To Take While Working With Wood Glue
Using Masking Tape
You can avoid unnecessary glue spills by using some masking tape. All you need to do is tape off the section where you’ll have to apply the glue. This way, the tape would prevent excess glue from spilling over other portions of the surface or onto the floor.
Check The Instructions For Application
Most of the glue products available nowadays come with a manual containing certain instructions for application. Some might have the instructions mentioned on the label over the tube or the bottle.
Either way, you must go through these instructions carefully. These often include the ideal amounts to be used for different purposes or a certain standard amount applicable in all cases. So, adhering to the prescribed amounts will help prevent the possibility of a glue spill. You should also work in batches instead of applying the glue over a large portion at once.
Another thing to make a note of is the time for which the glue can be left open without drying up. Keeping it open for a long time may cause it to dry completely, thereby rendering it useless.
Furthermore, some dried glues might emanate toxic fumes that are harmful to the body, so it’s best to fasten the lid or cap the moment you’re done using the glue.
Using Proper Tools
Try spreading the wood glue using a trowel as that will help apply more precise amounts on the wooden surface and will also keep the hands protected. If glue comes in contact with the hands, it may cause irritation or might even lead to burns or rashes on the skin.
Wearing Protective Gear
Many wood glue products have toxic chemicals such as formaldehyde included in their formulation. Hence, you need to adopt certain protective measures to prevent any accidental injuries. The parts that need to be protected are your eyes, respiratory tract, and skin. As such, you should wear safety goggles, a respirator mask, and a pair of safety gloves.
Dispose Of The Glue Safely
Once you’ve finished using the glue, make sure to dispose of the container safely. You must not pour the remaining amount down a drain or in a sink, as that can clog parts of your plumbing system and will also contribute to polluting waterways.
The Area Must Be Well-Ventilated
Exposing yourself to wood glue for a long time can lead to headaches and breathing problems. Moreover, it might contribute to the development of more dangerous diseases in the long term.
This is why it’s essential to work in a room that’s well-ventilated. All harmful odors and fumes produced by the glue can then drift away quickly, ensuring that there’s only fresh air to breathe in.
How to Remove Wood Glue Frequently Asked Questions
Q1. Can Wood Glue Be Sanded?
Yes, you can sand down wood glue to flatten the bumps that it may leave behind. You can also sand the wood after removing glue stains to achieve ultimate smoothness, as we’ve mentioned earlier.
Yes, you can remove Titebond glue with acetone, even though it’s much stronger than most other products. Start by moistening the glue with a damp cloth and then wipe it off with another cloth soaked in acetone.
Final Words
With that, it’s a wrap for today!
We hope you’ve developed a much clearer idea about how to proceed with removing wood glue from various wooden surfaces. So, resume your projects on a fresh note by steering clear of all the extra glue stains on the wood pieces. Nothing can go wrong this time around!
Here’s a last piece of advice for you. While purchasing any product such as acetone, glue remover, or a brake cleaner, make sure you read some online guides. That’ll help you zero in on a good-quality product.
We’ll be back soon with more intriguing guides, so watch out for this space. Till then, all the best!
Are you tired of ugly spray paint stains ruining the beauty of your concrete slab?
If the stain has been on the surface for ages, the chances are that it has become stubborn over time and thus more challenging to remove. However, it is not an impossible task. With a bit of help from DIY techniques, you can easily get it removed in no time.
But, the market is filled with thousands of equipment and materials that promise to take stains off the concrete. And this can often lead to confusion.
So, today, in this guide, we talk about the seven most effective methods you can implement to remove paint easily. We give you a detailed step-by-step breakdown of the processes and discuss the pros and cons of each technique.
Instead of rushing to the supermarket looking for materials that would save the concrete, you should first look for what is available in the house. It is not too much of a difficulty to find soap, water, and a stiff bristle brush for the job.
Trust us when we say that it is a great idea to give this method a try as it is the most economical way to deal with the problem. If the affected area is small, this should work perfectly!
What You’ll Need
For this process, you will need materials that you can find within the house. If you do not, getting one from the supermarket would not be too troublesome.
The most important thing you need to procure is a scrub brush with stiff bristles, two buckets, warm water, and mild soap. If you are working outdoors, what is required is a garden hose and, if indoors, a mop and a bucket.
And do not forget to get yourself some protective gear like safety goggles, respirators, or light-duty gloves.
How To Do It
The first thing that you need to do is remove excess dirt by wiping down the area meticulously. After that, make sure that you put on your protective gear correctly and check for any discrepancies.
Now go ahead and add warm water to a bucket. In the second bucket, mix some more warm water with a few drops of dish soap, just to get the solution a little foamy. Now wet the affected area on the concrete with warm soapy water.
Once that is done, dip the stiff brush in the soap solution and move it over the concrete, applying pressure in a circular motion. Use a paper towel after that to soak up any paint that comes off and wipe the area clean with warm water.
If you are working indoors, mopping the area one more time would be a good idea.
Pros And Cons
The best thing about this method is that it is the most cost-effective way to treat the issue as you are most likely to find all the materials to be present in the house. Secondly, it does not involve any toxic material to remove the paint from the concrete.
However, the major downside to this technique is that it involves a very mild solution and can take a considerable amount of time and effort to remove the paint. If the color has stained the concrete a long time back, the chances are high that it will not be entirely gone.
Considerations
You should consider going with this option only if the paint splattered on the concrete is relatively fresh. If you are wondering why, let us explain.
Concrete is highly porous and tends to absorb color quite fast, and as a result, the paint settles deep into it. Once settled in the intricate grooves of the concrete, it gets hard to remove it with a mild soap solution. But it is always worth a try as a first measure before getting the big guns out!
Moreover, keep in mind that you might have to repeat this process a few times to see the results. If it does not work in the first two tries, you can also add white vinegar to the solution to make it stronger. A lot of people suggest that it is a great agent in removing difficult stains.
But if you do choose to try it, make sure that you mix it in the right proportion. When not done correctly, it tends to strip the coating of the concrete, leaving it dull and famished. We suggest that you do a spot test to check how it affects the concrete you are using it on. This can save you from the trouble of damaging the entire slab and realizing it only when it is too late.
Moving on to the brush, make sure that their bristles are stiff so that you can scrub the slab vigorously. But that does not mean that you select a wire brush! If you do, that might leave permanent scratches on the concrete.
After you are done using soap and water, if the stain is still present, it means that you have to experiment with something else to get rid of it. In such an instance, you can give graffiti removers a try!
Graffiti removing materials effectively penetrate the paint structure and loosen its grip from the concrete or other surfaces. They are available in the market in various forms, such as wipes, pastes, aerosol cans, and even liquid solutions. To use it in the best way, we suggest that you carefully read the instructions on the label.
What You’ll Need
Before you start with the process, there are a few items that you have to buy. As you can already guess, the first and foremost thing that you would need is a graffiti remover. For this, select any variety that you desire and your budget permits.
Apart from that, you will require a brush with stiff bristles, warm water, one bucket, and disposable cloths or absorbent paper towels. Do not forget to get some protective gear before starting with the process. And like the previous method, if your affected area is outdoors, get hold of a garden hose.
How To Do It
The first step in the process is to clean the area to remove unwanted grime and dirt. And since this process involves chemical materials, it is best to put your protective gears on soon.
And once that is done, apply the graffiti remover on the affected areas. But before applying, read the label carefully so that you add it in the proper proportions. When done, let the mixture sit for a while. After that, take the stiff bristle brush to scrub the area clean and take the paint off by moving the brush in a circular motion.
As the paint starts coming off the concrete, use a disposable piece of cloth or a paper towel to wipe the area. Apply warm water from the bucket to give it a final rub, and use a hose if the concrete slab is outside your house.
The ideal thing to do is to keep repeating the process until the paint is entirely removed. If you are working inside the house, consider mopping the area one more time once you are done.
Pros and Cons
It is true that you do not need to break the bank to buy a graffiti remover. They are generally inexpensive, and you get plenty of options to choose from. And even though they are chemical products, they are not too harsh. Definitely not as strong as paint thinners.
If you use it judiciously, two to three scrubs should be good enough to get the paint off from the concrete unless it’s years old!
A significant drawback to this method is that it is pretty time-consuming. And we suggest that you do not start with the process when you are in a hurry. Depending on the remover you use, it might take 20 minutes or more between two applications before scrubbing away the colors.
And as we have mentioned before, it does require multiple applications to show its effectiveness.
Considerations
Before you start applying the graffiti remover, study the surface well. If it is vertical, keep in mind that trigger sprays will make the paint slowly drip down, causing the color to spread further.
To avoid such a situation, make sure that you do not oversaturate. And to stop the paint from spreading, you can consider using painter’s tape and plastic sheets. It is simple, and all you have to do is tape the surface under the paint and attach a drop cloth to prevent the area from run-offs.
And as we have mentioned before, graffiti removers are chemical products, so do not forget to put your protective gears on!
Strippers and thinners are highly effective in breaking down or ‘thinning’ the paint on various surfaces, even concrete.
Paint thinners come in solvent forms, which means that they can efficiently dissolve substances, and paint is no different. Besides thinners, there are other solvents that people use to remove paint, such as turpentine, denatured alcohol, acetone, and the likes.
Even though paint strippers are manufactured differently than paint thinners, they are also ideal for getting rid of the paint. They are available in two forms mainly: non-caustic variants that won’t harm your skin and chemical solvent-based formulas.
What You’ll Need
To begin with, you’ll need to get your hands on an effective paint stripper or a thinner. There are many options that are available in the market. Other than that, what you will need is a piece of clean disposable cloth and gear to protect you while working.
How To Do It
By now, you should know what the first step is. Yes, you guessed it right! Take a piece of cloth and wipe the affected area clean to ensure that there is no dirt.
Before you start with the process, it is essential that you check the working area to see if the ventilation is good and that you’re protected. Since you are working with strong chemicals, it is crucial that you take proper care to avoid accidents.
Make sure that you read the label carefully and go through the instructions minutely. This will help you understand in what proportions you should apply the solvent. Following the guideline, apply the thinner to the affected portions of the concrete. Use a clean piece of cloth to wipe the paint off once you are done.
Repeat the process a few times until the color comes off entirely.
Pros and Cons
If you are removing paint off concrete for the first time, going ahead with this process is a good idea. It does not involve using any materials that are too expensive and does not require high-level skills to ace the game. The application and cleaning process is relatively simple!
However, it does pose some danger unless you are careful. Paint strippers and thinners are mostly solvents and are thus flammable. So, make sure that you keep them away from heat sources and do not use them to light candles or smoke a cigarette around them.
And if you are working indoors, you will have to be more cautious as the vapor stays and travels through the house for a long time.
Moreover, they can leave a damaging impact on your skin. So, it is not just enough to wear gloves when working with these solvents. We recommend that you use a cloth to cover your entire arm.
Considerations
First and foremost, your safety is of utmost importance to us, and we recommend that you keep the area well ventilated when working with thinners. Make sure that you cover your nose, mouth, and all exposed areas of the body well. Unless you take proper care, these elements have the capacity to affect your respiratory system and skin too.
It is a good idea to go for soy gel strippers as they are a more organic way to get rid of the paint. The advantage of using this is that you can avoid the unpleasant pungent odor and the risk of damaging your skin.
Coming to paint thinners, you can take the help of cloth to easily blot the affected area on the concrete instead of applying it directly. Using this technique helps you to gain better control.
And if the surface you are applying it on is vertical, do not forget to protect it from run-offs with painter’s tape and plastic drop cloths.
Moving on, one good way to replace paint thinner is using mineral spirits. Comparatively, they smell less than thinners and have a good history of successfully getting rid of paints.
The deeper we go into this list, the stronger the chemicals become. On a scale, this is somewhere in the middle and is an effective solution. TSP, or trisodium phosphate, is a proven chemical used for paint removal.
There are many variants that are available online. However, if you do not want to wait for long, it is best to get it from a local hardware store. When you hit the market, you will find that TSPs come in two forms: liquid and powder. Take the one that suits your requirements the best.
What You’ll Need
It goes without saying that you will need a good quality TSP, either in liquid or powder form. Besides that, the other things required are a stiff brush, one big bucket, one small bucket, and warm water. Do not by any chance undermine the importance of protective gear while using this. So, don’t forget to get your hands on some safety goggles, work gloves, and a mask.
How To Do It
First things first, make sure that you clean the affected area well before you proceed with this method. Unless it is free of dirt and grime, the chances are high that the TSP won’t function properly.
After that, cover yourself with protective gears to ensure that the chemical has no detrimental impact on you. Follow the instructions and put the product label to the T to understand how to dilute it well. This is a very crucial step, and you cannot afford to mess up here as that might damage the concrete.
Now dip the brush in the solution and scrub the affected concrete well with it. Let the solution sit on the stone for around 25-minutes before you scrub it again. Do it a few times before cleaning the area with warm water.
If you are working outside the house, using a hose is a good idea to help you get the job done considerably fast. Keep repeating the process until the paint ultimately comes off the surface. And to give it the final polish, wipe it with a paper towel or a piece of dry cloth.
Pros and Cons
There’s hardly any doubt that using TSP is one of the ideal ways to remove color stains from concrete or other surfaces effectively. And the best part is that it is readily available in the market, comparatively cheap, and does not require the skills of a scientist to dilute it and apply. If you want to find a shortcut, there are even no-rinse TSP options available, and you can give them a try!
However, TSP suffers from one significant downside: it is a toxic solution. So, it is mandatory that you take utmost precautions when using it.
Some local governments have banned the use of TSP completely, and some have restricted the extent of use. It is a good idea to check the regulations to make sure you are breaking no laws.
Considerations:
Homeowners will unanimously agree that TSP is a great agent and acts as one of the most effective cleaners and paint removers. And it is equally excellent when it comes to dealing with old paint stains.
But you should not forget that the chemical included in it is highly toxic, and thus you should handle it accordingly. It can cause severe damage to the environment through surface runoffs. So, we suggest that you give alternatives like borax powder a try. It is not as strong as TSP, though.
Moreover, we recommend that you not use TSP on windy days if applying outdoors. The wind may carry the product to the nearby trees and plants and cause irreversible damage to them. You should try to confine the product to the affected area as much as possible.
Moving on, TSP has a strong odor and can damage your lungs if inhaled directly. To avoid such problems, always put on your respirator mask before commencing with the work.
One added tip, TSP, and pressure washer make a powerful combination in getting rid of paint stains. And that takes us to the following method we have on our list.
A pressure washer or a power washer is a piece of equipment that sprays a concentrated, fast squirt of water. This is a great way to remove stains and substances from various surfaces. And it works very effectively when it comes to getting rid of spray paint from concrete.
What You’ll Need
For this, you have to do some basic research to figure out whether you should buy an electric or a gas power washer. Apart from that, you will require big plastic sheets and waterproof clothes. And last but not least, do not forget to get yourself some protective gear.
How To Do It
The first thing you have to do without fail is to put the gears on to protect yourself from unwanted harm. After that, please read the instructions on the washer label carefully and assemble it.
Make sure that you choose the desired nozzle depending on the stain size. Now stand 10 feet away from the area and point the jet straight at the stain. Keep changing the spraying angle and apply it back and forth on the concrete. Repeat the process until the paint is entirely removed.
Pros and Cons
This method is ideal for users who want to remove paint stains from large concrete pieces. Because you do not have to do it manually, it saves time and effort too. And if you end up combining it with TSP or a graffiti remover, you will see the results even faster.
Additionally, they help you save water. By replacing the garden hose with a pressure washer, you can save 80 percent extra water.
However, if you are on a tight budget, this might not be the perfect option for you. Power washers are expensive devices, and you need to either invest in buying them or renting one. And it will take you some practice to understand how to operate it best.
Considerations:
Pressure washers generally come with a set of nozzles that are color-coded to indicate the force of the water stream. If you are using it to remove paint, go with size 15. It is ideal for getting rid of color stains. However, if the paint is too stubborn, you can start with size 40 and slowly notch it down.
When opting for a device, make sure that its capacity ranges between 2,000 to 3,000 psi. The gas and electric variants come with varied capacities, and you must choose one that offers the right amount of power needed for paint removal.
Before you start working with it, make sure that the water flow is good. If it is not, then the sprayer won’t have the adequate power to remove the spray paint off the concrete.
Additionally, take your time and do not rush when you are working with power washers. And ensure that you do not stand too close to the affected area and keep a minimum distance of 10 feet. You can, however, gradually move closer to get the best results.
Also, it is important that you keep in mind that this is a powerful tool that releases strong water jets. Protecting yourself with gears and having a solid grip on the sprayer at all times is an absolute must. If you are not careful, the water jet can slice through your skin.
When you are using it, the best thing to do is keep the pets and kids away to ensure their safety. We always recommend that you take some training before you start using a pressure washer. And with so many tutorial videos available on the internet, it is hardly a task anymore.
To make use of this process, you need to acquire some skills first. If you have not used a sandblaster before, you’ll surely need some training. It has the capacity to remove concrete layers, so you understand that knowing the proper techniques is essential.
In case it is not done correctly, it might damage the concrete permanently.
What You’ll Need
For this purpose, you will need a sandblaster, ideally a portable one with a power of 50 psi. Apart from that, what is required is sandblasting media such as coarse sandblasting sand.
Once you have gathered these things, get hold of a dry-wet vacuum (suitable for indoor/ outdoor activity) or a power washer (outdoor purposes). And most importantly, do not forget your protective gear.
How To Do It
First and foremost, check if the protective gears are adequately secured to ensure that your skin and respiratory system encounter no harm. Now place yourself 1 foot far from the area that is affected and switch on the sandblaster.
Once you turn it on, adjust the nozzle and use it back and forth to target the affected area. Keep doing this until the paint starts coming off. After that, use the vacuum cleaner to clean the concrete dust left behind after you are done.
If you are cleaning a concrete slab outdoors, you can even use a power washer to clean the area.
Pros and Cons
What we like most about this product is that it is effective and does not consume much time. If you are familiar with using a sandblaster, it will be a cakewalk.
However, we must warn you that it is a pretty expensive process. You will either need to buy the equipment or rent one, depending on your convenience. And it also generates a lot of dust and requires heavy vacuuming, adding to a lot of extra work. Getting a suitable vacuum further adds to the expenses.
Additionally, keep in mind that this method is only suitable for people with advanced technical skills. If you have never used a sandblaster before, we recommend that you take training courses first.
Considerations:
As we have already mentioned, this equipment generates a lot of concrete dust. It is because it uses compressed air mixed with coarse sand to get rid of the topmost layer of the stained concrete.
So, it goes without saying that you have to ensure that you are well-protected not to encounter any harm from the powerful sandblaster. Nobody wants to get their skin pelted with sand particles or get coarse dust in their eyes. We recommend that you protect your entire body before starting with the work.
Also, we have noticed that it is best not to point it at a particular area for too long when using this device. You will get the best results when you keep moving the tool instead of focusing it on a point. If you do that, the chances are that the top layer of the concrete will suffer extreme damage.
Moreover, if you have no prior experience using this device, it is best to hire a professional who would get the job done with precision. You need proper knowledge about grit and air pressure to get the best result. In case you are not sure how it works, getting someone to help you is the best bet!
We have reached the end of our list, and there was no way we would have skipped out on this method. Angle grinders are one of the most effective methods to get spray paints removed from concrete surfaces.
It is pretty similar to a sander and allows you to attach various grit wheels in order to handle different projects. Again, we would say that you should skip this method unless you have prior experience of using this machine.
If not done correctly, the chances are that it will drastically alter the concrete surface structure. And if lady luck is not on your side, the damages might be permanent too.
What You’ll Need
For this purpose, you will require a good-quality angle grinder that comes with a shroud and a paint stripping wheel. Apart from that, you will need a vacuum cleaner or a pressure washer. And do not forget to get your hands on some protective gear while you are at it.
How To Do It
To begin, you need to ensure that the area is completely clean and devoid of dust or grime. Once you are done with wiping the place clean, put on your protective gears before proceeding further.
Move yourself a few feet away from the area that has the paint stain and switch the device on. Slowly move towards the spot and switch on the grinder. As you reach closer, press it lightly on the affected area and move it in a circular clockwise motion.
We recommend that you keep repeating the process until the stain comes off ultimately. Once it does, use the vacuum cleaner or the power washer to clean it.
Pros and Cons
For those familiar with using an angle grinder, removing paint stains will be a cakewalk. It is one of the quickest and most straightforward solutions for getting rid of stubborn spray paint stains from concrete. And as this method involves grinding color off the concrete surface, there’s no need for harsh chemicals.
However, a significant downside to this process is that it involves the use of heavy-duty equipment and thus calls for suitable protective gears. Now, these gears can drive a hole in your pockets as they are expensive.
Additionally, it requires advanced DIY skills to make use of this method. If not done correctly, you may end up causing permanent damage to the concrete. And once you are done, you will be left with a heap load of concrete dust, cleaning which is pretty labor-intensive.
Considerations:
Grinding and sandblasting are quite similar when it comes to generating dust. And for that reason, wearing a respirator for protecting your mouth and nose is an absolute must. We suggest that you also put on a well-fitted eye protector to avoid the dust from entering your eyes.
It is also a good idea to put on some heavy-duty gloves or padded clothing to prevent your hands from getting hurt. To reduce dust, there’s one good solution. You can attach a shroud with the grinder, which basically works as an in-built vacuum taking off the concrete dust.
Also, as we have mentioned before, grinding and sandblasting are pretty similar. So, it is best to not concentrate the equipment on a particular area for too long. Keep moving the tool in a circular clockwise motion.
And you have to either buy or rent a machine before you can start with the process. If purchasing one exceeds your budget, it is great to hire a professional who can help you with the task.
Moreover, it is good to keep a vacuum handy to ease your cleaning job once you remove the paint stain!
Things To Know
The processes will work the best only when you understand what you are getting into. You have to know the workings of the paints and the structure of the concrete.
Remember that concrete is highly absorbent because it is porous, so spray paints stain easily by reaching the deeper pockets of the stone. We recommend that you address the stain problem as soon as it happens to stop the color from entering deep into the layers.
That would just make it more challenging to get rid of the stain!
But while you are at it, do not forget to take care of the concrete. If you are not cautious, the paint-removing solutions might have a detrimental impact on the stone.
Make sure that you do not leave any chemical solution on the concrete for too long. Use a soap and water mix to wipe it off. Otherwise, it will start eating away at the concrete. Toxic chemicals that have the power to dissolve the paint can easily cause permanent damage to the stone.
And note that something that can dissolve concrete can easily affect your health too. While working with them, make sure that you do not come in direct contact with the chemicals and do not make the mistake of inhaling them.
Final Words
And that’s all we have for you today, friends.
We had great fun compiling all this information for you. And we hope that you could learn a good deal about removing spray paints from concrete surfaces from reading this comprehensive guide.
All these processes that we have mentioned are relatively simple to perform and will help you effectively get rid of the stains. However, some of them require some expert-level skills, nothing that a training course wouldn’t equip you with.
With that, it’s a wrap. Keep a watch on this space for more exciting reads. And write to us in the comments section below if you have any queries.
To be honest, leather is one of the most high-maintenance materials that you may have in your closet or around the house.
Be it your favorite leather jacket or a new pair of suede shoes, you always need to keep an eye on them to prevent damage. That's especially true for instances where you may accidentally spill something like glue on leather. This mostly happens when people try to fix leather items or glue leather to something like a shoe.
Worry not, as removing glue from leather isn’t as hard as it seems. In fact, the easiest way to remove glue from leather is by gently cleaning the hardened glue stain with a cotton soaked in acetone-based nail polish remover. Most of the time, good quality leather glue comes out very easily rather than other adhesives.
But there are other methods to get the job done as well. So, we thought of coming up with this guide to make removing glue from leather a tad easier for you. Glue spills might happen whether you are repairing your leather couch or fixing your leather car seat tear, so we’ve listed all the possible ways to remove glue from leather.
Without further ado, let's get started with how to remove glue from leather!
Simple Methods To Remove Glue From Leather
As we said already, cleaning glue from leather is easier than it seems. You only require some household items to remove something like super glue without damaging the leather. We have tried to mention some of the most simple ways used by leather enthusiasts. Just make sure to be gentle to the leather, particularly with suede items, to give them a long life.
1. Using Acetone-Based Nail Polish Remover
One of the easiest ways to remove super glue from leather is by using an acetone-based nail polish remover readily available on the market. Just be sure to test it on a less visible area of the leather to avoid the possibility of discoloration.
Let the super glue harden to form a stain
Saturate a cotton swab or cotton pad with the nail polish remover and rub it on the glue stain till it loosens
Once the stain has loosened, gently dab it using a folded dry paper towel or tissue to remove the glue
Soak a sponge in a mixture of warm water and mild soap to wipe the area where the glue stain had been sitting
You may apply a bit of leather conditioner to prevent the surface from becoming dry or brittle
Observe the leather surface after the water has evaporated to ensure that there's no glue residue
Repeat the process until the leather is free from all traces of glue
2. Using Sandpaper And Emery Board
At times, it can be pretty hard to get the glue off leather if the super glue stains are too thick or rigid. In that case, you may need something abrasive like sandpaper to wear away the super glue. This method is beneficial for suede as it tends to hold on to glue more than other leather surfaces.
Use a fine sandpaper or emery board to file away the hardened super glue from the leather gently
Removal of the stain may take a while, so try not to use a technique that might be damaging
Stop filing once you reach the bare leather surface
Vacuum or brush away the glue dust resulting from the glue removal
Check if any further glue is left on the leather
Use the acetone-based nail polish removal process to dilute and take off the remnant glue
You can wipe the surface with a leather cleaner to preserve its health and look as a final step
3. Using Soapy Water
Have you just spilled some super glue on your leather couch? Don't panic; take a soft cloth or sponge and a bowl of warm water mixed with dish soap to remove glue from the leather item. This technique specifically works for minor, fresh glue stains. You can also use the soapy water method with other glue removal techniques to clear away the final traces of dried glue from leather.
Pour some dish soap into a bowl of warm water and agitate the mixture until it lathers
Dip a soft clean cloth into the soapy mixture and lay it over the affected area
Let the soaked cloth sit on the leather furniture or other leather items for at least an hour so that the glue can loosen up
After an hour, carefully use a circular motion to remove the adhesive
Next, rinse the soft cloth with warm water to wipe away any glue residue present on the leather surface
Then, use a dry cloth to remove excess moisture from the leather
Finish off by applying a small amount of leather conditioner to the location once it's dry to keep it nourished
4. Using White Vinegar
Another recommended method to remove glue from leather is using white vinegar, which is usually present in our kitchens. You can use a toothbrush with vinegar to gently wear away the strong adhesive from most leather surfaces, including leather shoes.
Make a mixture of one part white vinegar and one part warm water in a bowl
Dip a soft-bristled toothbrush into the mixture and gently scrub the glue spot in a circular motion
Use a clean fabric to dab the excess moisture and wipe away the glue residue
Check for any leftover glue and repeat the process if necessary
Once the surface is dry, use a leather conditioner to make it shiny and prevent cracking
5. Using Lemon Oil
It may come as a surprise, but lemon oil works as an excellent super glue remover. The essential oil doesn't cause any discoloration, so you can safely use it on suede leather shoes or your leather wearables. Plus, the oil leaves your leather items with a refreshing scent.
Take a bit of lemon oil on a cotton ball and place it at the location of the glue stain
Let the cotton ball sit for five to ten minutes for the glue to loosen
Then, you may use the edge of a nail file to lift the glue from the leather surface
If the adhesive is too stubborn, reapply a bit more lemon oil and leave it on the stain for five more minutes
Once all the glue has been removed, dip a towel in warm soapy water and clean the leather surface to remove glue and oil residue
Finally, use a dry towel to absorb any moisture and apply some fabric conditioner to protect the leather from drying or cracking
How To Remove Glue From Leather Final Words
That's everything we had to tell you about how to remove glue from leather. We hope that this guide will help you to retain the health of your leather items even if it accidentally gets in touch with super glue.
Other than the above-mentioned methods, some chemical-based super glue removers are available on the market. But, you have to be careful while using them as some can damage and discolor leather products.
Having said that, at times, you may find it extremely difficult to remove glue from leather. We suggest seeking help from a professional leather cleaning service in such situations.
Until next time, goodbye, and take care!
You can remove the wheel from your angle grinder by hand or using simple tools like a hammer and chisel. But you must be very careful to ensure there are no injuries or damages caused to the angle grinder.
So, you want to change the wheel of your angle grinder, but have lost the key or wrench to unlock the blade? Or, have you misplaced the factory spanner that came in the package. We get it- it can be downright frustrating to lose things when you need them the most!
But did you know that it’s actually possible to remove the wheel even when you don’t have the right tool handy? Yes- you heard that right! Dive in to know how to remove the angle grinder disc without a tool.
What Are Angle Grinders?
For people who may be new angle grinders, let us just quickly introduce them.
These are essentially handheld power tools that use rotating angle grinder discs or wheels for cutting, grinding, polishing, or deburring metal, concrete, porcelain, and other materials.
You will usually find two types of angle grinders- one that needs to be bolted down so it won't move while being used; and the portable cordless models. The cordless angle grinder is one of the most convenient tools as it can be used anywhere. But both cordless and corded angle grinder come with a locking nut to ensure the wheel doesn’t get displaced.
Furthermore, an angle grinder has a housing around its motor shaft with openings for different accessories such as an angle grinder disk and cut-off wheels, as well as a guard over these openings to protect users from injury caused by sparks flying off during operation.
Why Use An Angle Grinder?
As mentioned above, an angle grinder is a powerful hand tool that can be used to cut, shape, and polish metal. The high-speed rotary action of the grinder nut makes it ideal for completing many tasks including removing rust from tools or household items like the fridge door handle.
In hindsight, the efficiency of the grinder depends largely on the type of blade being used. For instance, a diamond-tipped blade may be more suitable for cutting tiles. Likewise, a serrated blade may be a better choice for making curved cuts.
Is An Angle Grinder The Same As A Polisher?
You can attach a polishing pad to the grinder and use it at a low speed in case a polisher isn’t available. However, you must not confuse an angle grinder with a polisher.
Now, some readers may be asking “what’s the difference between an angle grinder and a polisher?” Well, the grinding process of an angle grinder is used to reduce the thickness of the material without damaging it. Polishing, on the other hand, is about smoothing the surface.
Remember that a grinder may be used as a polisher, but it doesn’t happen the other way round.
Another thing to keep in mind is that you may use the tool without its guard in some circumstances, such as when you are grinding down metal on a workbench. However, this is a dangerous practice and should only be done if necessary.
To ensure safety, always check that the guards are in place before using the grinder. If any guard is broken, refrain from using the tool until it is replaced with one that fits properly and is securely in place.
On that note, you can replace a damaged or missing guard by first unplugging the tool. Then, remove any existing guards by loosening them with an Allen wrench (the type of wrench that has handles on either side).
Finally, replace the damaged or missing guards with new ones by sliding them into place and tightening them down firmly so they stay secure during operation.
Steps To Remove Angle Grinder Wheel Without A Tool
Step 1- Unplug the Power Cord From The Power Outlet
First and foremost, always unplug the power cord of the angle grinder from the wall outlet. This step should be followed whenever you’re replacing parts or cleaning it.
Step-2 Remove The Locking Nut
As you may have already figured out, the lock nut holds the disc in place and needs to be taken off so that you can replace it. It has a lock button located on the disc guard, which sits between the body of the angle grinder and the wheel.
However, if this button gets stuck, then you will have to do it manually. And there are a few ways to do so.
Option 1
Firstly, grab two bolts that exactly fit the two holes of the locking nut. However, make sure you lock the position of the wheel by pressing on the lock button located behind it (on the top of the grinder body). You need to keep the button pressed to prevent the wheel from coming off. So, it may be a good idea to call someone for help.
Next, use a pair of pliers to get a grip on the bolts and start rotating them counterclockwise. You can also use an adjustable wrench for this step, depending on what you have handly. Or, secure a pair of vice grips around the bolts and rotate them in the opposite (counterclockwise) direction.
Option 2
If you don’t have the above-mentioned tools handy, then you can try removing the locking nut with the hammer and chisel method.
Insert the chisel with an angle into one of the holes of locking the nut, one by one. Then, tap it with the hammer so that the chisel rotates to mimic the action of a wrench. Do it on the other side if required.
This method has a high chance of damaging the wheel and the nut holes, so ensure you don’t apply too much pressure.
Option 3
If nothing else is available, put on a pair of work gloves and hit the disc with your palm in a direction opposite to the wheel’s rotation. Again, be very careful while using this procedure as you may injure yourself and damage the disc.
A pro tip: you can pour a few drops of oil on the locking nut to help loosen it easily. However, don’t put too much; otherwise, you won’t be able to grip it properly.
Alternatively, you can try turning it in the same direction (clockwise) some more, which may help create some pressure. But don’t tighten it too much, as it may mess the alignment of the nut. Then, rotate it in the opposite direction.
Option 4
Another option to remove the nut without any tool (or your gloved hands) is to use a long iron rod that comfortably fits the locking nut hole. Once you do that, hit the top of the rod with a hammer or your palm until it starts moving the nut in the opposite direction.
If this doesn’t work, use two iron rods and insert them in the locking nut holes. Tie them with a rope and hit the “tied top” the same way. This should do the job.
Step-3 Press And Hold The Spindle Lock Button
If your angle grinder has a standard spindle lock button or a spindle shaft, simply press and hold the lock button located in its center. This will allow you to rotate the drive bolt of the disc in the opposite direction of its rotation, which will loosen it from its socket without damaging the retaining nut.
How To Replace The Wheel?
Once the angle grinder nut comes off, you can easily remove the wheel and insert a new one according to the needs of the project.
In older angle grinders, the wheel may become too stuck to be removed, so you may have to break them completely. Do this carefully as you wouldn’t want to damage any other parts on the tool.
After inserting the wheel in the drive bolt, rotate the locking nut in the opposite direction (i.e. clockwise this time). You can do this with your hands, as tightening the lock is easier than removing it. Continue doing this until the wheel is firmly in place.
If you have trouble doing this, start by turning it slightly counterclockwise until you can get some leverage before continuing clockwise.
When Should You Change The Grinder Wheel?
“Obviously, when the current wheel doesn’t meet the needs of the task at hand,” is what you may think is the answer to this question. However, let us tell you that it’s not the only time when changing the wheel should be your priority.
Your angle grinder may give you subtle signals about the “expiry” of the wheel, so look out for:
A sudden drop in the cutting speed
Unusual noises when the tool is switched on or while working with it
Strong vibrations with squeaky noises
Some Other Tips
To use your grinder safely, we’d recommend using both hands, which will facilitate better control and precision. However, do not keep your hands or fingers anywhere near the disc, as it can lead to disastrous consequences. And don’t operate the grinder without wearing gloves.
Aside from that, you should pay attention to the maintenance needs of the grinder.
One of the first and most important things to do in this regard is keeping it clean by removing any dust or debris.
Ideally, you should wipe it thoroughly with a clean cloth or use a soft bristle brush to eliminate dust after every use. Give the tool some time to cool down after being switched off, and don’t touch the wheel with bare hands.
Furthermore, you should keep the tool properly greased to reduce the chances of friction, making it perform optimally. And run a visual check to detect any cracks or loose guards before working with it.
How To Remove Angle Grinder Wheel Without Tool Conclusion
With that, we hope we’re leaving you well equipped to change the wheel of your angle grinder the DIY way.
But here’s one piece of advice. If you aren’t confident about your DIY skills or you think breaking the wheel can damage the rest of the tool, contact the brand. If the device is covered under the brand warranty, getting it serviced will be hassle-free.
And while attempting the job on your own, make sure you wear the required protective gear to prevent the risk of injuries. This includes putting on work gloves and an eye protector.
If the swimming pool was a living organism, the pool pump would be its heart. A pool pump needs to function properly for the water in the swimming pool to remain clean and safe.
While many of the pool pumps that are available today self-prime, which means they can generate water flow after turning on automatically, some pumps require manual priming before they can be turned on.
Therein lies the rub. In manual pool pumps air tends to enter the piping of the pool. Whenever that happens, the pool pump is said to “lose prime.”
How to Prime a Pool Pump
Importance of Keeping the Pump Fully Primed
The pump of the swimming pool is going to dictate its entire function. Needless to say, the learning system of the swimming pool is not able to operate at an optimal level if the main pump isn’t functioning properly.
Apart from that, without the main pump, the pool water is unable to get filtered, which can result in unclean and dangerously unhealthy water in the swimming pool. This is why it is important to ensure that the pool pump is functioning efficiently and has been primed properly.
When the pump of the pool’s filtration system has been properly primed, all of the components of the filtration system such as the piping, filter and the pump itself are filled with water. The pool pump is then able to suck the water from the pool, which is then pushed back into the pool via the pool returns.
To prime a pool pump, one needs to first purge all of the air from the pool’s pumping system before filling both the piping and the pump with water.
The number of steps that are required to prime a pump is mainly going to depend on the amount of water that’s needed in the suction side of the lines, as in, the water that’s entering from the pool to the pumping system.
Priming the Pool Pump
When it comes to swimming pools, the word ‘prime’ means the state where all of the air has been removed from the water filtration pump of the swimming pool, which allows the pump to circulate water through the pool’s filtration system. When a swimming pool’s pump is no longer able to pump water, it is said to lose its “prime.”
The following procedure of priming a swimming pool water filter pump assumes that there’s no water at all present in the pump or the pipes at the time. So, let’s get started.
Switch Off the Swimming Pool Pump
This might seem like the obvious first step that needs to be taken to prime a pool pump, but you’d be surprised how many people make the mistake of skipping this process, which results in unnecessary expense to repair the damage.
The reason you have to turn off the swimming pool filtration pump is that the pump is an electrical system, which is why you need to maintain safety at all times. Besides, you wouldn’t do any other electric repairing work without turning off the switch first, would you?
So, now we have cleared why you need to exercise caution when it comes time to prime the swimming pool filtration pump, here are the steps you will need to take during the process.
STEP 1 –After you’ve switched off the pump you will need to close all of the valves that are located on the suction side of the filtration pump. This is also going to include the valves for the vacuum lines, the skimmer, and the main drain.
STEP 2 –If your swimming pool filtration pump already has an air relief valve built into it you will need to open it to release any pressure that has built up in the pump and the piping system.
STEP 3 –Open the strainer lid of the filtration pump. Be careful to do this slowly.
STEP 4 –If the swimming pool filtration pump does not have an air relief valve then you will have to open up the lid of the strainer just a little bit to release any built-up pressure.
Inspection/Replacement of Broke or Damaged Parts
STEP 1 –First you will have to inspect the hair strainer basket and make sure it is clean. Also, make sure that the basket is not damaged in any way. If the basket does look damaged, then inspect the impeller of the pump for any debris. To avoid damaging the pump its best to replace the basket.
STEP 2 –After that, you will need to thoroughly inspect the gasket or the O-ring of the strainer top to make sure that it’s clean and not damaged. This is so it can maintain its seal, which is crucial for the efficient functioning of the pool pump.
STEP 3 – If necessary, use this opportunity to replace the basket and fill up the strainer with water with the help of a garden hose. When filling the basket with water, it is important to do it slowly to ensure that the water can reach the piping. What you want is the piping that goes from the skimmer into the filtration pump to be filled with water so that it can create a proper suction.
STEP 4 – Once you have thoroughly inspected the basket and the strainer it is time to put back the lid of the strainer and make sure that it is tightly sealed.
Switch the Pump On
STEP 1 – If there are any knobs, they need to be tightened properly by hand. It is important not to use a wrench or some other tool to tighten these knobs so that it is not overtightened, which can result in the premature damage of the knobs.
STEP 2 –Now you can turn on the pump and then slowly open only one of the valves that are present on the suction side.
STEP 3 – You will need to wait for a good flow of water going to prime the pump.
What If the Pump Does Not Prime?
While the steps mentioned above should be enough to prime a pool pump and get your swimming pool’s filtration pump running again, if you find that the pump does not prime then you should let it sit for a few minutes before trying again.
STEP 1 –Reopen the strainer of the pump to relieve any pressure on the filter. You can also do this by slowly opening the lid of the strainer so that any built-in pressure has a way to escape.
STEP 2 –Now that you’ve bled out any pressure from the system, refill it with water via the strainer and close the lid.
STEP 3 – Now, switch on the swimming pool filtration pump and open the same valve slowly.
STEP 4 – You may have to repeat these steps several times before the pump begins to prime again. It is important to note that you will have to purge all of the built-up air in the system to get the water moving again.
Open the Other Valve
Once you have found that the pump is prime, it is time to open up the other valve that is located on the suction side of the swimming pool filtration system. To do that you must:
STEP 1 – Pay attention by listening closely to the air that’s being pulled out of the line.
STEP 2 – If you notice that the filtration pump is starting to lose its prime you must close the valve immediately.
STEP 3 – Take as much time you need to bleed all of the air out of the lines.
STEP 4 – You will have to repeat the same process with all of the other lines as well.
PRO TIP #1
If you have been noticing that the pump loses its prime whenever you turn off the pump, then you should try to release the air that’s present in the filter first. This is especially the case if there is an air relief valve present in the filter system. It is important to remember that this should be done before the pump has been turned on.
To make sure it works, close the valves that are present on the suction-side of the filtration system before you open the lid of the strainer. This is going to help in holding the water up to the valve, which will make re-priming the pump a lot easier.
PRO TIP #2
It is not unheard of for there to be leaks in the pipe that leads to the filtration pump. To find out if there is, in fact, a leak in the piping that goes into the pump, all you have to do is grab a can of shaving cream and spray it all over the pipe that’s leading into the filtration pump. If you notice that the shaving cream is being sucked into the pipe from a particular area after the pumps’ been turned on, you’re probably dealing with a leakage.
If all else fails, it is never too late to call in an expert who can help find the problem for you. More often than not, repairs in a swimming pool filtration system can only be done by a professional, especially if you can’t seem to find the problem yourself.
How to Prime a Pool Pump Conclusion
The aforementioned information should help you prime a pool pump and get the water flowing through the swimming pool pump and filtration system again.
It is important to note that if you are going to install a new pool system in your home, then there is obviously not going to be any water present in the piping, in which case, you will have to use some of these steps either once or several times to prime the pool pump before it can be turned on.
Has the fear of dripping paint over your carpet stopped you from painting trims? Well, there are ways to paint trims, even with carpets installed.
You might be wondering how to paint the trim if you have a new and fluffy carpet installed on the floors. Rest assured, a tidy and leak-proof paint job is possible for all types of flooring!
Painting the trim or baseboard completes the fresh and finished look of the room. And usually, with wooden flooring, painting is relatively easy. But with carpet flooring, it becomes a little more complicated.
Although it might not be the easiest thing to do, it's possible. Don't let the carpet get in the way of your trim painting process. Just put on your DIY hat and follow this guide.
These steps will help you navigate even in the trickiest of carpet situations, so read on!
What You Need to Know Before Painting Trims
There are a few basic things to consider before we get into the stepwise process of painting. You need to know the type of trim and carpet on the floor, which painting method to follow, and the supplies required. Let's get into the details of each aspect.
Type Of Trim And Carpet
It's essential to know and understand the space you are working with when you are painting trims. Consider the type of flooring; which type of carpet is it?
If the carpet is thin with short threads, processes like taping it will make the job easier. If it is a very fluffy carpet, the regular tape might not be enough to cover the edges. In that case, alternative options like thicker tape or tapes with low adhesive strength will be required.
The kind of paint used will differ according to the trim material. Most trims are made of wood, but trims/baseboards can also be made of other materials such as PVC. So, the kind of paint applied will also differ.
Method Of Painting
Some methods involve removing the trim or baseboards entirely and then painting them. Then, they are dried and reattached to the walls. It sounds like a tedious job that will take days to complete.
Another option is to lift the carpet, finish painting, and then put it back in place. Again, removing the embedded carpet consists of a lot of manual work. Also, if you have just installed a new carpet, you might not want to remove it just for painting trims.
Yet others prefer the skill of freehand painting. This method is acceptable if you are a seasoned and confident painter. However, for most people, the taping method may be ideal. A painter’s tape is stuck on the trim, after which it is painted. We will discuss the method in this guide.
Supplies Required
DIY painters cannot beautify trims without the necessary equipment. Here is a list of things you will need -
So, are you wondering how to paint the trims flawlessly without damaging your carpet? Don’t worry; take a look at these steps that may help prevent it.
Clean The Area
First of all, clean the area thoroughly before picking up your paintbrushes. Make sure you scrub the dirt and dust away with a microfiber cloth or sandpaper. Removing tough stains and grime is essential for the fresh coat of paint to spread evenly on the trim.
If there are any loose bits of old paint or an uneven surface, it can be leveled and smoothened with a few scrubs. Don't leave dust, old pieces of color, and wood chippings on the carpet. Vacuum carefully to clean it up before moving to the next step.
Caulk The Trim
Caulking the trim is not essential, but it will give an even and polished finish. Molding caulk also fills up the uneven surface and seals the cracks and gaps in the wall and trim. It helps paint to spread quickly without creating any displeasing bumps and fissures.
In general, it works well on wooden trims. But there shouldn't be any problem, even if your baseboard is made of PVC. Apply the caulk with your finger throughout the surface of the trim and wipe it out with a clean cloth. You can also use a wet sponge to apply it and wipe off the excess caulk.
Select A Brush
There are a couple of options for painting trims, the most common being a regular nylon paintbrush. Bristle brushes, foam brushes, roller pads, and roller brushes are also commonly used. Some people prefer foam brushes since they are easy for beginners to use, but this is entirely a personal preference.
If you have no prior experience with painting, a bristle brush might be challenging to operate. The fibers might cause uneven lines across the trim and end up looking unpleasant. In such cases, it is recommended to use a smaller size brush or a foam roller - because a bulky brush isn't for everyone. A 2 to 3-inch wide brush is good enough for painting trims.
Paint The Trim Near Carpet In 3 Steps
Let's begin with the three-step guide on how to paint trims near the carpet area.
Step 1: Tape The Area and Carpet
Firstly, make sure to select a painter's tape which leaves no residue on the carpet. It's important to use tape that protects your carpet from paint and does not damage it when you peel it off. A masking tape or painter's duct tape should be fine for protecting the edges of the trim and the flooring.
If you want to avoid a sticky mess, use small pieces of tape. Create sections of the area or wall to trim and apply the painter's duct tape in 3 or 4-inch sections. Then, lay the painter's tape firmly on the floor, flat at the edge.
A small portion of the tape should be on the trim, and the remaining should be on the carpet. At this point, check if the tape is completely covering the carpet at the edge near the trim.
Now use a putty knife or butter knife to push the edge of the tape into the carpet. The bottom of the trim can be exposed but make sure the edges of the carpet are entirely covered with the tape.
If you are worried about spilling beyond the tape, place an old cloth beneath the area you are about to paint. This will catch any stray drops and splashes while you are painting.
Step 2: Correctly Dipping The Brush
Once that is done, make sure to prime the trim before painting, as any previously used paint might have some oily residue. If not removed, the new paint color will not stick easily to the surface.
Ideally, select a primer that will easily stick on oil paint. There are paints specifically designed for trim painting. If you choose this option, keep in mind that they can be more expensive than regular paint.
Firstly, dip the brush in paint and wipe off one side of the excess paint. This is a pretty important step when it comes to painting as you should try and avoid having excess paint on your brush. It is likely to drop all over the trim and even beyond the tape, which you have carefully placed.
So, ensure that you must wipe the brush and remove any excess paint before you move toward the surface of the trim. Be careful not to soak the roller sponge or brush excessively in paint, or else it will drip all over your carpet.
Step 3: Paint
Now apply paint to the trim using smooth brush strokes. Move your brush from left to right (or right to left) in one stroke instead of many tiny strokes. This uninterrupted stroke will give a smoother finish to the surface.
After a few strokes, you may better understand how much paint you should pick up on the brush to get good coverage without spilling. A quick tip - before painting the entire trim, create an outline that separates it from the wall for better control while painting.
By doing this, you are ensuring that there is no leakage of paint above the trim. Once the outline is made, paint the entire base of the trim. One section can be covered using two or three even strokes.
Again keep a rag close in case there is a splatter of paint. Ensure that you wait until the first coat is dry before applying the second or even third coat. If you're wondering how many coats of paint are required on the trim - usually two or three coats should be good enough to get a neat finish.
Care After Painting
Once the paint is dry, pull off the tape. Moreover, check that fresh paint is not peeled off in the process. Also, ensure that there is no leakage of color (which is possible if the paint is still wet.)
If you want to make sure that there is no paint leakage, wait for the paint to dry overnight or for two days before removing the painter's duct tape. Once the paint is dry, remove the duct tape and clean it with a clean brush if there is any dried residue.
Conclusion
That was our detailed DIY guide on how to paint trims if you have carpets on the floors. Following these steps will indeed get you fresh trims with unspoiled carpets in a matter of hours.
With the method mentioned here, it should take 2 to 4 hours to paint, depending on the size of the room. And what's more, there is no need to spend hundreds of dollars on hiring a professional to paint the trims of your house.
The type of carpet won’t be an issue anymore to neglect painting the trims in your house! So, when are you picking up that paintbrush to freshen those trims?
Paris is a city renowned for its beauty and charm, and one of the most iconic landmarks that capture its essence is Le Consulat café.
The quaint establishment, located in the charming neighborhood of Montmartre, has been popular among artists, writers, and intellectuals for over a century. Want to grab breakfast with friends? Head over to Le Consulat. Looking for a subject for your next art project? Grab a seat outside the café and recreate the Parisian gem on paper!
It’s adorned with vibrant red and green hues, the color combo that screams “Pa-ree!” As such, capturing the beauty of Le Consulat in watercolor will surely be a rewarding process, even for beginners. With the right materials and techniques, you can create a stunning painting that pays homage to this iconic café and the city of Paris itself.
So, without further ado, let’s get started…
Painting Paris Le Consulat In Watercolor
The right tools can make all the difference when it comes to creating a successful work of art. So, I suggest using a comfortable paintbrush that offers durability and versatility. You should also consider investing in good-quality watercolor paints that offer a consistent texture and high pigmentation, you can read more about the types of watercolor paints here.
That said, here’s what I’ll be using for painting the legendary café:
Paint: Kuretake Gansai Tambi Watercolors 12 color | Paper: Saunders Waterford Watercolor Paper - White, 300gsm | Brush: Raphael Kolinsky Sable Fine Point Round Brush 8404
First off, sketch a basic outline of the Le Consulat building on your paper. Although I’m using watercolor paper, you can use your sketchbook or just any paper that’s thick enough to hold watercolors.
As for the pencil, I’m sticking to my “holy grail” - a light-colored pencil! The soft tip of colored pencils helps me create a light sketch, visible enough to act as a guide while I paint. On the contrary, if you use a regular pencil, you may end up with harsh lines, which may be difficult to hide beneath sheer watercolors.
Slowly, I’ll add some details while sketching. I don’t do this often and simply draw a rough sketch. However, considering the various intricate elements of this café, I think it’s best to create a detailed sketch to avoid mistakes while painting.
After all, you wouldn’t want to mess up painting Vincent Van Gogh’s favorite café!
Next, use just a tad bit of yellow mixed with a lot of water for the first layer. Remember to keep it very light and add more color gradually - not all at once.
I’ll use the same consistency for the second and third floors of the café. I recommend leaving out the windows and other details right now and focusing on the walls only.
Perhaps the most iconic part of Le Consulat is its canopy. The vibrant red and green combination makes the tiny café visible from miles away, allowing everyone to flock to its door every morning! I especially like how this bright canopy creates a striking contrast against the neutral color scheme of this house-turned-café.
Once the canopy is painted using vibrant shades of red and green, paint the first layer of the ground floor. Here, I’ll use brown, while keeping it as light as possible.
Once the first layer is dry, proceed to add some details, like windows, plants on the balcony, cracks on the walls, the name board, etc.
Note that I’m only painting according to my memory from the last time I visited Paris and the pictures I managed to click amidst the crowd. But if you’ve been lucky to drop by the café recently, feel free to add new details to the building.
After painting the windows and doors, you can add a second flush of color to the painting. I’ll start with the canopy, as that should be the focal point of the scene. Notice how I’m gradually adding a thicker consistency of paint on each part of the canopy. As I’m adding more reds and greens, the café is slowly coming to life - I can already sniff the freshly prepared crepes!
Let the painting dry completely before making any final touches.
Finally, I’ll add more details and sharpness to the artwork by painting the outlines of the door and windows. Use a small brush, just as I am, to make precise strokes. While I may not remember the intricacies of Parisian architecture very well, simply outlining basic structures can make a world of difference.
I’ll further paint the cute little chairs outside the café, which are usually occupied throughout the day. But that didn’t stop me from grabbing a treat whenever I craved something sweet!
And just like that, with a few more details, my rendition of the cozy café at the heart of Montmartre is ready. What do you think?
Besides painting on watercolor paper to be framed and propped up on your wall, I suggest turning it into a postcard and sending it to a friend. Or, you could make a birthday card with this warm and inviting painting of Le Consulat in the front and gift it to someone who loves Paris!
For a more personalized touch, consider writing a message explaining why you chose the painting or what it means to you. Regardless, I guarantee any art enthusiast or travel junkie will appreciate such a thoughtful gift.
Other than that, you can experiment with the composition - maybe paint the sky or add more trees surrounding the café. Your imagination is the limit!
So, take your time and experiment with different colors and techniques to create your unique masterpiece.
Watercolor is a unique medium that allows seamless blending for stunning effects on paper. And with an iconic subject like Le Consulat, you can express your creativity in capturing the beautiful heritage of Paris.
With this step-by-step guide, I’m sure you’ll be able to create a painting that showcases your artistic skills. And if you’re a beginner, I hope this article inspires you to try your hand at watercolor painting and explore your creative side.
Just remember to take your time and enjoy the relaxing and rewarding process, and if you enjoy this one do cast a glance over our next tutorials on How to Paint Berlin with Watercolor and How to Paint Trees with Watercolor, they're both beginner-friendly watercolor tutorials that you'll surely enjoy!
Happy painting!
Painting has been for a long time an incredible expression of the most inner feelings, a personalized display of the multiple ways we can perceive the world surrounding us through our eyes, with multiple deductible and traceable overall lines and topics present at the same time all over the world.
Techniques and basic materials have evolved over time, offering us endless possibilities to allow our creativity to run free and voice about our personalities and taste but the basic principles set by our ancestors from Greek and Roman times have remained as key rules in creating, transposing and elaborating a sketch or painting and we are talking here about perspective, human body proportions, depth, representation of the static and of movement and so on.
This unique set of rules is applicable indifferently of the basic material, no matter if we are talking aboutcanvas painting ideas or watercolor paintings on special types of paper and of the chosen technique-oil, acrylic, textile, watercolor or glass painting.
Today we are going to focus our attention to the first basic steps one must take in learning how to paint glass.
By Designer : Richard Morris Hunt (1827-1895)maker : Eugène Stanislas Oudinot (1827-1889) - Self-photographed / PierreSelim, CC0
"Colored glass has been produced since ancient times. Both the Egyptians and the Romans excelled at the manufacture of small colored glass objects. Phoenicia was important in glass manufacture with its chief centres Sidon, Tyre and Antioch. The British Museum holds two of the finest Roman pieces, the Lycurgus Cup, which is a murky mustard color but glows purple-red to transmitted light, and the Portland vase which is midnight blue, with a carved white overlay. In early Christian churches of the 4th and 5th centuries, there are many remaining windows which are filled with ornate patterns of thinly-sliced alabaster set into wooden frames, giving a stained-glass like effect.Evidence of stained glass windows in churches and monasteries in Britain can be found as early as the 7th century. The earliest known reference dates from 675 AD when Benedict Biscop imported workmen from France to glaze the windows of the monastery of St Peter which he was building at Monkwearmouth. Hundreds of pieces of colored glass and lead, dating back to the late 7th century, have been discovered here and at Jarrow." [Wikipedia]
The South Transept windows from Chartres Cathedral By Ludwig Schneider - Own work, CC BY-SA 3.0
Even though this beautiful technique has had its significant origin in the stained glass of churches and monasteries, nowadays many contemporary artists dedicate their passion to expressing creativity on glass in impressive manners.But we know for a fact that you do not have to be a professional to learn some basic tricks and tips and start painting your own designs at home as a wonderful method of relaxing and exploiting one's latent creativity.You can apply a set of principles and steps to any chosen glass item you wish to transform and embellish. Learn how to paint wine glasses, how to paint glass bottles and how to use spray paint for efficient fast results.
Tips and tricks on how to paint glass
What type of paint should i choose?
This is the first question one should ask himself before starting a diy glass painting project, because the paint type will determine the possibilities you could have in designing an item and actually being able to achieve exactly what you were looking for without struggling too much. from what we have found, glass paints can be divided under 5 big categories based on their consistency, inner structure and finished appeal.
Acrylic enamel paint or enamel paint designed for glass and other shiny surfaces
Acrylic glass paints
Acrylic paints that require a medium added
Solvent based paints
Special markers
1. Acrylic Enamel Paint
Acrylic enamel paints fall under the "easy to use" category and do not require heat to set. Their composition is based on water which will help the paint to dry and harden rather quickly, offering a very glossy end result. They come in a variety of hues and some types an actually be use don ceramics too, being dishwasher safe after having cured.We recommend the Plaid Folk Art Enamel Beginner Set for the basic tones you will need in the beginning, as it is usable on ceramics, wood, Styrofoam, plaster, terra cotta and tin as well and provide easy cleanup with soap and water.
2. Acrylic Glass Paints
The acrylic glass paints contain a formula specially designed to adhere to plastic, glazed ceramics and glass, with a transparent hue that might come in handy in the case of stained glass projects. Depending on the manufacturer, this type of glass paint can be let to air dry or will require heat setting in the oven. For a professional looking aspect we recommend the Pebeo Vitrea 160 Glossy Glass Paint Set applicable on glass, crystal, porcelain, china, glazed earthenware, terracotta, metal, enameled sheet steel, and copper. This specific glass paint type needs to be set in the oven and according to the bottle instructions, the colors are permanent, microwave safe, UV resistant and have remarkable resistance to dish-washing and to normal detergent.
3. Acrylic Paints That Require a Medium Added
Folk Art 869 2-Ounce Glass and Tile Medium by Plaid Enterprises is a medium used to allow the paint to adhere to the glass surface. This particular product confers the glass a frosty, sandblasted appeal that will allow regular acrylic paints to adhere perfectly to the surface.
4. Solvent Based Paints
Pebeo Vitrail Stained Glass Effect Glass Paint is a solvent based paint that will not require heat to set and will air dry in about 8 hours.Its appeal is a transparent one, suitable for stained glass projects and applicable on glass, polyester, acetate, canvas and metal; we recommend using pebeo cobra deco or iris brushes.You can thin the paint by adding mineral spirit or white spirit. Unfortunately, you cannot use this type of paint on items you consider using everyday as the paint itself bears only a light wash without soaking.
5. Special Markers
There is a variety of glass painting markers available that can even guarantee dish-washing safe items. Markers are perfect for glass painting beginners as they are very easy to control. The downside is that a consistent flow is not always possible because you will have to pump the actual paint from time to time for it to reach the tip of the marker. The Pebeo Vitrea 160 Assorted Glossy Markers are applicable on glass, crystal, porcelain, china, glazed earthenware, terracotta, metal, enamelled sheet steel, and copper and will fully dry after a minimum of 24 hours. They require baking which will add incredible resistance to dish-washing and to normal detergents.
Should I Prepare the Glass Before Applying the Paint?
When we usually start a canvas painting project we prepare the canvas and apply a ground color as the prime background for the rest of our colorful layers. The same principle applies to glass too. You have to make sure the surface is perfectly clean and grease free in order to obtain a uniform stained glass appeal.
Start by washing it thoroughly sing warm water and soap. Another method involves using water and vinegar and a final wipe with an alcohol damped paper towel. Remember our hands have natural oils that can smudge the glass surface, so we recommend you to use latex or surgical gloves.
Let the glass air dry or use a clean porous paper cloth to remove water. If your project involves applying a basic uniform color to a wine bottle for example, keep in mind that the transparency of the glass will complicate the process of obtaining a good even coverage. Apply several coats for an opaque effect and let the paint layers set before applying another by respecting the paint manufacturer's instructions in the bottle.
What are the recommended brush types for glass painting?
There is no specific brush type required. Some manufacturers prefer and recommend their own brush that can come along with a specific paint, but both natural and synthetic brushes will work well. As for the size and shape of the actual brush, it all depends on the design you are trying to achieve. As a beginner, if you are looking for an intricate model, choose a rather small pointy paint brush that will allow you to be more precise and fallow your guidelines properly, as well as to distribute the glass paint evenly on the surface.The Martha Stewart Crafts Glass Brush Set contains 5 special angled brushes that will help you in painting wine bottles for example and are made from Nylon bristles, ideal for glass painting and fine detailing.
Another useful item that should have a place in your painter tool box is the Craft Martha Stewart Crafts Glass Scraper And Pick Setwhich will definitely come in handy in glass painting projects, allowing you to correct mistakes, clean the paint from your glass surface and remove bubbles from it as well.
How should I heat-set my glass painted item?
When it comes to paint types that require heat setting in the oven, the exact temperature required for the paint layer to dry perfectly is usually dictated by the paint's manufacturer so we highly encourage you to read them carefully before tying to heat dry your glass product.
Check your oven's temperature and never, ever insert the glass into a preheated oven. This will lead to the glass shattering under the huge temperature difference. Insert the glass into the oven, set the right temperature and timer, let it dry and allow the glass to cool to the room's temperature before taking it out of the oven.
We again advise you to fallow the instructions written on your paint product in order not to ruin your work of art at the very end. Just be patient and take it one step at a time.
Are glass paints safe to use on food or fluid containers?
Here again the concern issue depends on the paint's composition and chemical structure. Check and double check the instructions before applying glass paint on the interior side of your wine glasses. Non toxic is not the same thing as food safe so take precautions and do not paint the areas that can come in contact with food or liquids. From our knowledge such a product does not exist yet but if you know different we would very much like it if you could share it with us.
How to Paint Glass Step by Step
1. Set your basic materials within reach
When starting a painting project it always indicated to prepare in advance and set all your required materials within reach. Some types of paint can set very fast and won't allow you much flexibility so arrange all your utensils on the working table. For this particular project we have used an A4 sized glass piece, a set of Idea glass paints that will air dry in about 8 hours and an erasable black liner to set the basic design lines on the glass surface.
2. Prepare and clean the glass surface
As mentioned on the above tips and tricks, it is very important to clean and prepare the glass surface before starting applying layers of paint and unraveling the beuatiful design you have envisioned.We have used a glass cleaner product that contains alcohol and wiped the glass thoroughly. Afterwards we have let it air dry, naturally, to avoid unwanted marks that a cloth might have left. Remember to use gloves to prevent the natural oils of your skin from smudging the surface.
3. Sketch the basic design lines of your art work
For a simpler approach we have drawn our simple iris design on a piece of paper before starting the actual work on the glass piece. This might come in handy if you are not sure of the precise form of your future creation. Now you have the chance to think about the hues you will use and the positioning of the design on your glass canvas.
4. Reproduce the design on the glass surface
Place the piece of paper underneath the glass piece and start drawing by using a black liner. You can use a permanent marker if you have a steady hand. Otherwise, opt for a removable one and keep an alcohol damped cloth nearby to remove unwanted smudges that will definitely happen. Once the lines have been set you can start adding your hue layers.
5. Start applying the layers of glass paint
As a glass painter beginner it is not recommended to buy a variety of pain tones from the very start. Choose the basic primary colors and learn to mix and match them to obtain the right tones you desire for your creation. Do not forget about the pain thinner which will definitely ease the process. be careful though to not overuse it or you might end up with a dripping set of paints on your glass which will never set right.
6. Mix and match hues to obtain the right tones
Once the primary design is done you can focus on your background.For this basic simple design we have chosen a yellow and white combination color ground that could accentuate the iris flower. We have used a flat brush to apply in large strokes the paint layer and obtain a more artistic stroke.
7. Let the glass painting air dry or heat set it depending on the paint's specifications
The particular paint type we have used air dries in about 8 hours and does not require heat setting. Make sure to read the instructions and we highly advise you to respect them accordingly in order to really profit from your investment in glass painting materials.
How to Paint Glass Bottles Ideas
Single Snowflake on a Transparent Wine Bottle
A Mosaic of Colors
A Solid Tone Versus a Transparent Base
Paint a Colorful Dream-catcher
Wine Bottles Transformed Into Candle Holders
Limit Yourself to One Tone and Enhance the Bottle With String Lights
In the end imagination, creativity and dedication will define your work. Keep the basic rules in mind and simply have fun with any glass painting project. We would love to complete our collection with your own work so feel free to share your creations along with opinions and ideas in the comment section below.
Although aluminum looks sleek in its natural silvery form, people often want to paint aluminum surfaces to complement their home decor.
As such, all DIYers and painting enthusiasts should know how to paint this popular metal. However, if you don’t know how to go about it, there’s absolutely nothing to worry about as it’s hardly as tough as you think.
There are a ton of ways to paint aluminum surfaces that will allow you to achieve a fantastic paint job. In this informative guide, we will be learning all the nitty-gritty about painting aluminum so that you get the desired results each time.
Without any further delay, let’s get straight to the good stuff, shall we?
Things You Should Know About Painting Aluminum
For the best results, painting aluminum requires some extra steps in the preparation stages. For example, first, you will need to sand your aluminum surface to ensure that the paint adheres well to it. You can do this with medium-grit sandpaper that’ll help scrape the surface.
Then, you’ll have to apply an etch primer to provide a solid base coat, which will allow the paint to stick to the surface. In this way, you will be able to achieve a top-quality paint job that’ll truly stand the test of time.
That said, if you want to make it more durable, we suggest finishing it off with a topcoat or a sealer and letting it dry for 24 hours. Fortunately, all these supplies are easily obtainable at hardware stores, and they are reasonably easy to apply.
What You’ll Require To Paint Aluminum
Before starting, you will need a few supplies to deliver a top-quality finish. To begin with, you will require a respirator and gloves if you are using topcoats, self-etching primers, and spray paints. If you come in direct contact with these materials, they can prove to be harmful to your health.
So, you need to make sure that you take proper safety measures. Furthermore, we strongly advise against using these primers or spray paints indoors as they release harmful chemicals that can put you at risk of developing breathing issues.
Lastly, ensure that you have some of the basic items near you, such as an old piece of cloth and sandpaper, in order to prep the aluminum surfaces before painting.
How To Paint Aluminum
Follow these steps to successfully paint aluminum
Sand The Aluminum Surface
First, you need to sand the surface properly before getting started with the spray paint. This will ensure that the surface is sufficiently rough for the spray paint to adhere well to it. You need not put extra effort into this step; just add some texture to make the next steps easier.
Rub Off Excess Dirt And Dust Using A Cloth
Next, you’ll have to use an old rag or a cloth to get rid of all the dirt and dust created from sanding the aluminum surface. The idea is to get the surface free from all the debris to allow the scuffs to absorb the paint.
Apply Multiple Coats Of Self-Etching Primers
Now, you’ll have to apply the self-etching primer to create a durable surface for the spray paint. You will need to apply 3-4 coats for optimal results. On that note, make sure you do this outside or in a paint booth to prevent the paint from sticking onto other surfaces.
Apply Multiple Layers Of Spray Paint
This is the part where you apply spray paint. It doesn’t matter which brand you are using; just ensure that you have worn a respirator for protection. Ideally, you should apply 4-5 coats to deliver a top-notch finish and make the paint less susceptible to flaking due to wear and tear.
Let The Spray Paint Cure
Once done with spray paint, keep the object in a dry and safe place for a minimum of 24 hours. This will ensure that the paint gets sufficient time to adhere itself completely to the surface.
Apply A Few Layers Of Clear Coat
If you intend on using the painted object outdoors, we highly suggest applying a few layers of clear coat to properly seal in the paint. This will ensure that the color remains intact for a long time.
Top 3 Coatings For Aluminum Surfaces
If you are painting aluminum for the first time, you may not be aware of the top aluminum primers and paints. For this reason, we have listed 3 products that we consider to be the best in their respective departments, and that may help you achieve the desired results.
This product from Rust-Oleum is both a paint and a primer. Made using an oil-based formula, it ensures long-lasting protection for your aluminum surface. Let’s move on to the next section to know more about this product in detail.
Why Did We Like It?
Honestly, we were quite impressed with what this product has to bring to the table. It has a drying time of just 20 minutes, which is relatively lower than most options you’ll find on the market. Plus, a can of this product can cover up to 12 square feet, which is pretty decent, given the size of the container.
The main issue with aluminum paint and primers is that they have an offensive odor that makes them very difficult to apply. But you don’t have to worry about that while using this, as it's an oil-based formula, having exceptionally low odor.
On top of that, it is available in a wide variety of color options, enabling users to choose a color that would suit their requirements. Apart from aluminum, this item can be used on various other surfaces, including plaster, plastic, ceramic, and a lot more.
Overall, it is one of the top-rated paint cum primers available on the market.
What Could’ve Been Better?
Without a doubt, it is an exceptional paint cum primer, especially given its low drying time and various color options. But, unfortunately, that same cannot be said about the can that it comes in. We noticed that its lid is rather hard to pull, which might be an issue for many users. Other than this minor inconvenience, the product works perfectly fine.
Pros
Low odor
Available in various color options
Decent coverage
Apart from aluminum, it can be applied on a range of other surfaces
Our next pick is a paint from Rust-Oleum that works out amazingly well on aluminum surfaces. It is popular among DIYers and professionals for providing a hoard of benefits. So, let’s dig a little deeper.
Why Did We Like It?
If you are looking to protect aluminum objects from corrosion, besides providing an eye-catching finish, then this product could be your best bet. The paint’s oil-based formula helps you deliver a durable protective coating that offers top-notch rust prevention.
Furthermore, it is resistant to chipping, fading and abrasion, and UV rays, which means once you spray it, you can expect this paint to stay unflawed for a long time. Not to mention, it provides a glossy finish, making your aluminum surfaces look fresh and brand new.
Plus, you would be pleased to know that it dries in just 4 hours, unlike most paints that take an entire day. Beyond that, it features an economical price tag, making the product ideal for DIYers and people who have recently gotten into painting. Lastly, a quart of it can provide a coverage of up to 90 square feet.
What Could’ve Been Better?
We didn’t come across any considerable downsides to this aluminum paint from Rust-Oleum. However, if we had to nit-pick, we would say that it has a strong odor. But that said, you can easily tackle it by wearing a respirator.
Next, let us introduce you to a latex aluminum primer that’ll work to protect your aluminum surface from various harsh weather elements. Keep reading to know more.
Why Did We Like It?
Perhaps, the most advantageous feature of this primer is its excellent adhesion, which helps the product to bond tightly on a range of interior and exterior aluminum surfaces with ease. Plus, its oil-based acrylic formula ensures a durable protective coating that makes the surfaces less susceptible to rusting.
Beyond that, it dries within 2 hours, which is a bonus, if you ask us. And not only that, a pack of 17 fluid ounces of this item can cover surfaces of up to 90 square feet, which is great.
Once applied, it creates a flat aluminum finish that can be easily covered with a range of topcoats. Overall, it is one of the best primers for aluminum surfaces that any DIYer can hope to get their hands on.
What Could’ve Been Better?
The only gripe we have against this primer is that the packaging material used is not durable enough. When it came to us, the can was dented, which was a bit disappointing
Pros
Offers a durable coating
Has a low drying time
Bonds tightly
Provides a decent coverage
Cons
Packaging material used is not good
Aluminum Surface Paint Buyer's Guide
Here are a few factors that you must consider when buying aluminum paint to ensure optimal results.
Consistency
Consistency is one of the most important factors you should consider when buying paint, specifically designed for aluminum surfaces. On that note, always go with a paint that has a thicker consistency as they are known to work better on metal surfaces, especially aluminum.
Easy Application
You should always go with a paint that allows you to paint surfaces without breaking a sweat. When it comes to painting aluminum, spray paints are considered to be a popular choice. This is because they are pretty quick and easy to apply.
Water And Weather-Resistance
Last but not least, you will want to ensure that your paint provides a durable and long-lasting coating that can withstand weather elements. So, when buying paint, check if it is resistant to water, UV rays, etc. This factor is especially crucial if you will be painting things that will be outside all year.
How To Paint Aluminum Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs)
Here are some of the most frequently asked questions that we have tried answering to the best of our ability. We are confident that after reading this part, all your doubts regarding painting aluminum will be cleared.
1. What type of paint sticks best to aluminum surfaces?
Oil-based paints work the best on aluminum surfaces simply because they offer more durability and stronger adhesion than water-based paints.
2. Do aluminum surfaces require a special kind of paint?
Yes, there are special paints that are specifically designed to be used on aluminum surfaces. So, make sure that you check the packaging before buying as it will have the materials appropriate for use labeled on it.
3. What are some of the top brands of aluminum paints?
Some of the top-brands of aluminum paints are:
Krylon
Rust-Oleum
Seymour Of Sycamore
4. What are the other ways of protecting aluminum objects?
Apart from applying a coat of paint, you can protect your aluminum objects by anodizing them or by simply applying a coat of primer. It mostly depends on the intended use of the object.
Final Thoughts
Not only does painting aluminum objects protect them from rust and various weather elements, but it also makes them visually appealing.
With that, we have come to the end of our informative guide; hopefully, it has helped you gain extensive knowledge on painting aluminum. Just make sure that you prep the surface well before painting, as it’ll help the paint adhere properly to the surface.
Also, keep in mind that oil-based paints work best for painting aluminum surfaces, so make sure you choose the same.
On that note, it’s a wrap for today. Hope to see you soon!
Epoxy resin floors have been in buzz lately. But the material isn’t just limited to this; you can do several other projects using it.
If you’ve taken up the mighty task of doing a DIY epoxy resin project, it’s only natural to feel stuck at certain points. One such point is the measuring and mixing of resin and hardeners. Getting that ratio right can indeed be a challenging task, even for experienced builders.
That’s why we’ve put together an elaborate step-by-step guide to assist you with the mixing process. We’ll also give you details about the preparation and application part so you can go ahead and ace that epoxy project.
Let’s get started right away!
Guide To Mixing Epoxy Resin
A. Prepping up
Before getting to the mixing and measuring of epoxy resin, a little prepping up is needed. We’ll cover that bit in this section.
Choose A High-Quality Epoxy Product
Choosing a good resin product that suits all your needs is the first step in the right direction, and you need to do your homework while choosing. Know what you’re going to do with the epoxy, read up articles, and research which one will suit your purpose the best.
Are you going to use it for coating a surface, or do you just need to fill up some holes in an old wooden piece? There are different epoxies for different purposes, and we suggest getting a specialized one instead of their all-purpose counterparts.
Check the product description carefully and go for top-quality and reliable brands only. An epoxy resin is something you cannot take many risks with, as there are many products on the market that are just a waste of money. Some do not harden at all, while others are already yellow, even before application.
Gather The Equipment
The next step is to get all your supplies and gear in place. Here’s a list of equipment you’ll need:
Mixing cups (avoid containers that contain oils or fats if you’re using recycled cups)
Mixing sticks
Eye protection
Latex or rubber gloves (reusable or disposable)
Mini digital scale or measuring cylinders
B. Mixing
Once you’re ready with all the products and equipment, you can move on to the next part, measuring the epoxy resin and mixing it in correct proportions. We advise covering the spot where you’ll be working with newspapers or rags, so you don’t spoil your floor while working.
Get The Ratio Right
Each product has a different resin to hardener mixing ratio, which majorly determines its effectiveness and utility. The easiest and the most basic ones are mixed in a 1:1 ratio, which is a no-brainer, and if you’ve managed to pick one that follows this scheme, count yourself lucky.
There are others that require two parts or three parts of resin for each part of the hardener, and they are attainable as well. But problems arise with the complicated ones that demand a proportion of 100:45 or 100:47, so you might need a little extra assistance in such cases.
You can usually find the fractional details on the package, but in case this information is discrete, you can refer to an online epoxy resin calculator. The mixing ratio has to be precise to the point, else it won’t harden properly, and all your hard work will go down the drain.
The calculator will ask you to feed various dimensions like length, width, and thickness of the project, the volume of epoxy, and other details. Fill in all this data carefully, and you’ll find out the accurate mixing ratio.
Measuring By Volume Vs. Measuring By Weight
Some people suggest, like all other products, resin and hardeners should be measured in terms of weight too. But the fact that the density of both of these solutions differs must not be overlooked.
Therefore, it is better to measure the products in terms of volume instead of weight. But we’ll leave the choice to you and explain both methods one by one.
A. By Weight
First and foremost, power on your digital weighing scale and choose the desired units. Scales mostly measure in ounces or grams, so pick a unit that gives you the freedom to determine 0.1 gram or ounce.
Once you get the units straight, place the mixing cup on the scale and set it as the zero balance by pressing the zero selection or “tare” button. Now pour the resin and note the amount, let’s say ten ounces, for instance.
Next, measure the amount of hardener required as per the instructed proportions. If your product says 2:1, then your hardener should be five ounces. Pour the hardener from the container directly into the mixing cup, and if by chance the weighing machine resets because of inactivity, you’ll need to weigh only the hardener.
However, we don’t recommend following this method as you’ll have to keep a note of the differences in the weight of epoxy and hardener. You can use measuring charts for quick reference, but that is too much hassle.
B. By Volume
Assess the amount of material needed for the application as closely as possible, and if you don’t get enough on the first go, you can always mix up another batch. Since epoxy resin is an expensive commodity, try and minimize the wastage as much as you can.
Start off by pouring the resin into the measuring cylinder or graduated cup and ensure that the lower meniscus meets the quantitative mark you are aiming for. Fun fact: while measuring solutions, mostly those that are colorless are measured by looking at the lower meniscus, while colored ones are assessed using the upper meniscus or the flat surface.
However, the warm resin lays flat, so you should give it enough time to settle down. When you’re done with the epoxy, you can proceed by pouring the hardener as per the ratio. Fortunately, the volume doesn’t take the density differences into account, and that makes the whole process significantly convenient.
Mix The Epoxy Resin
Mix both the solutions thoroughly for three to four minutes using a mixing stick, and you can continue whisking for even longer if the quantities are large. Scrape off the bottom and the sides of your mixing cup while doing this, so there aren’t any lumps.
Don’t stop until you’re absolutely sure that both the solutions are completely mixed and have the desired consistency. One sure sign of attaining success is that your formula will be uniform and stop streaking.
Dispense The Epoxy Resin
Moving on, we have a few tips for dispensing the mixed epoxy:
Most importantly, epoxy resins are very sensitive to temperature, and humidity changes; that’s why you shouldn’t use them outside when it’s freezing or moist and chances of condensation are extremely high.
Next, don’t let the mixture sit in the pot for too long and start working as soon as you can, and that is directly proportional to its quantity. Meaning, the more is the quantity, the faster you should apply it because the consistency gets affected if you leave it unattended.
Start the application process by evenly spreading a thin layer of the resin using a squeegee and smoothing it out with a brush instead of pouring a thick layer directly from the container. Wait for the resin to tack and then proceed to apply a second layer or fill in the left-out spots.
Furthermore, pump two strokes of epoxy for each stroke of the hardener by pressing the head entirely and allowing it to retract fully. Partial strokes will mess up your ratio, and you wouldn’t want that. Lastly, we advise you to calibrate your dispenser carefully for accurate proportions before you begin pumping.
C. Aftermath
Get The Surface Ready
Preparing your surface for adhesion is important before you start applying the epoxy resin. For effective mechanical adherence, the surface should ideally be clean, moisture-free, and properly sanded.
A. Chemical Bonds
These bonds, also known as primary bonds, are formed when partially cured epoxy is covered with a fresh coat of epoxy. Primary bonding depends on the molecules of the previous layer for chemical reactions.
B. Mechanical Bonds
Mechanical bonds are secondary bonds that resemble the previous category, except they are applied on a fully cured layer. When the first layer is completely dried out, the window for chemical reactions closes. Hence mechanical bonds are formed when the molecules of the second layer key into the pores of the previous one.
Curing And Cleaning Epoxy Resin
The time taken by the epoxy resin liquid mixture to solidify is known as the curing period. The formula first transforms into a gel and then finally into solid to give the final finish.
Always try to stay near your project or keep checking up on it frequently during the curing period. Curing occurs best at room temperature, so you won’t need any external agents to alter the temperature (like oven or blow dryer).
Furthermore, if you feel the need for trimming, try to pull out the tape an hour or two after the resin has started setting. It is easier to do when the epoxy is three-fourths cured as opposed to completely cured.
Top Coats And Finishing
The final and most important step in the process is applying a top coat on your brand new epoxy resin surface and making it durable against moisture and sunlight.
The glossy white coatings last the longest on epoxy as they reflect most of the light hitting its surface. Dull surfaces aren’t capable of doing that and absorb the light, weakening and turning the epoxy yellow as a result.
Since completely cured epoxy resin is an inert and tough plastic, it doesn’t react and is compatible with most coatings. It also doesn’t swell or soften in contact with paint solvents. Elevate the temperature once your epoxy sets, allowing it to cure thoroughly.
Here are a few types of finish coatings that work best on epoxy resin:
A. Epoxy Paints
Available in one-part and two-part versions, these paints are chemical resistant and durable. However, they aren’t the best when it comes to UV protection.
B. Alkyd Finishes
These finishes are low-cost, easily available, easy to apply, and low in toxicity. But, just like epoxy paints, alkyd finishes also have low abrasion and UV resistance.
C. One-Part Polyurethanes
One-Part Polyurethanes offer much UV protection than the previous two options and are easy to apply and clean.
D. Two-Part Linear Polyurethane Paints
These paints are the most durable and offer top-quality protection to the epoxy. They are available in clear or pigmented options with abrasion and gloss retention. But they are comparatively expensive than the others and are a little difficult to apply.
Things To Consider While Mixing
The Effect Of Ambient Temperature
As we’ve already told you, temperature has a huge impact on epoxy surfaces, so you need to consider the weather while applying the resin.
A. Temperature below 68 degrees Fahrenheit:
Resin curing slows down significantly in this range. More amine reddening is also probable in such conditions, which takes quite a bit of effort for removal. Epoxy resin can also crystallize if the temperature drops lower than this.
B. Temperature higher than 68 degrees Fahrenheit:
The mixture of hardener and resin reacts faster in this range. It also shortens the pot life as well as the curing period. Therefore, if you live in hot conditions, you should opt for epoxies with longer working periods.
Humidity During The Processing
Hardeners are sensitive to humid air, and hence, you must avoid opening the can if atmospheric moisture exceeds 65%. They will surely suffer qualitative damage if they aren’t used up immediately because more and more oxygen enters the container on frequent opening and closing.
Temperature Of The Epoxy Resin
Using cold epoxy can lead to bubbles or milky streaks in your final mixture, making your formula inconsistent. You won’t get your desired finish on the project if you use an inconsistent solution.
For dealing with this situation, make sure that you store your resin at room temperature for at least twenty-four hours before use. If you’re in a hurry, then you can place it in a warm water bath too to bring the temperature up.
Heating makes the resin flow easy but reduces the open time, and you’ll have to work quickly. A significant rise can even half the curing time and pot life of your mixture, so be careful about that.
Using Colors
Only a select few colors are compatible with epoxy resins, and you should not use any pigment that you find in your mix. Look for mica pigments, coloring dye, and concentrated formulas that are compatible with your resin, and introduce it only when you’re sure about it.
Tool For Mixing Epoxy Resin
Correct tools can make the whole mixing process easy and quick without having to strain your hands in the whisking. A flat spatula, similar to a paint stirrer, is the most effective tool for this purpose.
A wooden spatula is a cheaper variant, but it is available only for smaller quantities, so mixing sticks is the best alternative for medium quantities. It doesn’t allow the air bubbles to enter and can be used multiple times. Another thing worth noting is that the mixing tool should be straight to scrape off material from the sides of the container thoroughly.
Mixing DIfferent Epoxy Products
Resins and hardeners are specially formulated to adjust with each other and make a final epoxy resin of uniform consistency. Hence, different solutions, no matter if they are from the same brand or manufacturers, should not be mixed.
Duly follow the mixing instructions and ratio while making the resin solution using the right tools for best results.
Heat Generation
Blending epoxy resin and hardener is an exothermic reaction, and the process produces a lot of heat. To avoid any accidents, you must take the following precautions:
Do not exceed the upper limit of the maximum mixing amount
Mix the components in large containers rather than higher ones to reduce heat build-up
Use less reactive epoxy resins
Final Words
Mixing epoxy resin sounds so easy, right? But it isn’t that easy when you bring in all the details.
After covering all the nuances and implications of the process, we’ve now reached the end of our guide on mixing epoxy resin. Did you find it helpful? We hope that you did! Creating a resin mixture can be a daunting task, but with our tips and tricks, you’ll get the hang of it.
That’s it for this guide, guys. We’ll see you next time! Take care.
Epoxy is a versatile substance that can be molded into various forms. You can create unique pieces to wear, thanks to this.
Besides decorative pieces, DIY enthusiasts and local designers create pendants, bracelets, earrings, cufflinks, finger rings, tie pins, brooches, and key rings.
You can get beautiful crystal-like surfaces, but the best part is that you can also add color. Add a dose of your favorite shade and create fake crystals, which can then be used with a chain. Many also work with wood and create beautiful additions to it with the help of epoxy resin.
Now, we know that the entire process can be a little confusing. To prevent any dilemma, we have curated this informative guide about how to make resin jewelry. You will get all the information needed, including information about the different types available in our market and every other step involved.
So, dive in!
How to Make Resin Jewelry?
You must have seen a lot of solid and transparent resin craft being available in both local and jewelry stores. Many make crystals and gems with this, and they look absolutely similar to real gemstones and crystals.
If you are wondering what resin really is, let us tell you about it. It is an artificial blend made of very viscous plastic or polymer. The blend is first available in liquid form, which, when mixed with a hardener, turns into a solid layer.
It can take around 24 hours to a few days for the curing process, and once the layer has solidified, it does not crack or break easily. This will look like clear glass but will not break on dropping.
Plus, the resin is pretty easy to work with once you get the hang of it. You will need the right mold and a few other items, which we have mentioned below. Once they are all in place, you can easily begin the process.
Moving on, before you begin with the jewelry making process, we will tell you a little about the preparations. If you are a novice and this is your first time working with this option, it is best to get acquainted with the process before working on the final pieces. Follow the steps mentioned below and only then move on to the actual process.
Understanding Resin
We will recommend that you first learn to measure and mix the resin. You can combine and make small objects with it just to get the hang of it. That said, it probably would be best to start with epoxy as it is the easiest to work with. It takes a little while to dry, and you can mix and cast it before that easily.
The process of mixing is extremely important, and you should have the essentials before beginning. A measuring cup along with syringes and medicine cups will help you get the right amount. Also, ensure that you have a hardener along with the fluid. Only UV resin does not need an additional hardener as it is already mixed.
Next, you will have to learn about the specifics that involve the mixing ratio, time taken to pot and cure, and every safety measure that needs to be taken. The resin has to be measured in cups, and the pack will tell you how much of it needs to be mixed with a hardener.
Generally, the common rule to follow is the 1:1 ratio. That means equal quantities of the liquid and hardener has to be mixed.
However, we will advise you to read the back of the pack carefully before proceeding.
Picking An Area
Another important factor is the place where you will be working. Always be prepared for the mess that might occur during the process, and remember that resin is very difficult to remove. It can scar surfaces permanently; something you wouldn't want.
So, use enough wax paper while working and keep the surrounding areas covered. Also, keep tissues handy during the process. If any of the material gets in your hand, then rub it off immediately.
Moving on, we will recommend using it as the only variable, especially if you are working with it for the first time. Use jewelry bezels where you do not need to remove the mold after the drying process. This way, if anything goes wrong, you can immediately understand the reason. Once you have mastered the use of this fluid, then move on to adding items to it.
Adding Objects To Resin
Adding items to resin look beautiful and will help you create various unique pieces of jewelry. However, if you put anything porous in the mix, then it might not look good. In this case, you will have to first seal the porous object and then only move on to adding it.
The next question to ask yourself is if you are confident about sealing porous objects. If you are not, first imagine how it would look like if water was added to it.
Now, if you can predict a change in the appearance, then it has to be sealed. Once you have sealed it, it can be added to the middle of your resin mold over a layer of hardened liquid.
Further, begin with easy items like metal or glitter beads and shells. These do not have to be sealed but they look beautiful inside jewelry. When you place them in the mold, position them well, and you can add a little amount of resin to fix their position.
This will also teach you about trapping bubbles and how to remove them. Furthermore, keep a dryer handy to remove bubbles when needed.
Next comes colors, and you can try adding them with the resin. It generally does not work well with moisture, and you will need more time for mixing. This might take a while to get used to, but you will get the hang of it in some time.
Creating A Dome
So, resins can create that perfect dome, but you will need some practice for it. The amount of fluid should be just right so that it does not fall off the edges. This is generally a little tricky at first, but once you get the hang of it, the process will be super easy. Practice and patience are key and will help you go a long way in this case.
Once you have mastered this, you are prepared to make resin jewelry from scratch. You will now understand the texture and curing method better, and that makes you prepared for the next step. Get surfing on the internet and curate a collection of pictures that you plan to use for inspiration.
Working On Different Surfaces
There are a number of surfaces that you can work on. You might want to add to wood to create beautiful wooden jewelry. On the other hand, you can also use it to coat tables and furniture and prevent them from discoloration over time.
Materials Required
So, now you already know how to work with resin, and it's time to take you through the items needed before beginning the final process of making jewelry. We have listed the important materials needed for the process. They are:
Crafting Epoxy
Jewelry molds of your choice
Latex gloves
Blow dryer
Wax paper
Fine-grained sandpaper
Polishing paste
Gloss varnish
Measurement Cups
Squeeze bottle
Popsicle sticks
Resin Fillers including jewelry, dried flowers, glitter, studs, and feathers
Tissues
Selecting The Right Mold
There are different kinds of molds available, and you can get one according to your needs. You will find perfect pieces for creating brooches, pendants, earrings, key rings, and finger rings. Browse through all the options and pick one that fits the best.
Remember that if the mold is ill-fitting, then you will have to spend more time in the sanding process to get your desired shape.
Process Of Making Resin Jewelry
Now that you know about the different materials that are needed let us begin with the steps. Follow them carefully for a flawless experience. Also, remember to place the hardener and resin fluid bottles in hot water before the process.
It will help you get them ready and will prevent air bubbles from forming. This is specially important if the surrounding temperature is very low.
Step 1| Preparation
At first, you will have to decide the jewelry that needs to be cast or the kind of jewelry that you want to make. It is best to have a reference image in case you are making it from scratch.
Once you have decided, bring all the materials to one place and lay them out. This includes the colors and silicon molds too. We will advise keeping fine-grained sandpaper near along with gloss varnish and the polishing paste. Fill a glass with water and keep it along with absorbent tissues and a sanding block. These are not extremely important but will make the process less messy.
Moving on, if you plan to use UV resin, then you will need a UV lamp for the curing process. Keep it ready beforehand so as to save time.
Remember, while some people do not take adequate protection, we will always recommend being cautious. Wear gloves, safety glasses, and a mask to prevent the chemicals from going into your system.
Place plastic sheets around if you are working in your bedroom to prevent the chemicals from spreading around. You can also use wax papers for this step as it is easier to remove hardened resin from wax paper. .
Step 2| Mixing
Next, you will need your measuring cups for this part of the process. Ensure that there are millimeter markings on the cup and, if possible, keep a kitchen scale handy. Pour the epoxy and polyester resin along with the hardener in an equal ratio. This is extremely crucial, and you have to get a 1:1 ratio exactly.
If you are planning to add colors or glitters to products, then you have to mix them with resin. Pour a small amount and see the change in color. This generally depends on the preference of people.
On the other side, if you are using UV resin, then you will not need a hardener. This usually comes mixed with a hardener, and you can use it straight out of the pack. The only condition is that UV light will be needed for the process.
Step 3| Pouring
Once you have the mix ready, pour it into the mold and cover half of it. Now you will want to put in any light materials that would go well. You can choose among feathers, leaves, glitter, or any other substance that you think fits well. This should be positioned well in the liquid and then left to settle.
You will have to leave it for up to 24 hours and watch the first layer harden. Once it happens, put in any of the heavier objects like pearls, stones, or shells that you want to add to the jewelry. To help in positioning them properly, pour a little amount of resin along with it.
After this has hardened, you can now pour the remaining amount of resin and fill the mold completely. A very important tip here is to check for air bubbles immediately after pouring. If air bubbles have formed, use a hot air dryer or a Bunsen burner to remove them.
Then let it harden completely, and we will recommend leaving it for another day and then checking again.
Step 4| Removing the Mold
The time taken to dry varies with different substances and thicknesses. While UV resin dries the fastest and will only take a few minutes under UV light, the classic version can take up to 48 hours or a few days to do it.
This also depends on the type of weather and the brand. Read the back of the pack that you buy to ensure that you provide enough time to dry.
Once it has dried completely, take it out of the mold. Now you might see sharp corners, or it might be a little dull. But do not worry, as this is pretty common. It will be taken care of in the next step.
Step 5| Polishing And Sanding
Once you have taken it out of the mold, it is best to begin with the sanding process. Use your fine-grained sandpaper for this job and remove all sharp edges from the sides. Once you have done so and there are no visible protrusions, move on to the polishing stage.
Here, if you have used a polished mold, the product should already have a shine to it. These are better options as these will save you from having to polish the jewelry again.
If the mold was not polished, then you can either apply the polishing paste, or you can use a varnish to make it glossy. If you plan to use epoxy resin for this step, then you will have to ensure that the surface is absolutely smooth.
Otherwise, you might see unattractive marks inside the jewelry. Once you have used sandpaper, water, and a cloth to clean it, cover it with a layer of resin. This should be very thin, and you can use a brush to spread it. After it has a smooth thin layer surrounding it, let it harden.
Step 6| Drilling
The last step involves drilling a hole into your jewelry. Once you have made the pendant or keyring, you will need a hole to put the chain in. This has to be tiny, and we will recommend using a twist drill. This will enable you to drill a small hole with precision.
Remember that it is best to try on a sample item before using it on the jewelry. This will give you a feel of the material and speed, and you can work with precision on the actual piece.
Also, remember that the hole to be made will be dull, and you can use a tiny amount of epoxy resin and apply it there with a toothpick.
Further, when you are working with a drill, keep it at the lowest speed so that you can control the amount of heat. Too much heat can melt the entire jewelry and spoil it. Also, keep a thick board underneath the product so that the heat or your drill does not lead to scratches on any surface in your house.
Moreover, for bracelets and necklaces, you will need to attach a metal loop. This involves a thin piece of a pin that has to be heated and twisted into a loop. You can simply hold it with the help of pliers over a gas stove for a few seconds. Then poke it directly into the resin. Since it will be very hot, it will melt the layers and go inside easily.
Helpful Tips
If you are planning to make rings or pins, you can simply paste the resin jewelry onto a metal pin or a ring. There is no need to drill or make a hole, and this makes it less time consuming. Also, it is safer and will not destroy jewelry in any way.
Moreover, if you want to quicken up the drying process, you can place it in the freezer for 10 minutes or so. Then the process of taking it out of the mold will be very easy as it pops right out like ice pieces.
Working With Wooden Jewelry
When you are working with wood, the process is slightly different. But wood in combination with epoxy resin really stands out and looks beautiful. You can even use colored resin to make it more attractive.
To begin with, get a rectangular mold and then keep the wooden piece inside. Fill it up completely with epoxy resin and allow it to dry. Check after a day and begin working on it only after it has dried completely.
Once it has dried up, take it out of the mold and then begin shaping and polishing it. The sides need to be sanded and polished with gloss varnish or a layer of resin to ensure perfection.
Types Of Jewelry Resin
Now we will tell you about the different types of resin available in the market. If you are a DIY enthusiast looking to make jewelry, you should know about the 4 common types. These can be bought from a hardware store or a craft shop.
The major difference among the resin types is with their composition. When the composition is different, the drying and curing time will also vary. So, it is essential that you know about the types and then choose one according to your convenience.
Countertop Resin
This is a very popular type that is used by a number of artists to preserve their work. Known as laminating resin, it can also be used for resin art and small-format castings. It is very viscous and hence provides a thin layer.
Now since it dries quickly during the curing process, you will have to ensure that the layer on top is not thick. Thick layers can often become foggy and will not work well if you are using in on jewelry. If you want a thick coating, then go for multiple thin layers. This will prevent fogginess and will promote clear vision.
We will recommend using this with flowers or glitters as it does not let objects sink easily. You can make flower jewelry with this, which will look different and refreshing.
Casting Resin
This is the most common type of resin that is used to make jewelry but is also more expensive than the other options. However, you can rest assured that you will be getting a 100% non-toxic layer once it has dried up well.
But remember that it does take some time to dry up, and you might have to leave it for a few days. The formula is odorless and will provide a crystal clear layer on your jewelry.
Further, it is a low-viscosity liquid and hence takes more time in curing. You will be getting a thin layer that makes it perfect for small jewelry. In case you want a thicker one, create multiple layers with it. Other than jewelry, this is largely used for making epoxy tables and other furniture.
UV Resin
UV resin is a great replacement for the classic epoxy option. This takes just a few minutes to cure, and you will need UV light for it. It will offer you a crystal clear layer with no odor at all.
Moving on, the only downside to this is that it can form thin layers of a maximum of 4 mm. Now this will not be a problem when it comes to small jewelry, as you will be looking to create thin layers. But if you want to make a thick surface, create a number of thin layers, and that should work well. They will dry very fast, and you can finish the work in half an hour.
Polyester Resin
This is the cheapest type of resin which is known to harden quickly and will form a very tough layer. However, it has a strong smell and will form a clouded surface.
You can use it for jewelry to a limited extent. This is because you will not be getting a crystal clear surface which casting resin will offer.
Advantages Of Using Resin
While there are different materials that DIY enthusiasts might use to make jewelry, many are choosing resin over everything else. This is because it helps in creating unique pieces, which have a sense of authenticity. We have listed down some of the benefits of using this particular substance.
Difficult To Break
Resin jewelry is generally difficult to break, and you will have to apply intentional force to do so. If you keep twisting it till it snaps, it will break for sure. But that would mean you wanted to destroy it.
Otherwise, this is highly resistant to external force and will not get damaged in case it falls on the ground. You do not have to worry about dropping and breaking them, which is the case with clay pieces. Although they are strong, they can break if you drop them.
Non-porous And Water-resistant
Are you planning to use resin to make some parts of your costume for a theatre or a play? You can easily do so if you have the right mold. The substance will easily harden in place and will create a water-resistant layer.
You can then wear it in the rain or take part in a scene with water involved in case you are into theatrical acting.
Moreover, it is non-porous, so you need not worry about it melting in the rain. You can also wear it in broad sunlight, and the heat will not affect it. Overall, this is very resistant to nature and its forces.
No Maintenance Needed
Resin jewelry needs no maintenance whatsoever; you will just need the right mold and have to give it enough time to dry. Once it has dried and you have polished it, the job ends. You can then flaunt your new pieces wherever you go, and they can be kept anywhere too. You don't have to worry about rust, scratches, or breakage.
Also, these craft pieces can be modified whenever you need to, but they do not have to be cleaned at all. The surface will remain shiny, and you would not need to recolor. This is because the color is already added to the resin and is present inside it, so it cannot fade over time.
Final Words
We have finally reached the end of this guide, and we will give you a moment to take it all in. Once you are well-versed with the process, you can easily begin making resin jewelry professionally and create a business out of it.
This type of jewelry is in trend, and if you have great ideas, you can bring them to reality. Having said that, remember to pay attention to the minute details.
Since this is a very versatile transparent liquid, it will highlight any object that is placed inside. Remember this while you are creating the piece. You can use colors of different shades and create gradients that will make the pieces look beautiful.
No matter what design you have in your mind, anything can be made with the right kind of mold. Just be patient and enjoy the process.
With this, we will take your leave. Let us know about your experience in the comment section below. Until next time!
Did you just bring out your favorite board game, only to find the dice missing from the box?
We know how annoying that can be, given that several tabletop role-playing games like “13th Age” need quite a few dice to be played correctly. But there’s a way you can end this inconvenience once and for all. And that’s by making your own dice with patterns and designs of your choice.
Plus, playing the game with your own DIY dice will definitely make it more exciting and cherishable for you.
Speaking of the procedures involved, there are quite a few factors you need to be aware of and several techniques that you need to understand. That’s why we’ve compiled all the essential information for you in a way that will be most easy for you to understand.
So, without further ado, let’s start this exciting ride!
How To Make Resin Dice 101
To understand the art of making resin dice, you first need to be acquainted with several vital aspects of these colorful, intriguing objects. And that’s what we’ll discuss in the beginning before delving into the details of the procedure.
The Different Types Of Dice
You can obtain many different dice using dice-casting procedures, with each of these being suitable for playing a specific game. Note here that dice can differ in the number of sides, colors, and the images or inscriptions used for decorating each side. Here are the different types of dice you can create:
Colorful dice which have a different hue on each face
Dice with both negative and positive numbers on each face
Standard dice, which have a particular number of dots or digit on each face
Dice with different pictures on each face
Poker dice, which carry pictures of car characters on the faces
The Types Of Resin Dice Molds
There can be at most seven variations in the molds for casting standard dice made of resin. You can use these molds to make polyhedral dice, implying that the shape will have several straight edges, sharp corners, and flat faces.
The seven kinds of dice together constitute a set and are generally used for the popular role-playing game “Dungeons and Dragons.” While the dice types from D4 to D12 must be used for measuring weapon damage, spell, healing values, and attack, the D20 type is for checking whether your action has been successful.
So, let’s take a look at each of these molds briefly.
D8 Or Octahedron Dice
Coming with eight sides, this dice mold has a triangular shape and looks like two pyramids attached to one another at their bases. Every face of the dice is numbered from 1 to 8, with each pair of opposite sides adding to nine. During the Dungeons and Dragons game, such dice can be used to find out the damage caused due to large weapons.
D6 Or Cube Dice
Having six sides, this dice is the most familiar type and the type used in the majority of board games. It is shaped in the form of a cube, and each face is assigned one number from 1 to 6. Note that the numbers on each pair of opposite sides add up to seven in this case. Lastly, the dice are useful for assigning character attributes in “Dungeons and Dragons.”
D4 Or Tetrahedron Dice
This pyramid-shaped dice has four sides, with numbers 1 to 4 displayed on its faces. Each face has three of these numbers arranged on each vertex, and the number on a particular point is the same for all the faces.
While you roll this die, the number which stays upright on all the faces or the number on the top-most corner is the result that you will have to use. Indeed, this isn’t the easiest die to roll and is rather tossed into the air.
D00 Or Percentile Dice
Among all the types of dice, two that are always used together during a game are the percentile die, and the pentagonal trapezohedron die. Now, the former is named so, since the result you obtain by rolling it is always a percentage of 100.
Notably, the dice consists of 10 sides, with each face having a value between 00 to 90 in tens. You’ll have no problems differentiating between this one and the second die with ten sides as they have different colors. And remember that the resultant value after rolling both the dice together is obtained by adding their values. But if the number comes to two zeros, the resultant value will be 100.
Pentagonal Trapezohedron Dice Or D10
Rolled together with percentile dice, this type also comes with ten sides and is shaped like a kite. Its two end corners are the points where the top and bottom corners of the kite-shaped mold meet. This type has numbers between 0 to 9 on each side, with each pair of opposite faces adding to nine.
D100 or Zocchihedron Dice
Though this type doesn’t fit into standard seven-piece dice sets, it finds popular use as a novelty dice. Note that it comes with 100 faces and is near about the size of golf balls. This type is also suitable for a percentile roll in any role-playing game.
D20 Or Icosahedron Dice
Being the most well-recognized and popular type of dice used in “Dungeons And Dragons,” this type comes with as many as 20 faces. It also has a larger structure compared to its other counterparts having lesser sizes.
Every face of this dice is shaped in the form of an equilateral triangle, with the numbers 1 to 20 or 0 to 9 twice mentioned on it. And keep in mind that the sum of the values on the two opposite faces of this die should be 21.
Now that we’ve looked at the basics of dice, let’s move on to the different procedures of making dice from resin. First of all, you should keep in mind that the process will vary slightly based on whether pre-made molds are being used or not.
Making Resin Dice Using Premade Molds
For the time being, we focus on creating resin dice with the help of pre-made silicone molds.
All That You’ll Need
You will need a number of materials and tools for making dice using resin and pre-made molds. Apart from a silicone mold of the dice of your choice and a casting resin of high quality, you’ll need the following items:
Toothpicks to remove resin bubbles and to poke holes into the mold
Three disposable mixing and measuring cups
Decorations and items to embed as per your choice
Plastic or wooden sticks for preparing the mixtures
A clean work surface, preferably of plastic
Mica powders, alcohol inks, other resin colorants
Choosing The Best Casting Resin
The resin used for casting has a slightly lower viscosity than other varieties and is always prepared by mixing two components, viz., the resin in liquid form and a suitable hardener. After these ingredients are mixed, there’s a chemical reaction that releases heat and lets the mixture harden after some time.
While buying casting resin for your dice-making project, you must have these two factors in mind:
Make Sure The viscosity Isn’t Too Low
A resin with very low viscosity will take longer to harden. So, ensure that the viscosity of the product you’re purchasing is not too low.
Check The Information On Its Consistency
The casting resin you’re going for must also have a thin consistency so that it can penetrate the smallest of cavities and gaps. Hence, make sure you check the product information and the customer reviews to ascertain whether it has the right consistency.
We found the Pourable Plastic Clear Casting Resin from Incredible Solutions to be a great choice, as it comes with the ideal consistency and a highly effective formulation.
The Procedure
A. Preparations
There are a few preparatory steps you’ll have to take before beginning the procedure. The first and foremost requirement will be to make sure the workspace is clear and clean since working with resin can be a messy affair.
Also, see to it that the molds chosen are dry and clean and have all the materials and tools within close reach. That’s because once you start working, you will have to complete the procedure in a short span of time so that the dice can begin to set soon.
B. Mixing The Resin And Pouring It
Now is the time to measure and mix the resin, which is the most important part of the procedure. For this part, you need to follow the instructions laid down by the manufacturer on the required quantities of the constituents and the mixing time. That’s because precise amounts of the resin must be added to ensure it cures properly.
Here are the steps you need to follow while preparing the mixture:
Step 1
Check the mixing ratio of the hardener and resin recommended by the manufacturer. Then pour the measured amounts as per this ratio into two different containers.
Step 2
Follow this by pouring the two separate components into another measuring cup. Make sure you pour them as uniformly as you can.
Step 3
Stir these two liquid components thoroughly using a wooden or plastic stick. Scrape the bottom and sides of the measuring cup properly while stirring. The ideal duration for this step, as suggested by most manufacturers, is about 3-5 minutes.
Step 4
In case you want the resin to be of a particular color, you’ll also need to include a little bit of alcohol ink or mica powder. Be careful not to add an excessive amount as that will lead to an inappropriate mixing ratio of the resin solution.
Step 5
Finally, the size of the hole in your mold will have to be adjusted, after which you can pour the resin into it. Use the toothpick to guide the liquid in the opening of the mold.
On a side note, you must take care to pour the resin in a way that there’s no air trapped in any depressions or corners of the dice mold since that can cause bubbles.
C. Embedding Items And Adding Decorations
Before you pour the resin into the mold, you will need to decide whether to keep the die clear or to make it colored and decorated. After you’ve made up your mind, mix the additional items and decorations with the resin so that they set in properly to create the desired look.
Here are some suggestions for the decorative items you can add to the resin.
A dye made from alcohol or a mica pigment can be used to add rich colors to the dice. Note that you’ll need a small amount as these dyes and powders are available in a highly concentrated form.
For clear dice, you may add glitter to the colorless resin or some confetti to make it ideal for a certain theme. Even a small figure can be added to the resin depending on the final outcome as per your needs.
After you’ve decided on the objects to embed, pour some resin into the mold and circle it to cover its sides with resin. Now, see to it that the mold is filled halfway, and position the object in it using a toothpick.
Note that the object should fit in the mold properly and still leave some space to be covered with resin. Finally, you’ll have to fill the mold entirely to ensure the objects are embedded properly.
D. Curing
Now, let the resin dice cure for at least 24 hours prior to handling the mold for the next steps. A light tap on the exposed portion of the resin will help you know whether the mold has cured the right way. Remember that the part should feel dry, hard, and smooth to the touch. However, if it still feels wet or tacky, you have to let it cure for a longer time.
You can expect the waiting period to be between 24 and 72 hours based on the surrounding temperature of the resin and the surroundings. Plus, incorrect measurements or mixing may result in improper curing.
Here’s the best way you can solve this issue. Place the uncured resin dice in a freezer overnight so that it solidifies properly. You can then pop the resin out of its mold and place it in your oven on low heat settings. This will surely help activate the procedure of curing.
E. Demolding
When the dice casting is completely cured, you can start with the demolding procedure, whereby the dice are removed from the silicone molds.
Here are some things to keep in mind during this step:
Take extra care while removing a mold as if it tears, it would become unusable.
There will also be some material along the sides and edges of the mold, which is commonly called sprue. It’s very useful in making up for any unexpected shrinkage in the shape of the dice while it’s curing.
Unless a polished mold is used, the dice might appear cloudy and matte. But don’t worry, you can fix this in the final step.
Finishing Touches
At this point, the procedure is almost complete, and what remains is providing a few finishing touches to the die. And for that, you must proceed as follows:
Step 1
Firstly, you’ll have to remove the extra material or sprue as, despite its usefulness in curing, it can make rolling the die difficult. You can do this using any small sharp tool such as a knife.
Step 2
After you’ve removed the sprue, the surface of the dice would still be slightly rough. To make it smoother, you can wipe it with sandpaper. Initially, using a 150-grit sandpaper piece will be ideal for the smoothening process, but make sure you don’t remove too much resin than required.
Step 3
Continue this process with a 180-grit and then a 220-grit sandpaper piece, and continue increasing the fineness till you’re satisfied with the smoothness. Generally, the sandpaper grit has to be increased to 3000 as that will create a uniform final finish.
A wise precaution to take would be to use water on the surface between every sanding to ensure minimum dust production during the process.
Step 4
The next step would be to polish the dice using resin polish, as that will make the surface smooth and glossy. You can also add some fine details to the dice using acrylic paint, draw borders on its edges, or paint the numbers that you’ve engraved on it.
Another way you can make the numbers prominent is by filling them with ultra-fine point markers. Do it by following the engraved grooves carefully, and you’re good to go.
Making Resin Dice Molds
Once you’re conversant with the basics of making resin dice, you may even try making dice molds. It’s always better to make the molds on your own using silicone, as this would let you come up with dice of multiple looks and designs. So, there won’t be any limit to how creative you can get!
Knowing the different types of molds that can be made is important in this regard. While open-faced molds have one side open to facilitate easy pouring, squish molds are slightly difficult to use since they are divided into two parts.
Try making molds of different shapes and designs to see which one is most suited for you.
All That You Will Need
Silicone resin
Clay or plasticine
A master or original dice
Goggles and gloves
Containers and cups to mix the silicone
Container for the dice
Mixing tool or spoon
Why Is Silicone Rubber The Best For Making Die Molds?
The most noteworthy feature of silicone is that it doesn’t adhere to materials like resin, which makes it the most suitable base for making molds. This makes it effortless to take out the resin piece from the mold. Other advantages of this material include:
It’s highly durable
The molds prepared are reusable
Molds are pliable and soft
It’s safe for use
Choosing A Quality Silicone Rubber Kit
Since you will always want your molds to be perfect, it’s important to choose a good-quality silicone for the purpose. Here are some points to consider while choosing a silicone mold-making kit.
Ease Of Use
The silicone in the kit should be easy to pour and mix and should ideally have a mixing ratio of 1:1 by weight. This will help you prepare the mixture within minutes just by stirring it a little. Plus, the silicone should be able to eliminate all bubbles in a few hours so that no degassing chamber is needed.
And after the silicone cures, it will turn soft, transparent, and flexible, just what you need for making the perfect dice.
Safe For Use
The market is overflowing with silicone products for mold-making that come with toxic substances and may emit suffocating fumes and odors. So, it’s a must to ensure that the silicone you’re going for is totally safe for use.
Versatile
Ideally, the silicone should be usable for all types of dice molds, and along with different decorative items such as mica pigments and glitters. This will ensure you’re able to create just the design and shape that you desire.
In our opinion, the Silicone Mold-Making Kit from LET’S RESIN is an ideal choice for making dice molds quickly and effectively as it meets all the above requirements perfectly.
The Procedure
A. Preparatory Steps
While you’re working with silicone, you must be careful to ensure nothing comes in the way as that might disrupt the procedure and give rise to partially effective results. This is why it’s essential to prepare the working area in the right way, keeping just the things that you need within close reach and removing all other extra items.
Also, you’ll need to be clear about the type of mold that you’ll make, that is, whether it’ll be a one-part or a two-part mold. In this article, we’ll mainly deal with one-part molds that are totally sealed except for a small opening for pouring resin.
B. The Mixing And The Pouring
Prior to mixing the silicone, you must prepare the original dice. After that’s done, heat the tip of a pin and push the heated end into a corner of the dice. Follow this by taking some plasticine and sticking it to the bottom of a container. Then place the pinned corner of the dice into the plasticine while ensuring that the dice is upright and balanced.
Be careful not to use a very big container for the purpose as that will lead you to waste a lot of silicone. Here are the next steps that you need to follow.
Step 1
For mixing the silicone, go through the instructions on the package of the product carefully. Keep in mind silicones from all brands may not have the same curing time or mixing ratio. After you have a clear idea about the mixing ratio and the other essentials, mix both the parts in the silicone kit thoroughly in the mixing cups you’re using.
Step 2
Now it’s time to pour the properly mixed silicone into the container which has the original die. See to it that you cover the die the right way but be careful not to dislodge it. Continue to pour the mixture till it’s around 5 mm above the top of the dice.
Step 3
At this point, you’ll have to do away with the few air bubbles that might persist in the silicone mixture. Tap lightly on the sides of the container, and the bubbles will be released.
Step 4
Finally, you must allow the silicone to cure for the duration mentioned on the packaging or the manual coming with the kit. The majority of products take nearly a day to dry entirely.
Creating the other type, that is, the open-faced dice mold, might seem easier to you if you’re making molds for the first time.
For this procedure, you’ll have to use some plasticine to cover just one face of the dice. This would provide the piece with enough thickness and height to stand upright on its own. Note that half an inch is the perfect height for such a mold.
Now, you must place the piece in the container and pour the silicone into it. After giving it some time to cure, the mold will be ready for use.
Some Interesting Resin Dice Ideas
Mica Shimmer Dice
As mentioned earlier, mica powder is an ideal colorant for resin. And a unique way of using this colorant would be to create an elegant iridescent and shimmer look. You can obtain dice with a white and black marbled texture or that with some metal leaf chunks and pink mica powder.
Here’s how you can get this look in your dice:
Step 1
Mix some mica with the liquid resin and stir until there’s an even distribution of the powder over the resin. Begin the procedure with ⅛ tsp and continue adding more in increasing amounts till you get the color that you want.
To bring in more variation in the color, you can combine alcohol ink with mica powder.
Step 2
Next, pour the resin into the mold and wait for the dice to cure. The resin will be thickened by the mica powder, which will speed up the curing phase.
Using Gold Leaf On The Dice
You can get an eye-catching sparkle effect on your dice using gold leaf. Notably, metal leaf comes in various colors and is basically an ultralight colored foil. It remains suspended in a resin mixture while the glitter sinks to the bottom of a mold.
You can create this effect in your dice in the following steps:
Step 1
Add one metal leaf to the liquid resin to be used for making the dice.
Step 2
Mix it properly with the resin using a stirrer, breaking up any larger piece therein. Repeated stirring will help break up the metal into smaller pieces.
Step 3
Now, pour the mixture into the resin dice mold, pushing the larger pieces in place using a cocktail stick or toothpick.
Step 4
Let the dice cure for the duration advised in the packaging or manual coming with the resin product.
Transparent Dice
Transparent dice have a distinct appeal to them, with light shining through the clear faces of the dice. This ultimately creates an effect similar to that of colored glass or gemstones.
You can choose contrasting colors to create a variety of beautiful effects in such dice. To make such transparent dice, start off by adding a drop of alcohol ink to the resin and stir till there are no streaks of color left in it.
Notably, since alcohol ink is extremely potent, a drop of it is enough to create a light color in the dice. Adding 2 to 3 drops will make the shade medium, and the resin will turn opaque if you include more than four drops. Also, a white colorant can turn it opaque.
After the mixture is ready, continue as per the procedure we’ve described for making dice with pre-made molds.
Safety Precautions While Working With Casting Resin
Although the majority of synthetic resins are harmless after they have been cured completely, there are some health risks associated with their processing. So, here are the precautions you must take while handling resin before it’s cured.
Wearing Gloves
Remember that you should never let liquid resin or either of its components come in contact with the skin, as it can give rise to painful rashes, irritation, and other allergic reactions. And the best way to prevent any such situation is to wear a pair of nitrile gloves to shield the skin.
Wearing Goggles And A Mask
The eyes should always be protected while you’re working with the resin. So, make sure you wear safety goggles during work. Plus, to prevent toxic fumes from entering your body, it’s best to wear a respirator mask.
Maintain Proper Ventilation
Ensure that the room where you’re working is properly ventilated, as the fumes released by the resin will then move away easily. You can use a fan or open one window in the room if necessary.
How To Make Resin Dice Frequently Asked Questions
How To Remove Bubbles That Persist In The Resin Even After Tapping It?
Removing bubbles from the resin mixture after it’s added to the mold can be difficult. Using a toothpick to pop the bubbles directly is a way out. But you’ll have to be very careful as the toothpick must not touch any other part of the surface.
Another method is to heat the mixture slightly using a lighter, as that will make the bubbles rise to the surface and ultimately burst.
Can Resin Dice Be Called Balanced?
A die is regarded as well-balanced if it lands on a variety of random numbers every time, while unbalanced ones land on the same set each time. You can place resin dice in water and spin them around to test whether they are balanced. In case the same number shows on the top after every spin in the water, the die isn’t balanced and vice versa.
How Is Casting Resin Different From Epoxy Resin?
Epoxy resin is much more viscous than casting resin, which is why it dries faster. However, thin layers of paint can be slightly difficult to pour, and you should ensure that the layers are not more than 2 cm thick. On the other hand, several layers of paint can be mixed quickly in casting resin.
How Much Resin Do You Need To Fill An Entire Set Of Dice Molds?
Most of the dice molds for role-playing board games need approximately 147ml or 4.97 oz. of resin.
Final Words
Now that you’ve given our guide a read, we’re sure that you’ve got a grip on the techniques of making resin dice. So, decide on the procedure you want to attempt, gather all that’s needed, and get the ball rolling!
You must also consider the board game for which you’re making the dice, as the design and number of sides will vary based on that. Or else, you might even want to use the dice as a décor item for your home or as a part of jewelry, so add the dice embeds and colors accordingly.
If you have any other queries about making resin dice, write them down in the comments section below, and we’ll try our best to clear your doubts.
With that, we’ll wrap up for now, but there’s more fun content on your way, so watch out for this space. Till then, keep exploring your creativity!
Purifying distilled water involves the process known as "distillation," which eliminates all the nasty bacteria, minerals, and other contaminants, giving you water in its purest form.
Distilled water is ideal for machinery, health and medical devices, watering plants, and other applications requiring clean water.
While you can buy distilled water in the market, making your own distilled water at home would still be ideal and COST-EFFECTIVE.
Homemade distilled water is fairly easy to make. And if you're worried about the science behind it — don't be! We'll give you a step-by-step guide to distilling your own water at home.
How to Make Distilled Water at Home: Step-By-Step Distillation Process
We don't know if these concepts still reside in your mind: liquid water, water vapor, evaporation, and condensation process. These are the concepts you'll encounter when distilling water.
Not that we're always excited by all the science stuff, but we think this will interest you as much as it did us.
What excites us the most is that we can finally cut the cost of buying distilled water. It will be a lot cheaper, plus you can ensure a FULL STOCK since you can make it anytime at home.
Tools Needed to Distill Water
Before anything else, you must first prepare the following materials for this project:
Round baking rack
5-gallon stainless steel pot with lid
Glass bowl
Oven mitts
Ice cubes
Tap water
Once you've gathered all the necessary materials, you're ready to make distilled water at home.
There are only five easy steps to perform water distillation, and we promise this guide will easily teach you the home distillation process.
Step 1: Put the Baking Rack Inside the Pot and Pour the Water
Put the baking rack inside the 5-gallon stainless steel pot, and pour the tap water. You can add up to 2.5 gallons of water.
Basically, you're pouring water into the large pot until it reaches its middle. So, if you're planning to use a smaller pot, remember this rule of thumb.
Step 2: Place the Glass Bowl on Top of the Water
Once you've placed the baking rack inside the stainless steel pot and filled it with water, place the glass bowl on top. Essentially, the glass bowl should stay afloat on the water's surface.
The rack will keep the bowl from touching the base. This ensures enough space for air to circulate around the sides and on top of the bowl.
Step 3: Cover the Pot with the Lid and Fill it with Ice Cubes
Flip the lid UPSIDE DOWN and cover the pot — it should look concave if you're looking at it from the bottom.
After which, fill the inverted lid with ice cubes or an ice pack. Ice is essential in making distilled water. They cause water vapor to quickly condense at the side of the lid facing the inside of the pot.
When water boils, it produces steam. As steam contacts the cold lid, it will turn back into the water, and the droplets will fall into the container.
Step 4: Boil Water
On your stovetop burner, start boiling water between medium to medium-high heat. You want the pot to be hot enough to allow the pot water to simmer but NOT completely boil (around 180 to 200 degrees Fahrenheit).
Keep the water simmering for 45 minutes. Check the ice time and again and REFILL it as necessary. Dump the melted ice on the sink by lifting the lid. Use oven mitts to protect your hands from the hot cookware.
Step 5: Cool and Store
After 45 minutes of distilling water or until all the tap water has evaporated, condensed, and dropped in your bowl, it's time to turn the burner off. The water you collected is already distilled water.
Let the distilledwater cool down completely before storing it in a glass bottle or any clean container. Ensuring the cleanliness of the container ensures that you're storing clean water, which constitutes LONG-TERM storage.
We highly suggest you store distilled water in a cool and dry place away from direct sunlight.
What is Distilled Water?
This physical process of distillation involves changing the state of water from liquid form to water vapor through condensation. Hence, the product of this process is called distilled water.
So basically, distilled water is purified water you get from condensing water vapor or steam out of impure water.
What Distillation Removes from Water
This process eliminates minerals, salt, harmful bacteria, heavy metals, and other contaminants. Hence, it's also known as one of the water purification methods that remove impurities in water.
When purifying water using the distillation method, unwanted nasties are left behind while pure water vapor rises into thin air and re-condenses.
What Types of Water Can You Distill?
There are many types of water you can purify and turn into distilled water. These include:
Tap water
Water from streams
Well water
Snow
Rainwater
Sea water
Plants and damp soil
Methods of Distilling Water
Aside from the distillation method we taught you in the previous sections, other ways exist to make distilled water.
Here are other methods you can try:
Collect water from an outside container - this is quite similar to the pot and bowl method we taught you earlier. But instead of placing the container inside the pot, you use an outside container to collect the distilled water. In this method, you can use a funnel over a boiling water container connected to the collection bottle with aquarium tubing. You must ensure that the tubing is lower than the funnel to successfully drain the distilled water into your collection bottle and secure it tightly with duct tape. This is advantageous, as it minimizes the risk of contamination which is essential if you intend to make drinking water.
Distilled rainwater or snow - rain and snow are also called naturally distilled water. If you remember, in the water cycle, the sea, lake, land, and river water evaporates and condenses in the atmosphere to fall as precipitation. You can collect rainwater or snow with a large container. Keep the water at rest to let the sediments fall at the bottom. If you don't live in highly polluted areas, this pure water is definitely safe to drink. But you can also include filtration procedures using a coffee filter or boiling water.
Home distillation kits - a home distillation kit is also a cheap way to make distilled water, compared to those whose heat source requires fuel or electricity to operate and heat water. The cost of home distillation kits starts at $100. If you intend to purify water for drinking, cheaper kits are already good enough. Expensive kits are primarily used in labs or in making distilled water in large volumes to supply an entire house.
Note
Alternatively, you can also install a water line into your refrigerator for ready access to clean water.
Distill water from plants and mud - you can also make distilled water from basically any water source. One example is by extracting water from desert plants. You only need to:
Dig a hole in the ground,
Place a container at the bottom to collect the distilled water,
Fill in damp plants around the container inside the hole,
Cover the hole with plastic and secure it with rocks or dirt to ensure that no moisture escapes,
Place a pebble at the center of the plastic wrap to make a small depression. When the water evaporates, the water vapor condenses on the plastic, and droplets drip from the depression into your container.
What are the Uses of Distilled Water?
There are different uses for distilled water. While others use it as drinking water, others utilize distilled water for:
Hydrating house plants
Filling humidifiers
Steam ironing clothes
Cleaning wounds
Sterilizing bottles
Home aquariums and fish tanks
Filling CPAP machines
Car maintenance
What are the Benefits of Drinking Distilled Water Over Tap Water
As mentioned, some people prefer or can only drink purified water. That's why they opt to distill water at home, as it costs less than purchasing bottled water in stores.
Compared to tap water, distilled water doesn't contain any impurities. Distilling water removes waterborne pathogens, thus reducing the risk of diseases.
Distilled water is even PURER than filtered water and boiled water. Hence, if you're unsure of the water source, it's better to distill water before drinking.
Distilled Water FAQs
Let’s answer more questions for you!
How Long Does it Take to Distill Water?
The pot and bowl method takes about 45 minutes to distill water. But, if you’re using a larger pot with twice the volume of our indicated measurement, it will likely take longer to finish.
How Long Does Distilled Water Last?
If you store distilled water properly, it will surely last INDEFINITELY. We suggest using an airtight glass container and storing it in a cool and dry place to prevent contamination and bacteria build-up.
Is Distilled Water Safe to Drink?
Yes, you can definitely drink distilled water. But it has a flat taste and has already lost beneficial minerals, like calcium and magnesium, during distillation.
However, if the water contains impurities with a lower boiling point, it might contaminate the vapor, as well as the distilled water.
With its bland taste, dissolved minerals, and possible contamination, it MAY NOT BE THE BEST OPTION for drinking, though it is potable.
What is Another Way to Purify Water?
Reverse osmosis is another purifying technique. But, unlike in distillation, it doesn’t turn water into its purest form.
There you have it; a step-by-step guide to making distilled water, plus all the things you must know about it! Now that you know how to distill water from any water source, you no longer have to rely on store-bought distilled water.
We hope this article was able to help you. Feel free to revisit 'til you master the science behind distilled water!
A soaker hose makes an indispensable part of the gardening arsenal for most homeowners.
Who wouldn’t love having such an efficient watering system handy? You’ll love the virtually hands-free and consistent water supply, while your plants will love the targeted moisture. Win-win, we say!
But if you aren’t looking to spend a lot, you’ve come to the right place. We’ve curated a quick DIY guide that’ll help you make one from the comfort of your backyard. After all, hand-made care for your greens is the best expression of love.
So, without further ado, let’s begin!
What Do I Need To Make A Soaker Hose?
Making a soaker hose may sound like a lot of work, but it’s a fairly simple job. Moreover, you’ll find most materials in your garage. And even if you don’t, buying them won’t make you break the bank! On that note, here’s a list of the things you’ll need:
Charged drill
3/64 or similar drill bit
Electrical tape or hose cap
Garden hose
Garden hose splitter (optional)
A few things to note: while we opted for a charged drill to save time, you can also use a hammer and 20d nail. Look for any discarded hose (like the leaky one you forgot to throw out) before buying one.
Depending on the area to be covered, you might need a couple of those. Whatever be the case, you don’t need to buy a high-quality hose. Going for a cheaper option will also do the job just fine!
Now, let’s look at the steps involved.
Step 1
Lay the hose flat and make evenly spaced holes on one side using the drill or hammer. For best results, make the first hole about 18 inches away from the female end and maintain a distance of 2.5 to 3 inches.
If you want a sprinkler effect, drill the holes on multiple faces but make sure they don’t go all the way through to the opposite side. As the water flows through the hose, it’ll seep out of the holes and directly reach the roots with minimum evaporation.
Step 2
Once you’re done drilling the last hole, grab the end, fold and crimp it off by wrapping with electrical tape. Alternatively, you can screw in a hose cap to create a tight seal. If the leftover portion is too long, trim it before crimping. However, ensure that the length doesn’t become too short. Sealing one end of the hose forces the water to flow out gently from the holes.
Step 3
Leaving enough of the female end loose to connect it to the water source, place the hose in the desired area. If the area is too big, you might need to make another soaker and join the two using electrical tape. Don’t try to stretch a single hose to cover a large area as too much tautness can damage it.
Furthermore, you can also decide if the soaker system should be kept permanent or movable. For the former, we suggest burying the hose around 2 inches deep underground. This is especially beneficial for more water-hungry plants or areas that experience severe drought. Other than that, setting the hose in the soil will also come in handy if you plan to double it for covering multiple rows of plants.
In case you want to keep the soaker hose moveable, it'd be a good idea to secure its position. Use some heavy objects like stones or sticks at every turn to provide adequate support. Make sure that the stone or stick is placed in a way that doesn't damage the hose.
Step 4
With everything done, it’s now time to switch on the water supply. But before that, there’s one small thing that should be taken care of. If the hose isn't compatible with a spigot, it may be challenging to fit it to a tap. In that case, we’d recommend buying a good garden splitter to have an unhindered water flow.
Some General Tips
So that your soaker hose covers all the bases, here are some handy tips to follow:
If the air in your area is too dry, consider burying the hose under a few inches of mulch to minimize evaporation.
In an ideal scenario, it’s advisable to run the soaker hose for a maximum of 30 minutes, twice a week. That said, you may adjust the soaking according to the watering requirements. Apart from that, don’t engage the tap or spigot to its maximum capacity.
Since soaking is essentially a high-precision task, you’d want to keep the water flow nice and slow. We’d recommend opening the tap just enough to allow the water to seep through the holes.
You may get a water hose timer for optimum water conservation. Simply set it up to have a regular reminder about the watering schedule. Moreover, the ones with a built-in rain sensor automatically skip watering if the soil is too moist.
Buried soaker hose should be cleaned regularly. In case of hose cap seals, take out the cap and flush the pipe at least once in two weeks to prevent clogs. And for the ones with an electrical-tape sealing, replace the tape after every wash to keep the pipe usable for long.
Lastly, don’t throw out your old garden hose just because the color has worn off! If it doesn’t have any significant wear and tear, preserve it for future use. Besides, keep an eye on the curb on the trash day for old hoses being thrown out, especially during early spring.
Final Words
So, there you have it - an efficient DIY soaker hose!
Not only does a soaker hose make your job easy, but it also makes you less guilty about bothering your neighbors when you’re on vacation. Trust us; they will be delighted to know that all they have to do is turn on the spigot for a few minutes twice a day.
With that, it’s time for us to bid goodbye. But before we leave, let us share a pro tip: clean the pipe thoroughly before converting it into a soaker hose. This way, you’ll have unobstructed water flow.
It’s true that geodes are one of the most beautiful geological creations. And what if we tell you that you can create one at home?
These rock formations have intrigued geologists and laymen alike because of the beauty that they present. There’s no doubt that they are one of the most enigmatic rock formations that you can come across. But it’s not easy to procure one for use as a decorative item in your living room.
However, you can make a resin geode, which, when done right, looks almost the same as a natural one. But in order to achieve the best results, you need to know how to make resin geodes the right way.
That’s why we have designed this guide with all that you need to know about making resin geodes. With our guidance and your creative instincts, you will be able to create a masterpiece in no time.
So, without any further delay, let’s check it out!
How To Make A Resin Geode
Resin Geodes | The Basics
It goes without saying that resin geodes are not natural, but you can make them look like one with some effort. Natural geodes are rock formations that reveal enchanting forms once they are cracked open.
Resin geodes are artistic alternatives to natural ones. Because the resin is pretty soft when molten, it allows you to play with the patterns and experiment as much as you want. And when it dries up, it hardens to deliver a finished look.
Besides, you can consider putting acrylic gems, crystals, and glass globules to make the resin geodes look even better. And it will surely become one of the centerpieces in your drawing room and a conversation starter at every party. You can consider making it any shape and size that you want. It can be as small as a coaster or as big as a magnificent sculpture!
Making A Resin Geode
Unless you have worked with resin before, the material may seem a little intimidating.
But trust us- it is not very difficult to work with, and once you read this guide, you will have a fair idea about how to finish the job without much hassle. All that you need to do is remember a few important things and remain patient throughout the process.
On that note, here are the steps to make a resin geode.
Step 1
Before you can go into the intricacies of making a resin geode, it is crucial that you be well-prepared. By this, we mean that you should keep all the required materials handy and prepare the workspace properly.
Things That You Will Need
Resins
Masking tape
Decorative items
Wet wipes and cleaning alcohol
Acrylic paints
Spatula and sticks
Wooden panel and non-stretched canvas
Safety gloves, apron, glasses, drop cloths, and a respirator
Once you have all the materials, it is time you begin with the process. The first step is to start mixing the resin and make sure that you strictly adhere to the instructions printed on the package.
Your safety and protection are also important, so make sure that you wear some protective gloves and an apron before working. Likewise, use a respirator and put on safety glasses to protect your face.
Other than that, we’d suggest laying a protective drop cloth on the work surface to ensure that it does not incur any damage. An additional pro tip: tape up all the sides of the canvas properly to ensure that there is no damage in case the resin starts to drip. Even if you see a few drips, just remove the tapes, and cleaning the surface will become super simple.
Moreover, ensure that the surface you are working on is completely stable and straight. If it is slanted, then chances are that the resin will eventually become lopsided.
Step 2
Like most other DIY projects, making a resin geode also requires a good amount of planning. Before beginning with the work, we would suggest that you keep good images and designs of resin geodes as references.
Once you decide on the design, you can simply draw lines accordingly on the canvas to recreate the look. You will find fascinating images of resin geodes on the internet and can choose any that you like.
When you are taking the reference, ensure that you draw the lines and note which color to place next to the other. If this idea does not appeal to you, simply take the line reference and choose to put the colors more spontaneously.
Step 3
After you are done creating designs outlines, you can simply use some acrylic colors to start painting on the canvas. We would suggest that you try sticking to the reference lines to ensure that the design is up to the mark.
During painting, you can choose to make some additions too. Consider putting metallic foils or trendy glitters into the mix.
Step 4
Apart from foils and glitters, you can make other additions too. Some people like adding glass and crystals to their geode designs. If you plan on doing the same, remember that you make the additions only after the paint has dried up.
To make sure that the attachments are secure, use good quality craft glue. This will help the embellishments to stick to their place even after you add a layer of resin.
Step 5
As we have already mentioned before, in order to mix the resin properly, it is an absolute must to read the instructions carefully. We would also recommend that you mix the resin in small bottles so that you can have more color variations and less wastage. You can either add paint or powder in these bottles to get the resin colored according to your choice.
Unless you want the colors to mix spontaneously, you have to follow some procedures. For that, make sure that you put the colors in different containers and apply them one after the other, only when the previous one has dried up.
But we know that there are some people who like the resin mixing naturally and love the unconstrained flow better. It is completely up to you about which method you want to go for. Just keep a wooden stick handy so that you can adjust the resin according to your requirement.
Step 6
For making your resin geode even more beautiful, consider putting glitter-embedded layers in different parts of your canvas. You might be wondering why you should do it so late in the process. So, let us break it down for you.
If you do it earlier, the chances are that the sparkles will settle and not remain significantly visible. In order to keep the resin near the surface, it is best that you add sparkles and glitters in different batches and keep adding them in succession.
Step 7
Besides making great designs, it is crucial to make sure that you maintain your work well. And for that, it is an absolute must to put a clear coat on your resin geode.
Apart from protecting your artwork, it also helps to add an amazing gloss to it. But keep in mind that if you have added a lot of glitters to the resin, adding a clear coat might diminish the texture of the geode. Keep this in mind, and decide accordingly! But rest assured that an effective application of a clear coat will help your artwork look even better.
In case you are making a piece of resin furniture like a table or a wardrobe, make sure that you apply a thick topcoat. This is essential for making the surface smooth and will help you prevent scratches from forming.
How To Make The Best Use Of Resin Geodes?
As John Keats had said, ‘a thing of beauty is a joy forever.’ This holds true for resin geodes as they can be turned into exquisite artworks that will add immense beauty to your home décor. You can try to imitate natural geodes with the help of resins, as we have already discussed, and add a dash of glitter and sequins to make them look better.
Get as creative as possible, and do not be scared of experimenting. Once you do that, you will see that the artwork is turning into something very similar to the natural geodes. And you can use the resin geodes to make tabletops or coasters, anything that you desire. As we said, let your creativity run wild!
A Glow Up With Crystals
After you are done practicing a few times, you can start experimenting with crystals. It is not a difficult process once you get the hang of it. There are 2 main ways of doing it.
Working With Big Crystals
Some crystals are big in size, almost as large as broken glass pieces. When you are dealing with big crystals, we would suggest that you put them on the surface first and hold them in place with the help of craft glue.
Once you are done fixing the crystals on the surface, pour the resin carefully to secure them properly.
Working With Small Crystals
On the other hand, if you decide to use smaller pieces of crystals, it is best to mix them with the resin instead of applying them separately. They will get fixed to the spots as the resin hardens over time. In this case, you can skip a step and get done with the artwork within a short span.
Final Words
That’s all for today, friends!
Hope you had a great time learning about how to make beautiful resin geodes. We also hope that you will be able to implement the methods we have shared for the best results. Also, we wish you loads of good luck and that you have fun times with creating the resin geode.
Keep in mind that creativity is at its peak when you are enjoying the process. So, try to channel your energy to ensure that the beauty comes through. In case you have any more queries, reach out to us in the comments section below. And keep a watch on this space for more interesting reads.
One thing every house improvement enthusiast, DIY geek or interior decorator needs is a dedicated crafting table. A craft table where they can work on the ideas they have and the ideas they have collected from the web. In addition, they need a table that does not interfere with their work-flow, to say the least, but what they hope for is to find or build a craft table that can help them get things done quickly. This article shows a light of hope to DIY enthusiasts who do not know how to make a crafting table that will help them streamline their workflow and organize everything related to the work at hand.
A word of caution, before we begin, the ideas presented here are not definitive, by any means, but then DIY enthusiasts just need a direction and a map. They can figure out the rest on their own. Imagination plays the creator role in this equation and it will set the rules of the game as you play.
5 key considerations when making a crafting table
Space to move around
One of the key considerations when making a craft table is related to space on and around the table. A design of the table should be such that there is enough space on the table to work on the project and there should be enough room around the table to move freely from one place to another when working on a DIY project.
Often people find their movement constrained because of the shape and size of the table, which reduces their productivity. In addition, due to the lack of space on the crafting table, a person needs to shift parts of the project from one place to another in order to make space. Constant toing and froing irritates, to say the least and moving things from one place to another seriously slows down the project.
Another feature that one should keep in mind when making a craft table is storage space. It is important that there is plenty of storage space in the crafting table. It will help in keeping things organized and finding them when needed. When building storage space beneath or above the crafting table, one should always keep in mind that craft items come in various shapes and sizes and there is absolutely no way to know what kind of items you will need to store in the future. Therefore, one should make some removable dividers between the shelves, to make the storage in the table useful in the future as well.
Regardless of what kinds of projects the crafter undertakes, a power source is always required. One should have an electrical board with more than one 6A, 16A and 32A AC power sockets and switches installed in the crafting area. This will save the time that gets wasted in removing one plug and attaching another, this significantly slows down the process. In the absence of a permanent solution, one can at least have a power strip extension board around the craft table, like the one shown below.
One has to be on its feet to complete certain DIY activities, but there are some DIY projects that require the person to sit comfortably to do the task at hand. It is, therefore, important to have a comfortable and preferably height-adjusting chair in the craft room, if the chair has wheels it will be even better. The wheels will be helpful in moving around without getting up from the chair, every time the project demands it.
Ideally one should have a lot of natural light in the crafting room, but if that is not possible than proper artificial lighting should be used. Proper lighting is as important for a good crafting table as anything else discussed above. It is hard to focus on your work in a poorly lit area. In the absence of proper lighting, it would be hard to see the exact output produced at any given point. It holds true for the most of the projects. Although there would be some projects that may not need such a close monitoring, but still it is better to have proper lighting on the craft table. Generally speaking, one needs to constantly check the development of the project in order to rectify the error if and when it happens. This will minimize the wastage. When installing overhead lights, it is recommended to also install table lamps to focus on the project area.
Like proper lighting, proper music is an essential item to have in a crafting room. A music source installed near the crafting table with a good supply of music to keep you engaged is recommended. Music will keep the motivation at the optimum level, which will let the creative juice flow freely.
Bonus Tip - Get inspired
Inspiration boosts creativity. In truly inspired moments creative juices flow like torrents and when it comes to inspiring people nothing works better than written words. It is, therefore, important that one has an inspiration wall made in a prominent place around the crafts table.
The inspiration wall in the craft room should have some inspiring quotes and there should be space to hang things that the person has worked on in the past. As the saying goes, nothing inspires more than success. Nothing inspires more than successfully completed projects.
How to make a perfect all-purpose crafting table
Step one: List down the activities
In almost everything that one does, the first step is always involves knowing one's objective. This holds true for making a craft table as well. The first should be to make a list of kinds of projects you will undertake. This will work as a basic building block for an all-purpose craft table design.
All DIY activities may not need separate setup, but some of them do, so you need to know what kind of space you require to do what. As discussed above, you will also need to build a storage space to keep different kinds of items in or around the crafting table. Make a list of shapes and sizes things that you may want to store.
Material and tools required to make a craft table will almost be the same irrespective of the crafting table you are going to make. However, there could be some specific tools and material that you may need. You should make a list of those as well.
Plywood would be the best material for a craft table, but you can also go for MDF. Both have their own advantages and disadvantages. Along with the plywood or MDF, you will also need nails, industrial strength adhesives, laminates, various sizes of screws, measuring tape, wood cutting tools, hammer, drill machine and safety gear to make a crafting table.
Step 3: Measure it and build it
The final step is about execution. The time has come to begin working on your first DIY project, which will work as a platform on which you will bring all your DIY ideas to life. Caution and meticulousness are two important traits at this level. These will help you build the crafting table without wasting your resources.
After all the details have been laid, it is time to get inspired. And we cannot think of a better way to inspire a DIY geek than showing them examples of some exciting yet functional craft tables.
By showing how to make a crafting table that can help you organize everything in one place, the article has tried to emphasize that like any DIY project, making a craft table is also tamable. Like any other project making a crafting table should also be taken as a DIY initiative. The end result will not only produce a wonderful table but also give you immense satisfaction, the importance of which can never be overstated.
What’s worse than knowing there’s a mosquito around you? The inability to locate it!
That irritating buzzing, combined with occasional wing flaps and the thought of them carrying some disease - don’t even get us started on the frustration! You set out on a desperate search for their hideout, but all in vain.
If you’re yet to face this, we assure you the day is closer than you think. But that’s only till you find an effective way to prevent it. And that’s why, we have come with a dozen DIY methods to help you in luring a mosquito out of hiding.
From natural ingredients to market-bought tools and even your body, we have covered it all for you to take a pick.
To get the ball rolling, let’s talk about one of the most reliable DIY methods - the yeast trap. These pests have a natural liking for CO2 (carbon dioxide), and its high content in yeast acts as the bait for them.
To set up this trap, here are the things you will need:
Active yeast
Brown sugar
1 cup boiling water
Plastic soda bottle
Duct tape
Spray paint/black construction paper
Setting The Trap
To begin with, carefully cut the empty soda bottle just below the neck area (where it flares out to meet the main section). Remove the cap from the resultant ‘neckpiece,’ and insert it into the bottom cylinder in an inverted manner, resembling a funnel.
While at it, don’t push the neck all the way down to the bottom of the cylinder. Ensure that you leave enough room to accommodate a cup of liquid and some air space. Using duct tape, secure the funnel with the bottle.
Not only does the tape hold the funnel in place, but it also seals the edges through which the mosquitoes might escape. Once done, cover the bottle using spray paint or construction paper. Leave it to dry.
Next, add about ¼ cup of brown sugar to 1 cup of boiling water. Stir thoroughly until the sugar is completely dissolved. Then, leave this solution to cool until you can comfortably stick your finger into it.
If the solution is too hot, it will kill the yeast. On the other hand, if it’s too cold, the yeast will not activate fully. So ideally, the temperature should be between 120 and 130 degrees Fahrenheit. Hence we’d recommend using a cooking thermometer to keep the temperature in check.
When the solution reaches the correct temperature, gently mix in a packet of yeast and pour it down the funnel. Your yeast trap is ready! Since the trap is meant to attract mosquitoes, don’t keep it too close to your sofa or bed. Instead, place it near the outer perimeter of the rooms.
How Does It Work?
Yeast reacts with sugar to release CO2 in a process known as fermentation. The mosquitoes follow the trail of CO2 to enter the bottle and get trapped due to the sealed edges. After some time, they get fatigued and drown into the solution. If you see too many mosquitoes getting trapped, change the solution frequently to keep it effective.
Likewise, you may adjust the quantity of yeast and sugar according to your requirement.
High velocity fans can be converted into an excellent mosquito trap with a little work. While you may also use a box fan, we prefer high-velocity fans as they produce a large volume of air.
Here are the things you will need:
High-velocity fan
Mesh screen
Strong magnets/plastic zip ties
Rubbing alcohol
Water
Paper towel
Spray bottle
Scissors
Setting The Trap
Firstly, place the fan near an area that you think houses the most mosquitoes (the rear side should face that area). If there’s no power outlet there, get hold of an extension cord. Once you’re happy with the placement, take the mesh screen and cut it to match the size of the fan’s face (round metal frame).
Make sure that the holes aren’t too small for the mosquitoes to pass through. Then, wrap it tightly around the fan so that the edges of the screen overlap with the frame’s sides. Secure it firmly using magnets. If your fan doesn’t have a flat metal frame, use plastic zip ties.
On the side, add equal parts of rubbing alcohol and water in the spray bottle.
How Does It Work?
Switch on the fan at a moderate speed. As it draws air to blow out from the front, the mosquitoes also get sucked (like a vacuum cleaner) to get trapped in the mesh screen. Let the fan run for some time.
Next, turn off the fan and spray the diluted alcohol on the screen with focus on the trapped mosquitoes. The rubbing alcohol will kill them. Ensure that you don’t get anything into the motor. At the same time, drench the paper towel with the same solution and place it directly below the fan.
Very carefully, take off the mesh screen and tap it lightly, so that the mosquitoes fall on the towel. Dispose of both and wipe the fan clean with a dry cloth.
The Beer Trap
You can also substitute the yeast and sugar solution for half a can of old beer. Several studies have shown that although mosquitoes don’t like the taste, they have a natural inclination towards the smell of alcohol.
Increase CO2
If you are too impatient to wait for the yeast trap to work, spraying a bike inflator will get the job done rather quickly. However, you need to be extremely careful while working with it, as increased CO2 levels can cause dizziness, nausea, headaches, faster heartbeats and a lot of other health complications.
Thus, we’d not recommend employing this method in very closed spaces. Furthermore, use a mask and ventilate the area thoroughly once you get rid of the mosquitoes.
A safer method to do this would be to purchase a mosquito magnet. Modern mosquito magnets use a catalyst, which is practically a set of ceramic beads or a ceramic grid coated with platinum. This catalyst directly converts the propane to release heat and CO2 without requiring a flame.
Moreover, the octanol (a chemical that attracts mosquitoes) cartridge also intensifies the appeal. The resultant combination of gases and chemicals draws mosquitoes, who then come near the source. As they get closer, a vacuum-like fan sucks them into a net bag, where they dehydrate and die.
The biggest advantage of using a mosquito trap is that it doesn’t release any harmful byproducts, like carbon monoxide or nitrogen oxides. Besides, the lack of flame reduces the risk of fire accidents.
The Flower Method
Besides amping up the ambiance of your room, flowers also lure mosquitoes out of their hiding. Since they love feeding on the nectar, you will notice quite a few mosquitoes around the flowers, especially at night. Buy yourself a bouquet or keep an assortment of your favorite flowers in rooms most affected by these pests.
And as we were not very confident about our ability to kill them with our bare hands, we fell back to a zapper.
Although this method may not show speedy results like the yeast trap, it’s effective nonetheless. Make sure to keep the flowers fresh or replace them as soon as they start drying out.
Using Fragrance
Colognes and perfumes that have a floral fragrance are said to attract mosquitoes. Additionally, skincare products that contain lactic acid (which is also produced naturally by humans with sweat) are incredibly enticing for them. Pour a few drops of any such product on every nook and corner of the house to make the mosquitoes come out.
Alternatively, you can also wear your favorite perfume or put on some lotion and then walk around the areas which tend to house the most mosquitoes. In that case, remain cautious to prevent those annoying mosquito bites!
An important thing to note here is that not all fragrances are likable for mosquitoes. So, using products that smell like the following may not serve the purpose of bringing them out:
Garlic
Basil
Lemongrass
Peppermint
Neem (also known as Azadirachta Indica, nimtree, or Indian Lilac)
Systematic Searching
The systematic searching technique is most useful for finding (and killing) mosquitoes in confined spaces. Plus, you don’t need any fancy gadgets to accomplish the task. A flashlight, zapper, and some concentration will do the job!
In case you plan to use this method for a larger space, here’s how you can do it. Start with confining the place as much as possible. You can use moveable furniture or large cardboard boxes to do this (but keep sufficient space for you to move around). Once done, close all doors and windows, and dim the lights.
Using a flashlight, scan every inch of the wall, floor and ceiling. Blow slightly near the corners for the CO2 effect; this should bring the mosquitoes out from their hiding. Be careful not to lose focus and zap quickly as soon as you spot them.
Light Trap
You can also implement this plan with a little alteration and without confining the space. Turn on a small light source and keep it stationary. Keep the flashlight turned off for the time being. After some time, the mosquitoes are likely to follow the light and settle on a nearby surface.
Now, slowly move the flashlight to that position while keeping focus on the mosquito. This will cast a bigger and better shadow for you to zap it away.
The Technology Trap
The technology trap works pretty much the same way as systematic searching, where you don’t even have to get out of your bed.
Switch off the lights in your room and get cozy under the blanket. Then, increase the brightness of your phone or tablet to the maximum. Here, you can continue holding the device, or you can place it on your chest (over the blanket). The mosquitoes will definitely follow the light, come near you, or even sit on the screen.
Again, don’t lose vision on them. Keep your zapper ready and reflexes sharp to deliver that killer strike, but make sure you don’t damage the device.
Stagnant Water
It’s a no-brainer that stagnant water is a preferable breeding ground for mosquitoes. But what if we told you that you could also use it to trap them? By adding household items to stagnant water, you can turn them into virtually death traps.
Oil
A thin layer of oil can effectively trap mosquitoes, along with suffocating the larvae. For this, you can use any natural oil like vegetable, olive, or cinnamon oil. Moreover, you don’t need more than 1 teaspoon per gallon of water. However, don’t use it for water bodies that have fish.
Soap
Adding a few drops of any soap to a body of stagnant water reduces its surface tension, which in turn, drowns the mosquitoes.
Apple Cider Vinegar
Sure, this all-organic substance doesn’t kill adult mosquitoes, but is potent enough to wipe off larvae when used in higher concentration.
Bleach
Much like apple cider vinegar, bleach can be used to kill the larvae. And since it’s essentially a toxic substance, make sure that the diluted water doesn’t mix with drinking water or feed plants and animals.
Till now, we’ve seen the use of everyday objects to lure mosquitoes out of their hidings. But to be honest-nothing attracts them more than a human body. So, in the following sections, we discuss how you can use your body to form that ideal bait.
Using Pore Secretions
Upon eating certain food, our pores secrete certain substances like salt, potassium and lactic acid that attract thirsty female mosquitoes looking for blood like no other. Crisps, salty potato snacks and soups are a few things that increase the level of salt in our body.
Similarly, sugary treats mimic the nectar-like sweetness of flowers. On the other hand, fruits like avocado and bananas are a rich source of potassium. And if you enjoy a glass of beer or two in the day, the job is already done.
If you want to employ this method, be extra cautious to avoid food that can affect your health.
Using Body Heat
It may come as surprising for many that mosquitoes can pick up thermal sensory information even from a distance. Simply put, they are naturally fond of warmed body animals because of their blood-producing abilities. This is one of the reasons why people who feel hot to touch are more prone to mosquito bites.
Hence, increasing body temperature can effectively lure mosquitoes, and there are several ways to do that.
Working Out
The heat, sweat and odor that your body produces after a good workout is simply irresistible for mosquitoes. But if working out per se is not quite your thing, you may even go for a run or do some heavy duty cleaning.
After you’re done, walk around the room to bring out as many mosquitoes as possible before your body temperature and breathing become normal.
Take A Hot Shower
While taking a hot (not lukewarm) shower may not make you sweat or breathe profusely, the resultant body temperature is still good for mosquitoes to hang around. Apart from that, sitting by a fireplace or getting snuggly under a blanket will also have the same effect.
The only thing to keep in mind for this technique is that you need to bear the heat for long enough to sweat considerably. Otherwise, it won’t show any significant results.
Assistance From A Mom-To-Be
Okay, this is us going over the top, but pregnant women are more susceptible to mosquito bites. As you may already know, frequent hot flashes are a common pregnancy symptom, thereby making them more attractive to these pests. In addition, the extra body weight during this time causes intensive breathing that makes them exhale more CO2 than usual.
So, if you have a pregnant friend or family member, it may not be a bad idea to ask them for help. However, this is a risky attempt, as mosquitoes are active carriers of many diseases. Ensure that you kill them before they can bite her to prevent any mishap.
Wait For A Full Moon Night
Aligning your mosquito hunt with a full moon night may not sound very romantic, but will get your job done more effectively nonetheless. Several studies have proven that for unknown reasons, mosquitoes become 500% more active during a full moon than on any other day.
So, grab your zapper or mosquito magnet to pull off a (not so) fun all-nighter!
Final Words
The list was long because we didn’t want to leave out any trick from the book!
From their buzzing to the carrying of diseases, mosquitoes are every bit annoying. That’s why, it’s important to get them out of their hiding and get rid of them.
But it’s still advisable to keep them away in the first place. And the best way to achieve this is by keeping your surroundings clean. Additionally, use natural mosquito repellents and carry out regular mosquito control drives with the help of professionals. Prevention is better than cure for a reason!
On that note, it’s time for us to wrap up today’s guide. We hope that by now, you have decided on a method for your next weekend's activity. Do let us know about it in the comments down below.
Outdoor Christmas trees can be stopped from blowing over through various means, like planning the tree’s location to securing it in its position. Keeping the tree as stationary as possible without it toppling over will help it remain pristine and gorgeous throughout the holiday season.
Artificial or natural, Christmas trees tend to fall over during strong winds, which can become frustrating very quickly.
And Christmas celebrations are smack-dab in the middle of the winter season, which means that you will see your tree topple very frequently. Of course, stopping this from happening will keep your tree looking just as good as it did the day you set it up.
So, here’s a guide to preventing trees from blowing over and sustaining unnecessary damage.
How to Keep Outdoor Christmas Trees From Falling Over
Winter winds can be very strong, and depending on where you live, they can be downright tempestuous. This makes the problem of fallen Christmas trees a difficult one to solve, particularly since it can damage both the tree and the Christmas decoration. After all, replacing broken ornaments and mending damaged tree branches can become a nightmare to deal with throughout the holidays.
If you’ve had prior experience with this issue, you may have already figured out what has to be done to solve it. The gist of it is to keep the tree stationary so no gust of wind is strong enough to knock your tree down. Of course, the difficulty of the problem lies with the approach rather than the immediate solution.
So, here’s what you can do to keep your outside Christmas tree from falling over in the winter winds:
Position your tree in the right spot
Use wires and stakes to secure the tree
Make use of heavy outdoor Christmas décor and tree ornaments
Get the right tree stand with a wide base
1. Picking The Right Location
Positioning your tree well can very well be the difference between a gorgeous, fully intact Christmas tree and a damaged, unsightly one.
One of the best ways to keep the tree from toppling over is to keep it in a sheltered location. By doing so, you will be limiting the chances of it facing strong gusts of wind, keeping it safe from any potential damage. Additionally, there will be no need to move it for the remainder of the Christmas and holiday season, making the decorative process a one-time task.
Places like the front porch or the patio provide ample shelter for the tree while making it the focal point of your home. The aesthetics of your home will be preserved while the tree remains safe from the elements.
Another great place to set up a Christmas tree for holiday-themed aesthetics is the yard. Of course, most yards are open and lack any surrounding structures to shield the tree, creating a few problems for the Christmas décor. That said, this can be worked around without any issues.
You can look at the weather forecasts and keep track of the wind direction using wind devices. Consider placing the tree next to your backyard shed or the house itself, based on the wind direction. That way, you will be able to shield the house quite easily without having to worry about the tree falling over constantly.
Thus, it all comes down to the wind direction and how you position the tree in relation to the nearby buildings and sheds.
2. Use Stakes Or Guy Wires To Secure The Tree
Unfortunately, there is a chance that the wind direction is simply not favorable for your Christmas tree. And if there are no surrounding structures to block the wind, the tree being knocked over by strong wind seems inevitable.
In such an event, you can use the simplest of all solutions: tie the tree down. While this can be somewhat difficult to hide, especially if your tree is large, it is a solution that won’t make an unsightly mess.
Securing the tree with stakes or guy wires is simple. To do so, you’ll only need a set of guy wires or ropes, stakes or tent spikes, and a large hammer. Simply follow the steps detailed below to wire your tree easily.
Step 1: Fasten A Guy Wire Or Rope Around The Tree Trunk
After sizing the tree properly, fasten a guy wire around the trunk as tightly as you can. Ensure that the knot doesn’t come off by tugging on it lightly, after which you may proceed to tie the wire to a stake.
Step 2: Tie The Rope To A Tent Spike, Stake, Or A Baluster
Tie the wire or rope to a stake, tent spike, or porch baluster based on what you have available close to the tree. If you’re using either of the first two, note that you must ensure the tent spike has been driven far enough into the ground. You’ll want the spike or stake to act as the anchor for the duration of the holiday season, after all.
An important thing to note with regard to balusters is that they need to be strong enough to hold the weight of your tree. There have been a few cases where the balusters snapped in half under duress, which can be a headache to mend. While not the best solution, balusters can be a decent option if tent spikes or stakes aren’t available.
Step 3: Repeat The Steps For Several Stakes Or Tent Spikes
Set up a few other tying spots to make sure the weight of the tree is distributed among multiple tent pegs or balusters. Additionally, it’s usually best to arrange the tying spots in a circular pattern. That way, your tree will have enough support not to topple over in any direction.
And lastly, ensure that the stake-and-guy-wire setup isn’t a tripping hazard in your front lawn or backyard. An accidental tripping can easily undo all your hard work with the tree, which can put a damper on your festivities very quickly. So, it’s for the best not to space the stakes out more than a foot from the tree.
3. Use Heavier Christmas Decorations And Ornaments
If you’re looking to immobilize your tree, why not weigh it down to the point that it cannot move freely at all?
Using heavy ornaments and larger decorations can achieve just that, with their addition increasing the overall weight of the tree. And with an appropriate amount of Christmas decorations fastened to the tree branches, the tree will have enough mass to withstand strong gusts.
Advise
This only applies to larger trees since the branches of smaller trees would simply break under the weight. At most, you can hang a couple of baubles and garlands on the smaller trees before they deform or snap.
So, once you’ve gathered your hanging decorations and ornaments, try to make sure that the tree branches are thick enough not to be easily damaged. Natural trees like white spruce and Fraser Firs can easily handle heavy items, while you will require a wide and large artificial Christmas treefor the same purpose.
Tip
Try not to crush the short needles of white spruce, as it can spread an unpleasant odor around the environment. It’s better to be cautious when decorating this tree.
Baubles can be affixed to an outdoor tree using twist cable ties that allow you to attach each ornament to the branches. Tie them well enough, and they will not budge in the winter winds. And make sure you place several of these spherical ornaments all around the outdoor tree to spread the weight around equally.
Pair these with inflatable decorations, decorations made with paper and ribbons and string lights for a complete Christmassy feel. Do note that Christmas inflatables might not withstand a windy night, so feel free to take them down before you call it a night.
4. Pick A Tree With A Wide Base
The wider the tree base, the more difficult it will be for anything to knock it over. That includes wind as well.
By increasing the surface area of the tree base, you can effectively give the tree a solid foundation that keeps it still no matter what. The increased stability is good, but the wider base can practically make the natural or artificial tree immovable if you add weights to it.
Wondering how? It’s as simple as filling up small plastic store bags with rocks or sand and placing them over the base. That is all there is to improve the stability of your Christmas tree.
For smaller trees, even an outdoor umbrella stand can work well enough as a Christmas tree base. All you need to do is make sure that the pipe diameter of the umbrella stand is wide enough to accommodate the tree trunk. Once that is done, you can weigh it down using a sandbag or tie straps to reinforce its stability further.
What if you had a larger tree? If so, you can use a metal fence post base instead that is functionally the same as an umbrella stand. The only extra step with a metal fence post base is that you will need to affix the base to the location of your Christmas tree. For decking and patio, you may need to drill holes into the deck or the concrete floor to secure the base as well.
Lastly, if you live in a particularly windy area, you can combine all the methods listed here to make your Christmas tree immune to wind. Your tree will stand tall when faced with anything that isn’t a heavy storm.
Can I use a regular tree stand for an outdoor Christmas tree?
You may be able to do so, provided that you remain vigilant of certain factors. To use a regular tree stand for an outside Christmas tree, you must abide by one of the following conditions:
Live in an area that doesn’t face high-speed winds
Shelter the natural or artificial tree well
Use guy wires or tie straps to secure the tree completely
Use heavy ornaments to weigh the tree down
A wider tree stand is better than a regular one in almost all scenarios, so consider switching to one as it is a convenient solution.
How do I maintain an outdoor Christmas tree during windy weather?
Caring for a Christmas tree can be challenging, especially if your tree is a natural one. A natural tree needs up to a gallon of water every day to appear fresh and vibrant, something artificial trees don’t need at all.
Here are a few tips to take care of your tree during bad weather conditions:
Before decorating, keep the tree sheltered in a cool porch or patio
Cut cleanly across the bottom of its trunk
Use LED lights for both artificial and natural trees for low heat exposure
Consider recycling the tree after the holidays are over
Check the water level of your tree every day
An evergreen tree can last several weeks with proper care and can be recycled for further use. Usually, this can be done through local Christmas tree recycling programs.
But if it dries up completely, or if your fake tree can’t be repaired, you may want to dispose of the Christmas tree.
Can I use a fake tree outdoors?
Artificial trees can be used outside safely, provided that they are designed for it. Some material types, like textiles and plastics, can’t withstand direct solar, rain, and wind exposure, causing them to fade over time. On the other hand, even prelit trees can be used outdoors, depending on the make.
Consider the manufacturer’s recommendations before purchasing an artificial Christmas tree for outdoor use.
As a temporary solution, you can make your tree fade-resistant by using a UV-resistant spray. You can find these on the market based on the materials used to make the plant.
Final Words
Outdoor Christmas trees can be prone to blowing over in windy weather, which is why you should provide them with ample support. After all, there’s no better way to ensure that your festive spirits remain high all holiday long than a vibrant Christmas tree standing tall.
No matter what kind of Christmas tree you choose, it’s always good to take precautionary measures to keep it upright. The methods listed in this guide, along with DIY methods like weight bags, will help prevent the tree from falling over.
And lastly, don’t forget to take good care of your natural Christmas tree! It needs as much care as any other plant, requiring plenty of water and gardening care before it’s ready for you to decorate. With that, your tree will be the brightest beacon of your home throughout the Christmas season, bar none.
Installing a wire brush on an angle grinder is similar to installing any other blade attachments. You need to dismantle the blade guard and arbor nuts to take the old blade out and install the new wire brush. After re-attaching the parts, you can use the grinder again.
An angle grinder is one of those tools that you will always find in the toolshed of a DIYer. Thanks to its versatility, it can be used for a wide range of household tasks.
In fact, if you use a wire wheel, you can use the angle grinder to clean grime and debris off of a surface as well. But from our experience, many users do not know how to install one, which keeps them from fully utilizing this functionality.
That is why we have addressed it in this brief guide. So, if you are curious, dive in!
What Are Angle Grinder Wire Wheels?
Before we proceed to the meat of this article, let us discuss a little bit about what wire wheels are. If, by any chance, you haven’t heard of the term before, then this will give you a good idea.
Wire wheels are a specialized attachment that you can use on angle grinders to clean and deburr a surface. In some cases, it can also be used to scrub paint off surfaces. Such a feat is made possible owing to the design of this attachment.
Unlike other angle grinder blades, wire-based attachments come with numerous metallic bristles attached to the edges. These bristles are generally made from hard and springy steel, which makes them tough enough to scrape off materials from a surface. Some manufacturers may use brass, copper, or even stainless steel, which improves the durability of the bristles.
On that note, there are two different types of wire-based angle grinder attachments available today - wire wheel and wire cup brush. Despite being used interchangeably, there are certain differences between these two, as we have discussed below.
1. Wire Wheel
Typically, the wire wheel is shaped like most other angle grinder discs. The wire bristles are attached along the edge of the disc, while the base or the center of the disc is attached to the angle grinder.
Out of the two wire-based attachments, this is more popular among users. It is due to this reason that people refer to all wire-based attachments as wire wheels. In terms of utility, this attachment is beneficial for clearing out edges, crevices, and cracks.
2. Wire Cup Brush
As the name suggests, the wire cup brush is an attachment that is shaped like a concave cup. Here, the bristles are attached at the edges, and they are situated perpendicularly to the base of the cup.
The bristles of this attachment are made of the same materials as the ones used in wire wheels. Because of the design, wire brushes are commonly used to scrape and polish flat surfaces.
How To Install Wire Wheels/Wire Brushes On Angle Grinders?
Even though wire wheels and wire brushes are quite different in design compared to conventional angle grinder blades, the procedure for their installation remains almost similar.
Now, many models today come with convenient mechanisms that allow you to remove the angle grinder blade without a tool. But if you have an older model, you can remove and install the wire brushes just like any other angle grinder attachment using the process we have described below.
Step 1: Remove The Blade Guard
First, you need to unplug the grinder and remove any batteries just to be safe. Then dismantle the blade guard by removing the screws that hold it in place. In some models, the blade guard may be attached with a latch, so make sure to dislodge it before proceeding further.
Step 2: Dismantle The Old Blade
You need to carefully remove the arbor nut that attaches the blade to the machine. Next, pull the blade out of the angle grinder spindle gently. Before you do that, though, make sure that you lock the blade by pressing the blade lock button. It is usually located near the switch, and it stops the blade from spinning unnecessarily while you remove it.
Step 3: Attach The Wire Wheel
After removing the old disc, place the new wire wheel over the spindle. Make sure to align it properly with the grinder so that you can seamlessly attach the arbor nut. In case of wire cup brushes, however, you can directly attach or thread the brush wheel to the spindle. This means that the previous steps might not be necessary in that situation.
Step 4: Reassemble The Grinder
Once the wheel is in place, carefully reattach the arbor nut with a wrench. Make sure not to tighten it too much, as it can damage the nut. Then reattach the blade guard, and put the battery back in the machine. After that is done, you will be good to go!
Using Your Angle Grinder
Knowing how to install a wire brush or wire wheel isn’t enough - you also need to know how to use an angle grinder. That’s what we have discussed in this section, so we suggest that you keep reading.
When operating an angle grinder, you need to use the correct technique, or else you won’t be able to do a good job with it. This is especially true in the case of wire wheels.
Make sure to set the correct spinning speed while using the angle grinder. Using an angle grinder at high speeds makes it very difficult to control, and unless you are an experienced user, we would not recommend it. That said, the speed shouldn’t be too low either so that you can get the job done effectively.
You should also consider the angle and pressure at which you hold the angle grinder to the surface. And be careful and attentive while using it as this is a pretty powerful tool, and even the slightest mistake might lead to a serious accident.
Keeping that in mind, here are some safety tips you should follow when using angle grinders.
Wear protective gear like a face shield, goggles, and gloves
Keep your workplace clutter-free
Do not work on wet surfaces
Keep all flammable materials away from the grinder
Ensure you have a fire extinguisher nearby
Make sure the power outlet isn’t faulty
How To Install Wire Brush On Angle Grinder Final Words
Installing and using a wire brush on an angle grinder is a better strategy than scrubbing and polishing surfaces manually. Not only do you save a lot of time and effort, but you can also do a better job.
However, using a heavy-duty power tool like an angle grinder comes with its fair share of risks, which is why people may tend to avoid it. But if you follow the safety tips we have discussed, you will be completely safe.
And once you get the hang of it, you won’t want to go back to manual scrubbing and polishing ever again!
You will need all the right tools to drill holes and a back mount bracket to install the battery-operated push button unit at an accessible-height outside the main door. Follow the instruction manual further to place the doorbell chime receiver and connect the transmitter within the compatible wireless range.
Without doorbells, how would your guest announce their arrival? If your electrical system is already in place, you might want to avoid hardwiring a manual doorbell to it. And to eliminate this problem, you can choose to get wireless doorbells.
On purchasing a wireless doorbell, you will also have to learn how to install it. And to help you with that, we have come up with this guide.
Let’s take a look!
Three Things To Remember During Wireless Doorbell Installation
1. The Receiver Must Be Within Hearing Range
The point of a wireless door chime is to hear it when it rings. And to ensure that happens, you must place the receiver at a place where the wireless doorbell can be audible. It should be audible from your lawn or backyard as well.
In case the door chimes are not audible, consider purchasing extenders, and you will be able to hear the chime from anywhere on your property.
2. Receiver Should Be In The Range Of The Transmitter
If you do not have experience working with electronics, you might not know what doorbell transmitters are. Well, there’s nothing too complicated about them. A transmitter is what carries the signal from the doorbell button to the receiver. To make things easier, you might install a number of doorbell transmitters that can be easily accessed from anywhere in the house.
But, as we have mentioned before, wherever you install the transmitters, make sure that the receiver is within range of the wireless doorbells you are installing.
3. Install Extenders If Needed
For people who are trying to install a wireless doorbell system for their big mansion or large office space, a doorbell extender can be of great help. It can easily increase the range of the wireless doorbell.
If you are wondering how that works, let us explain it to you. An additional transmitter will carry the signals from the doorbell to the receiver, even from a long distance. So, even if the receiver is far from the door, the chime unit will function as effectively.
Steps To Installing A Wireless Doorbell System
Step 1: Plugging In Wireless Doorbell Chime Units
To begin with, you will need to locate a 120V outlet which needs to be near the door. You might need a higher or lower outlet capacity as well. To know the perfect requirements, read the instruction manual that comes with your wireless doorbell.
Also, when installing wireless doorbell chime units, it is essential that you place them strategically to make sure that the ringing can be heard from all areas. If you take our suggestion, go for the front hallway, as that provides a direct line of sight to the front door.
Step 2: Putting The Battery In The Push Button Compartment
For this step, you will first have to get your hands on a flathead screwdriver. Once you have it, put it to use and open the battery door casing on the push button unit. Then proceed to insert the batteries that come with it.
While at it, take proper caution and check twice if the battery has been placed correctly and is facing the right direction. Once done, it’s time to put back the battery door casing.
Step 3: Choosing The Right Location For the Push Button Unit
During a wired doorbell installation, it is an absolute must that you choose the right height. In general, you cannot go wrong if you keep the height between 44 and 48 inches for the doorbell push button. This will make accessing the doorbell easier for your guests.
To make the process more smooth, try placing the push button on the doorframe side and not on the hinge side.
Step 4: Time To Put The Push Button To The Test
Once you are done placing the push button near the door, it is time for you to test if it’s functioning properly. To confirm that the placement is right and the transmitter is catching the signal properly, press the push button.
If you hear an audible ring, you have done a good job so far!
Step 5: Mark The Screw Locations
To finally put the push buttons in place, you will need a back mounting plate, which comes with the package itself. Follow the steps mentioned in the doorbell instructions manual to make sure that you mark the drill hole locations correctly.
Not to mention, you might come across a push-button unit that makes use of the back of the housing as a plate. In that case, use the flathead screwdriver to open the unit and then proceed to mark the drill hole locations.
Final Step: Installing The Push Button Unit
The last step is to drill pilot holes in the wall that are not more than half the diameter of the actual mounting screws. Then proceed to attach the mounting plate and ensure that the mounting screws holding the plate are properly tightened.
Once the screws are tightened, the push button will be properly installed, and you can start using it.
What Are The Common Problems With Wireless Doorbell Installation?
1. Poor Signal Transmission From Push Button To Chimes
With a bit of research, you will know that unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (uPVC) or metal can hinder the transmission of radio signals. Because of this, your signal range might get limited, and the connection between the push button and the chime box might be affected.
So, if you have a uPVC or metal door, or window, it is best that you place the push button far from it. This might get really difficult if you have metal studs on the walls of your house. If you have installed the push button in front of the metal studs, there is no option but to relocate the button somewhere else to improve transmission.
2. Ineffective Chime Ring
You might find yourself in a pickle when the doorbell stops chiming or might be left wondering “why does my wireless doorbell keep ringing?”. This mostly happens when the push button unit has run out of power or when the chime’s outlet is malfunctioning.
To fix this problem, you will have to start by removing the chime unit from the electrical outlet. Once you are done doing that, put another device in place to check if the outlet is getting power. If this device is not functioning as well, you will have to check the circuit breaker and fix the power outlet.
Another common problem that users face while installing is placing the battery incorrectly. Wireless doorbell batteries are quite small in size, and people often confuse them with another type. So, before you insert batteries, take some time to ensure that you are using the right ones.
Also, before coming to the conclusion that something might be wrong with the chime control button, double-check your battery placement. It’s not uncommon for users to install it backward. If you have done the same thing, flip it and put it in its right orientation.
3. Low Chime Volume
To make it convenient for users, most wireless doorbells now come with a volume control option. So, according to your requirements, you can turn the volume up or down. And when away from home, you can even consider turning the sound off completely.
To know how to make these adjustments, make sure you read the manual carefully.
Tip
Many times, people change the security codes on their wireless doorbell system by mistake. Make sure to enter the right security code; otherwise, your doorbell will fail to chime.
4. Battery Needing Frequent Replacement
The lifespan of a doorbell battery depends on the surrounding temperature of the area in which the device is placed. For example, if you stay in a cold climate and the temperature falls below 41 degrees Fahrenheit, the batteries are likely to degrade sooner. This is especially true for the small push batteries that go in doorbells.
To sort out this issue, there is no other option but to replace the batteries from time to time. As you cannot adjust the weather conditions, we suggest you plan on changing the batteries in the doorbell more frequently during winter.
Warning
Take special care to ensure that the battery unit is always dry and in no way collects moisture. If the unit gets wet due to snow or rain, there is a high chance that the battery terminals in the doorbell unit will rust faster.
In that case, replacing the batteries won’t be enough; you will have to consider changing the push button unit. In the worst-case scenario, you might have to replace the entire doorbell system.
How To Install A Wireless Doorbell Final Words
Installing a doorbell is no difficult feat and can be done quite efficiently if you follow all the steps that we have mentioned above.
Once you are done installing it, play around and select a chime tone of your choice. If you have two receivers, make sure you select different sounds for both. This will help you understand when to answer which door.
If there are issues that you run into after the installation is over, troubleshoot them at the earliest. In case you face any difficulty fixing them on your own, we suggest calling a professional for help. And if things still don’t get better, check if the electrical outlet is functioning properly.
We all know that even the idea of installing a spa cover lifter yourself sounds like a scary one. However, all of this is a myth as the installation process is much easier than you think. The installation process is not too long, it takes about an hour at most and does not require any power tools.
Before we discuss the process of installing a cover lifter, here is a brief introduction summing up the need for a spa cover lifter.
How to Install a Spa Cover Lifter
Why Do You Need a Spa Cover Lifter?
You might think that you can move the cover of a brand new hot tub by hand. One look at the size and shape of the hot tub cover is enough to make you rethink the need for a hot tub cover.
The enormous size and shape of the hot tub cover make removing and stowing the cover a challenge for most people. Additionally, you are also at risk of facing serious back injuries if you lift the heavy object without any support.
Given the challenge ahead, it makes complete sense to opt for a spa cover lifter. Even the simplest of the models allow the user to cover the spa with little effort.
The frequent use of a spa cover means that, after a time, the cover will absorb water vapor from the spa. After absorbing the vapor from the barrier, the weight of the cover will start to move upwards, as the evaporation process continues. It is not until the cover becomes waterlogged that you should consider replacing it. Till the cover becomes completely waterlogged, a little mechanical help will make your life considerably more comfortable.
The use of a spa cover lifter means that you have the help of an extra pair of hands for opening and closing the spa. With the help of a spa cover lifter, you can use the spa to carry out quick water checks without hassle. The use of a lifter also eases the cleaning process because you don't stand the chance of hurting yourself in the process.
The life and performance of the hot tub are influenced by the maintenance routine you follow. The maintenance routine becomes more comfortable if you install the spa lifter following the procedures mentioned below.
Step-By-Step Installation Process
The first part of the procedure is to figure out whether the lifter comes with a mounting system or bracket. Follow the instructions mentioned in the instruction manual regarding the nature of the lifter. Given the nature of the product, you may be required to drill holes to screw the lifter in. Use a drill bit that is narrow for the purpose and ensure that you don't drill holes too far as it can damage the tub.
Once you are done drilling the holes, you will not face many problems in attaching the mounting bracket. You can use a drillor screwdriver to assist you during the process.
The package that comes with the cover lifter includes support arms that are responsible for connecting the two pivoting arms. You can then attach the pivoting arms with the brackets that are placed on the free pivots. Hydraulics are also available with some packages, especially if you order a powerlifter.
The next step is to ensure that the cover lifter is attached to the cover of your spa. Before you go about carrying out this step, it is imperative to discuss the issue with the manufacturer. Different lifters specified for various models have contrasting ways of finishing the act.
Most cover lifters also come with handgrips. You can slide the handgrips to whichever position suits you. You should look for convenience in this matter as the hand grips need to function effectively for you and work in a manner that is best for you. Additionally, if the package comes with any other components, be careful when attaching them. In the case of electrical components, avoid contact with water.
If, for one reason or the other, the spa cover lifter is not working, go through the directions, and rectify the mistake.
Required Materials
Here is a list of materials that you should possess if you are willing to install the cover by yourself. If you are looking to install a hot tub cover lifter, we advise you to purchase an entire cover lift package.
These are some of the essential elements that are required to aid the smooth operation.
Precautions
Before you set out installing the spa cover lifter, take note of the following precautionary methods.
Use all the appropriate tools
Before following the instruction manual, ensure that it offers the right advice
Don’t forget to wear protective gear
Be cautious throughout the process to prevent damage.
The installation of a hot tub cover lifter will ease the process of removing the cover. The installation will simplify the process by making it faster and easier. Keeping the lifter clean does not require much work.
The process of installing a spa lifter is not as challenging as it sounds. Once you start the process of installation, you’ll realize that it’s not as tough as it seems!
The dream of having a kitchen does not end with its design and usability; you must also consider the air quality.
Something that will help us have better air circulation around the kitchen, especially during meal preparation and cooking, is a range hood.
If you decide to buy one and struggle to understand how to install a range hood, whether you're doing a DIY or hiring a pro, we have a full installation guide in this article.
Let's get started!
Range Hood Installation: Step-By-Step Instructions
Before knowing how to install a range hood (photo above), it is essential to understand what this kitchen appliance is and what it offers.
A range hood is an appliance designed to suck, filter, and vent gasses through its exit point.
These hoods can filter the air, odor, smoke, steam, and excess heat produced within your cooking area, whether you're preparing Gordon Ramsey's Beef Wellington or simple scrambled eggs.
Now that you know what it is, it's time to learn what you'll need and the specific steps to install a range hood through the following section.
What You'll Need
To efficiently install a range hood, the first thing you need to do is prepare the specific materials and tools, like the following:
Caulk gun, Chisel (optional), Drill
Drill bits, Ducting, Hammer (optional)
Hole saw, HVAC foil/aluminum tape
Oscillating tool, Pencil, Range hood
Screw, Screwdriver, Tape measure
Wall cap, Wire stripper, Wire nuts
After gathering the aforementioned materials, you must follow this step-by-step guide:
Step 1: Take Down the Old Range Hood if There Is One
The first step involves removing the old range hood and its embedded components if your goal is to upgrade it
However, if you do not have an existing range hood or you will be installing it in other parts of your kitchen, then you can skip this step and proceed with the second one.
Step 2: For Safety, Shut off the Electricity
Before drilling and doing other steps to install a range hood on the wall, you must first switch off the electrical power from the breaker box.
Turning the electricity off will keep you or an expert from the dangers of electrocution, especially when dealing with old or faulty electrical wiring.
Step 3: Hire Electricians for the Electrical Wiring Setup if There is None
The next step you need to do is to settle the electrical lines that will run the range hood by letting an electrician set it up.
However, if you have existing wirings from your old vented range hood and there are no existing problems, pull the electrical cable, separate, and remove the protective paper to prepare it for connection in the later steps. Then, you can proceed to the next step.
Step 4: Measure and Mark the Vent Holes
After performing the first two steps, you must measure and mark the wall area where you will need to drill locator holes and set up the hoods.
Remember that this is only applicable for a ducted range hood (which is what most range hoods are) and not for the ductless range hood.
Nevertheless, you can do this by placing the round or rectangular duct at the chosen wall where you plan on mounting it and marking its diameter or area based on size.
Step 5: Drill or Cut Space for the Vent
When you have gotten the exact measurements of the range hood and the vent hole, it is time to drill or cut through the wall to make space for the vent.
In this process, you will need appropriate tools, such as the drill and drill bits. After preparation, follow these steps:
For circular vents, use a hole saw to drill a hole for the ductwork inside
For rectangles and other shapes, drill a hole through the wall using drill and drill bits
You can also use the oscillating saw or a cold chisel and hammer to perfect the hole
Check the wall entry points of the duct (flow)
If there are obstructions, relocate the holes in the wall
If there are none, proceed with drilling through the exterior wall
However, if you have ductless range hoods, it will not be necessary as they use a unique charcoal filter system to circulate clean air back into the kitchen.
Tip
If the obstruction includes pipes, plumbing, and wires, you can ask the help of professionals to relocate pipes accordingly.
Step 6: Install the Ductwork
The sixth step you must do is the process of installing ductwork. The duct is the pathway through which the air suctioned by range hood fans passes until it reaches the exit point.
In doing this, you must first put a mounting bracket (architecture) at the exterior hole using adhesive and mounting screws. After that, proceed with these steps:
Connect the metal wall cap or duct cap with the end length of the ductwork (duct extension) using aluminum tape and screws.
Then, install the connected ductwork into mounting brackets.
Using mounting screws, secure the ductwork into the mounting brackets.
Now that you are done with the exterior wall, proceed by finishing the route (ductwork) on the interior by connecting the remaining duct length.
This is done by inserting it in the interior wall's hole using aluminum tape.
Step 7: Run the Electrical Wiring
After you install ductwork, it is time to connect and run the electrical wiring for your hood.
Using wire nuts, connect the electrical wires in the electrical box; this means black to black wire, white wire to white fixture lead, and green grounding wire to green lead.
Once all the wires are connected and in their proper places in the electrical box, cover the ductwork and electrical wire with the duct cover.
Remember
A duct cover or an electrical cover is essential to protect the internal electrical work, duct connector, and other materials from damage.
Step 8: Mount the Range Hood
When the ductwork has been settled, it is time to mount the range hood into your wall. In doing this, the following actions must be performed:
Drill the mounting brackets into the wall, where the range hood will be attached based on the manufacturer's instructions, and fix them with mounting screws
Secure the hood on the wall with screws driven at its intended spots on the top
Cover the rest of the ductwork installed (seams) with a duct tape
Step 9: Turn on the Power and Test the Range Hood
When you have finished the first up to the eighth steps, you can proceed with the last (and most crucial step): turn on the electric power and range hood.
To check if the new appliance is working, here are the things you must watch intently:
If the hood runs when turned on (e.g., after plugging through an outlet nearby)
If the lights are working properly
If the vented range hoods suction air
If the air passes swiftly out through the exterior wall exit point
Remember
Aside from the light of the kitchen hood, you can also elevate the lighting of your space using the best under-cabinet lighting listed in the article.
In installing a range hood, there are essential factors that you need to consider and things you must prioritize. Well, don't worry because we have your back!
Based on our firsthand experience and knowledge of appliances, here are some of our tips that will surely make your installation smooth sailing:
Always check your local building codes before installing a new hood.
Always remove the old hood when it is not needed or when it is where you will place the new hood.
Choose and find range hoods based on functionality and aesthetics (i.e., your cooking needs and kitchen design). You can check out the best range hoods on the market through this article.
Don't forget to buy a range hood similar to the size of the space you will place it in.
Prioritize safety when installing a range hood.
Check your vent holes.
Range Hood Use and Maintenance Tips
After installing your kitchen hood, the best way to keep it nice and running is to use it cautiously and take good care of your range hoods.
To preserve the pristine condition of your wall-mounted range hoods, as experts in the field, here are our use and maintenance tips for you:
Regularly clean the vent hood where the air passes through to prevent grease buildup, which can be a fire hazard.
Regularly clean the exposed parts of the hood.
Regularly clean the fan blades and air filters to prevent the accumulation of dirt and debris that can damage the range hood.
You must remember that in conducting the maintenance tips mentioned above, you must have the wall-mounted range hood shut off to prevent electrocution.
Also, you can use a degreasing solution, cleaning spray, soap, and hot water for the filters and other parts.
Nonetheless, when using the new range hood, always follow the instructions and safety protocols laid out by the manufacturers in the guide given along with the appliance.
Tip
If you want to delve more and find the answer to the question 'Do I need a range hood?', check out this article!
Install a Range Hood DIY Vs Hiring a Pro: Which is Better?
Nowadays, a do-it-yourself (DIY) remedy has been at the heart of most appliance installations because of the recent pandemic and the availability of online tutorials.
Yet, it is still undeniable that pros in the appliances field are there for a reason. So, which is truly better, a DIY job or hiring a pro?
On the one hand, you can do DIY for a range hood, especially when you know how to measure and drill holes and accurately follow the steps in this article. However, lifting heavy hoods would still require someone to help you out.
Nevertheless, a DIY can help you save some money, as hiring a pro can cost between $100 and $600, depending on the specifications of your appliance.
On the other hand, hiring a professional Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning (HVAC) contractor will assure you of the following:
Faster installation
Preventing electrical wiring mishaps
At the end of the day, it will still be up to you whether you do the installation yourself or ask for the help of professionals.
Range Hood Installation FAQs
Learning how to install range hoods undoubtedly sparked some questions in your mind. Do not worry because we are here to answer some of your FAQs through this section.
Do Range Hoods Have to Be Vented Outside?
No, hoods do not have to be vented outside (wall, ceiling, or roof) all the time because there are ductless range hoods.
How High Should a Range Hood Be?
A range hood must be 20 inches to 30 inches above the heat source. Specifically, if you have an electric cooktop, ensure the range hood installation is 20 inches to 24 inches above.
On the other hand, if you use a gas stove as a cooking surface, ensure you install the range hood at least 24 inches to 30 inches above.
Remember
You can always refer to the article on how to buy a gas range for specific measures, tips, and reminders.
How far should cabinets be from the range hood?
The hood mounted on the wall should have a 1/2-inch space from the existing cabinetry.
A range hood in your kitchen (or wall) is an essential appliance that provides proper ventilation, particularly within your kitchen area, whether it be a ducted range hood or a ductless model.
The key to properly installing a range hood on your wall is to follow the steps above with caution and accuracy (double-check).
Now that you have all the necessary steps, use, and maintenance tips, you can indeed install your range hood yourself or have the installation done by professionals!
How do you feel when your epoxy resin remains sticky even after the curing time is over? For sure, not good.
But there’s nothing to worry about, as this problem is more common than you think. People who work with resin often face issues that delay their projects. This happens because of some anomalies in the chemical reaction between the resin and the hardener.
You need to understand that not all problems related to resins are the same. And because of that, they require different solutions. So, in this guide, we will take you through the most common problems that resin users face and tell you how to overcome them. After reading this, we can assure you that you will be better equipped to handle this material.
Without any further delay, let’s dive right in!
How To Harden Sticky Resin
Dealing With Runny Resin
When working with resin, you might be in a situation where the resin looks uncured even after you give it the required curing time. In fact, it might remain a little gooey even after drying for an entire day. And there can be multiple reasons behind this.
For example, if you end up mixing more colorant than required while preparing the resin, then chances are that it will have a hard time solidifying. To give you an estimate, it is best to mix around 5-6 % colorant of the total amount of the hardener and resin.
Moreover, we have come across people making the mistake of adding two hardeners to resin. But it’s always better to add one, as otherwise, the outcome might remain gooey.
And the most common mistake that people commit is that they do not keep the proportion of the hardener and the resin right. That’s why we’d strongly recommend reading the mixing instructions thoroughly beforehand. In case you face any difficulty in understanding, you can contact the seller to resolve any queries.
How To Fix It?
If you are trying to fix runny resin, the most important thing to do is to scrape it off the surface. This is an essential step, and unless you do it correctly, then chances are that it will start leaking the moment you apply a fresh coat.
After you are done taking it off, apply a fresh coat. But make sure that you keep the proportions correct and apply them following all the instructions. Unless you do that, the resin layer will turn out runny again, and you would have to redo the entire process.
Problem Of Soft Spots
Once the resin is cured, you might be surprised to find a few stubborn spots that refuse to get dried. This leaves a few patches that remain wet for a long time. There is no pattern to soft spots, and they can appear anywhere.
It mainly happens when you fail to mix the hardener with the resin thoroughly. Or, you may even face this problem if the hardener gets stuck to the sides. So, we would recommend that you scrape the sides well when you are mixing and pouring. Without proper mixing, soft spots are highly likely to appear once the resin starts to dry.
How To Fix It?
In order to fix this issue, you would need to get hold of an 80-grit sanding paper. With this, you can sand it and clean off the dust from the surface. While sanding it, if you find specific parts to be gooey, do your best to remove them.
And only when you are sure that there is no more runny resin left on the surface can you start pouring a fresh batch.
Difficulty In Hardening Sticky Resin
Sometimes you will find the resin to remain a little sticky even after mixing a hardener in it. In situations like this, the resin hardens but still remains a little sticky. What do you do in such a situation?
This may happen because of multiple reasons. Many people are impatient and do not mix the resin well before they start with the work. We would recommend that you mix at least for a good 3-5 minutes.
This way, the resin and the hardener will mix adequately, and there will be no lumps in the mixture. And while you are at it, scrape the sides and the corners too to ensure that there are no lumps.
Other than that, you need to stay very cautious about the resin to hardener ratio. Read the instructions very carefully or watch some tutorial videos on the internet for help. Unless you keep the ratio right, the chances are that the resin will remain a little sticky.
We have also seen that resin tends to be a bit gooey and sticky when the ambient temperature of your workshop is not correct. If it is too high or too low, the resin will not be able to harden properly. For the first day of curing, ensure that the temperature is between 75 and 85 degrees Fahrenheit.
How To Fix It?
Unlike all the problems that we have discussed so far, this one is relatively easy to fix. In case you see that the resin is still sticky even after the curing time, you need to make a fresh batch and then pour it over the existing surface.
After doing this, give it the proper time to cure. If you have already identified a problem with the previous batch, make sure that you do not repeat the same mistake. Sometimes the temperature is an issue. If the ambient temperature was too low the previous time, ensure that you move it to a warmer place.
Apart from pouring a fresh layer, you can also try wet sanding the first layer. We would suggest that you continue to sand until you reach a solid surface. Once you are done sanding, you can pour a new layer.
And this time, do not forget to use a resin or acrylic-based sealer to make sure that the surface layer is effectively sealed.
Tricks To Harden Sticky Resin Easily
If you are new to working with resin, the chances are that you are not too familiar with the medium. When that’s the case, you will likely face a lot of problems. In this section, we will throw light on some of the things that you can do to avoid these problems.
Get Acquainted With The Instructions
Whether you are new to working with resin or not, always make sure that you do not miss out on the instructions. Resins of different brands work differently, and you must keep yourself well-versed with their functioning.
Moreover, in case you plan on working on a big project, we would recommend that you do a test round first. This will help you get acquainted with the resin better and reduce your chances of committing mistakes.
Learn How To Handle Sticky Resin
Handling sticky resin is not an easy thing to do, and to make your job easy, you can consider using Modge Podge. All you have to do is cover the sticky parts and leave them to dry. Other than that, you can also use triple-thick polyurethane.
Even after a day’s time, if you still find the resin to be a little sticky, just spray the surface with this. Then let it sit for 40 minutes before coating it again with another layer.
Pay Attention To Detail
In order to avoid resin-related problems, it is essential that you understand the material well. We would recommend that you choose to work in warmer areas as cold temperatures tend to delay the curing process.
And when mixing the resin, hardener, and color, make sure that you mix it well and there are no lumps or air bubbles present in the mixture. You need to be more careful if you are mixing colors to the mix and take proper care to mix them in the correct ratio.
Final Words
On that note, we have come to the end of this comprehensive guide.
We hope you have learnt a thing or two about hardening sticky resins and will be able to handle the material better. Before you start working, it is essential that you understand the basics in order to not commit the mistakes that we have discussed.
However, even after being careful, sometimes the resins do not act as they should. They do not cure properly and leave your project in a mess. But once you apply the techniques that we have discussed in this guide, we are sure you will be able to fix the problems in no time.
In case you have any further doubts, feel free to reach out to us in the comments section below. And keep a watch on this space for more compelling reads.
The distinctive aroma and powerful yet subtle flavor of cilantro make it a popular culinary herb.
It’s also one of the easiest plants to cultivate and harvest at home. In fact, growing these herbs indoors can be as successful as growing them in a garden, provided you give the plants extra care.
However, it’s quite natural for first-timers to make mistakes while planting cilantro in a pot. The most common mistake being - transplanting plants from the garden, which is a strict no!
To help you out, we’ve come forth with this guide on how to grow cilantro indoors easily.
Furthermore, we’ve provided a few tips for growing and harvesting cilantro and coriander seeds at home. But before that, we’ll address the popular debate on cilantro vs. coriander.
So, without further ado, let’s begin.
Cilantro Vs. Coriander
Cilantro is commonly used for cooking in Mexico, India, Spain, Africa, Russia, China, and other areas of Asia for many centuries now. Apart from its culinary uses, cilantro seeds are also known for their medicinal properties, especially for aiding in digestion and sleep.
But often, people tend to get confused between cilantro and coriander. Are they both the same?
Throughout North America, the stalks and leaves of the Coriandrum sativum plant are referred to as cilantro, while its dried seeds are known as coriander. However, in different parts of the world, the plant itself is called coriander, and the seeds are known as coriander seeds.
Should You Plant Cilantro Seeds or Plants?
The best way to grow cilantro indoors is by directly sowing the seeds in your garden as they germinate in about 7 to 10 days. You won’t need a headstart as it grows within no time. It’s also important to note that since cilantro develops a taproot, it doesn’t transplant well.
But if you can’t wait to harvest fresh cilantro leaves in late spring, start planting cilantro in peat pots so that they can be directly transplanted into your garden. Just make sure the plants are 3 to 4 inches apart.
Cultivating Cilantro Seeds & Plants
Before you begin cultivating cilantro, make sure you prepare the soil by adding compost and other organic matter to the planting area. Work it into the soil to a depth of at least 18 inches and rake the area to make it smooth.
Once that’s done, sow the cilantro seeds 6 to 8 inches apart in rows spaced about 1 foot apart and water the area. When the plants grow about 2 inches in height, feed them water-soluble fertilizers to enhance their overall growth.
And if you wish to get a steady supply of fresh leaves throughout the summer, sow the cilantro seeds successively every 2 to 3 weeks from the beginning of spring.
Tips To Grow Cilantro Indoors
Growing cilantro indoors is relatively easy, provided you know how to go about its cultivation process. On that note, we’ve come forth with a compiled list of tips and tricks to follow while sowing, cultivating, and growing cilantro or coriander indoors.
Use An Unglazed Terracotta Container
Unglazed terracotta containers allow moisture and air to pass through the plant roots, thereby facilitating their overall growth. Just make sure the container you use comes with plenty of drainage holes for the water to drain out.
Provide Additional Nutrients
It’s important to note that cilantro herbs, when planted indoors, require more nutrition since they come with limited root system ranges without access to sufficient soil nutrients. That’s why when planting cilantro indoors, ensure that the soil you use is a mixture of potting soil and sand to allow the free movement of water.
You may also add additional nutrients by using half concentrations of the fertilizers of liquid fish emulsion or any chemical formulation twice a week during its active growth period.
Water Your Cilantro Thoroughly
When growing cilantro indoors, thorough watering is more important than frequent watering. Always check the soil and only water the plants when the soil is dry to touch.
Furthermore, irrigate the cilantro herbs till the water comes out of the drainage holes of your terracotta container. You may use this technique as a guide to ensure that they’re being watered thoroughly.
Maximize Foliage
Your ultimate aim when growing cilantro indoors should be to maximize foliage. For this, pinch back the young plants up to an inch and snip off the top part of the main stem when you notice the development of flower buds or seed pods. This will redirect their energy back into leaf production, ensuring a fuller and bushier foliage.
Access To Sunlight
In order to grow cilantro indoors, you’ll have to make sure your plants have access to direct sunlight for at least four to five hours a day. However, you may also consider using a growing light to speed-up the overall growth process.
Prevent Plants Diseases
Cilantro is considered an insect repellent because of its strong scent, so it rarely has problems with insects or diseases. However, powdery mildew and leaf spot are the two diseases that may cause issues.
Small yellow spots on cilantro leaves occur due to excessive moisture and poor air circulation. To prevent them from turning into larger brown spots, make sure you grow them in well-drained soil that’s not overwatered. The soil should also be thinned out to ensure proper air circulation.
On the other hand, powdery mildew usually appears as a white powdery coating on the foliage, especially during hot and dry periods. You can prevent this from happening by ensuring adequate moisture to your cilantro plants. Also, make sure you avoid overcrowding.
Harvesting Cilantro Indoors
If you’re growing cilantro herbs at home, you also need to harvest them with utmost care. You may cut them at any time and use the upper and finely chopped leaves in cooking. But avoid using the mature, lower ferny-type leaves for the purpose.
You must also refrain from saving and drying them like other culinary herbs, as this will make the leaves lose their flavor. On the contrary, coriander seeds are easy to harvest on any dry day.
When you notice the seed pods turn brown or crack if pressed, cut the top of the stem. And make sure the pods are harvested before they begin releasing the seeds into your garden.
Once you’ve cut the stems, place the seed pods in a paper bag to prevent this. You may then finish the ripening process in a cool, dark, and ventilated place.
That said, we’d suggest not fertilizing your plants if you’re growing them for seeds as the added nutrients may delay flowering and the overall seed production.
Final Words
When planted indoors in a container with drainage holes, cilantro herbs will grow less abundantly than when planted outdoors in a garden. That’s why added attention and utmost care is crucial to enhance their overall growth.
And with a little bit of time and effort, you can rest assured that you’ll be rewarded with this aromatic and flavorful culinary herb all year round. All you need to do is make sure the plants get the right amount of sun exposure, nutrients, and moisture.
On that note, we have reached the end of our informative guide on growing cilantro indoors. Here’s hoping we were able to provide you with all the relevant information related to the topic.
Starting from kitchenware to vehicles, HDPE is everywhere. And if you are thinking of bonding HDPE surfaces, here’s what you need to know.
HDPE or high-density polyethylene is used for a range of objects, starting from fuel tanks to milk cartons. And sometimes, you may need to join two pieces of HDPE plastic or simply join one with another material such as steel or fiberglass. But if you have worked with this material before, you would know that it is quite challenging.
For a very long time, the only option for bonding HDPE plastic was welding. But with time, technology has advanced quite a lot, and there are superglues and epoxy adhesives that make the job much easier. So, in this guide, we will take you through all that you need to know about HDPE glues.
Listed below are the best HDPE adhesives:
J-B Weld Professional Steel-reinforced Epoxy: J-B Weld epoxy's prominent feature is its resistance against various chemicals, making it superior to Loctite heavy-duty epoxy in terms of durability. It sets slower, which may be inconvenient for quick projects.
Loctite Heavy-duty Five-minute Epoxy: A heavy-duty epoxy that provides robust bonds in less time, setting in just 5 minutes, unlike the J-B Weld which takes 4 to 6 hours. For a more enduring hold akin to J-B Weld, it might need to be used with a fiberglass cloth.
Loctite Instant Mix Five-minute Epoxy: The Loctite instant mix epoxy is best suited for precision jobs, and it excels in ease of application, which is an advantage. Its small volume of 0.47 fl oz poses a disadvantage for larger projects compared to the J-B Weld.
By now, you must have understood that working with HDPE glue can be quite challenging at times. And all the products that you find on the market that promise to glue HDPE are not effective. Some products are better than the rest, and here, we will talk about our favorite few in this section.
1. J-B Weld Professional Steel-reinforced Epoxy Twin Pack - Best for Large Projects
What stands out about this item is the remarkable strength and versatility that it puts on the table. And if you have a large project in hand, this item is more suitable for that purpose. The quantity in the pack is pretty good, and you would be able to handle massive projects with much ease. You can use this for both indoor and outdoor projects.
Like any good epoxy glue, this one can be sanded, drilled, and even filled as per your needs. And you can rest assured that it is completely weather-proof and resistant to other chemicals and acids. So, even if it comes in contact with other items, the bond will not get damaged.
Moreover, just like the manufacturer promises, this glue will deliver a bond that is equivalent to that of steel. We have tested this product and can vouch for this. But we also have to say that it takes longer than other brands to get cured. So, if you have an urgency to finish your project, this might be a bit problematic.
Quantity: 2 Tubes | Volume: 5 fl oz Each | Set Time: 4 to 6 Hours | Cure Time: 15 to 24 Hours | Dry Color: Dark Gray | Resistance: Waterproof, Withstands Up to 550°F, Resists Petroleum, Chemical, Acid
2. Loctite Heavy-duty Five-minute Epoxy - Best for Quick Bonding
If you are looking for a robust bond in a short time span, it is best that you give this adhesive a try. This item is well-suited for heavy-duty projects. But the best part is that it comes at a very reasonable price.
So, even if you take up massive projects like stonework, fencing, or laminating, this glue will come to your rescue. You can understand that it not only helps to glue HDPE plastic but is also excellent for other materials such as wood, tiles, fiberglass, and ceramics. And the best part about this is that it can easily handle shrinkage and drilling like a pro.
However, if you are looking for a more durable hold, consider combining it with fiberglass cloth.
3. Loctite Instant Mix Five-minute Epoxy - Best for Precision Tasks
Just like the name suggests, this glue will help you get your work done in under 5 minutes. And you will not have a hard time using this item, as the application process is super simple. You do not have to do anything manually. Even for mixing the resin and the hardener, you will find a mixing nozzle included in the package. You do not have to get your hands dirty in the process.
But you need to keep in mind that it is best suited for smaller projects as the amount of glue included in the package is not much. So, it is best that you put it to use on smaller projects that demand a high amount of precision.
Because of the narrow nozzle tip, the application becomes quite simple, and it gets easy to reach difficult areas. And once the glue dries up, you can sand it or paint it as per your requirements. You don’t have to worry about it shrinking!
If you want to identify the best HDPE adhesive, listed below is a table specifying quantity per package in units, volume measured in fluid ounces, set time in hours and minutes, cure time in hours, dry color, and resistance features.
High-density polyethylene (HDPE) is a popular material known for its durability, strength, and resistance to most common chemicals. However, these qualities can make it challenging to bond with other types of materials using conventional adhesives. In this comprehensive buying guide, we will cover important factors to consider when purchasing the best adhesives for HDPE, ensuring you find the best product for your needs.
Type of Adhesive
There are various types of adhesives that work well with HDPE. Some of the most common include:
Cyanoacrylates (CAs): Also known as super glue, CA adhesives offer a strong and quick bond. They work best for small-scale applications and can be difficult to remove.
Epoxy Resins: Epoxy adhesives provide a strong bond and are known for their durability, resistance to chemicals, and ability to withstand moisture. They often require heat and/or pressure to cure.
Polyurethane Adhesives: These adhesives are flexible and resistant to chemicals, moisture, and impact. They can be used for both porous and non-porous surfaces; however, they may require a longer curing time.
Plastic Welding Adhesives: Plastic welding adhesives use solvents and heat to chemically bond the two surfaces together. They offer a strong bond but may require specialized equipment to apply.
Application Method
Consider the application method of the adhesive, which can vary based on the size and complexity of the project:
Brush-On Adhesives: Useful for spreading the adhesive evenly on large surface areas.
Spray Adhesives: Provide coverage for large areas quickly and can be used for both temporary and permanent bonds.
Gel Adhesives: Ideal for vertical applications or uneven surfaces due to their non-drip consistency.
Dual-Cartridge Dispensing Systems: Allow for precise, controlled application of adhesives with mixing nozzles, and are often used for industrial purposes.
Curing Time & Temperature
Consider the curing time and the required temperature for the HDPE adhesive you choose, since these factors can determine the strength and longevity of the bond:
Fast-Curing Adhesives: Ideal for projects requiring quick results (bonding in seconds or minutes). However, they may be less durable than slower-curing options.
Slow-Curing Adhesives: Generally provide a stronger bond but will require more time for the adhesive to set and fully cure.
Temperature Requirements: Some adhesives have specific temperature requirements to ensure a strong bond. Choose one suited to your working environment.
Bond Strength & Durability
Pay attention to the bond strength and durability of the adhesive:
Tensile Strength: Measured in psi (pounds per square inch), this indicates how well the adhesive can resist a force applied in the same plane as the bond.
Shear Strength: Also measured in psi, it refers to the adhesive's ability to resist a force applied perpendicularly to the bond.
Higher values indicate a stronger bond. Choose an adhesive with adequate strength for your specific application.
Chemical Resistance
HDPE is known for its chemical resistance, so it's important to choose an adhesive with similar resistance properties. Make sure to select an adhesive that will withstand the chemicals and environmental conditions your bonded HDPE will be exposed.
Price & Quantity
Consider the price and the quantity of adhesive needed for your project. Higher quality adhesives may cost more, but they can provide better overall performance and durability. Balance the need for quality with budget constraints.
Important Tip
Surface preparation is critical when bonding HDPE materials. Follow the manufacturer's instructions on how to prepare the surfaces, which may include roughening, cleaning, or using a primer. Proper surface preparation can significantly improve the success of bonding HDPE materials.
In conclusion, to find the best HDPE adhesive for your needs, consider factors such as adhesive type, application method, curing time and temperature, bond strength, chemical resistance, and price. Most importantly, properly prepare the HDPE surface for optimal adhesion. Finding the right adhesive will ensure your project is successful and long-lasting.
Bonding HDPE 101
HDPE is one of the trickiest plastics to glue. If you are wondering why that is the case, then let us break it down for you.
This material has high abrasion resistance, and as a result, it has minimum surface energy and a very robust surface. Because of this feature, most standard and even superglues cannot work their charms on HDPE. And in case the glues are not effective, you can always screw the HDPE pieces together with nails.
But remember that when you do this, they will get a more industrial effect that may not always be visually appealing. Likewise, welding may leave the joined surfaces with an uneven look, especially if not done the right way.
Although you will find many adhesives on the market that claim to glue HDPE, you should not get easily fooled and maintain proper caution to choose the right product that can really do the job..
How to Glue HDPE
Irrespective of the type of glue that you are planning to use, remember that it is mandatory to prepare the HDPE surface first. So, it does not matter if you are applying super glue or epoxy; the surface needs to be clean for the glue to work.
The easiest method to get the surfaces prepped is by sanding them. But keep in mind that the process is likely to generate a lot of dust. So, we will recommend vacuuming the surfaces thoroughly post-sanding to ensure there’s no dust on them. If you fail to clean them properly, then the adhesive may lose its strength when applied.
Moreover, you should always follow the instructions provided by the brand for the best results. All products come with a set of instructions, and in case they don’t just call their customer support team and ask for help. In case you choose to work with superglue, you might also need to get a good primer to use with it.
You would be required to apply a coat of this primer and give it some time to dry up and cure. Only when that happens should you proceed with the next step of applying the glue? The manufacturer of the glue and primer will definitely mention the time needed for them to dry out completely, so don’t miss out on reading them.
On the other hand, if you opt for epoxy adhesives, you will require an additional hardener to mix with the resin. You either have to do the mixing manually, or the product will come as a pre-prepared mixture.
Take the Necessary Precautions
Without proper preparation, not only will using HDPE glue become too expensive, but it can also be hazardous. So, in this section, we will take a look at some of the things that you can do to ensure that you do not have to face either of the problems.
In order to ensure a mess-free application, you can take special care to prevent any glue from oozing. And for this, you need to be careful about applying only the recommended amount and nothing more than that. The idea that more is better does not work here.
Other than that, we will always recommend working with the surface and glue in an area with good ventilation and ample amount of sunlight. Some of the adhesives that you might use are pungent and even have hazardous chemicals in them. So, you can even consider working outdoors.
Moreover, it is best that you arrange all that you need before starting with the project. Some of the glues may dry very quickly and won’t give you much time to fix things. So, it is best that the work does not get interrupted when you begin.
Apart from that, we recommend that you opt for clear adhesives that won’t leave any seams on the HDPE. Even if the glue oozes out a little, it won’t cause too much trouble. And when you are using the glue, stay very careful and do not let it come in contact with any part of your hands or clothes. In case that happens, you will have to face a hard time trying to get it off.
Get to the Grind
So, how do you get the actual job done? Let’s take a look.
Sanding
In case you are planning to glue two pieces of HDPE together, you would need to sand both surfaces and not just one. For this, it is best to take 120-grit sandpaper and use that to make the smooth surface of the HDPE rough. And as we have mentioned before, use a vacuum cleaner to drive off the resultant dust.
After that, all you need to do is follow the user manual closely. If you are using an epoxy adhesive, make sure that you mix a quality hardening agent to help form a good bond. You might have to do it manually, or you can use an ejection gun for the process.
Once you are done with that, apply a thick coating of this HDPE surface mixture. Let it dry for a few minutes, then attach this glued surface to the one you want to combine with the HDPE.
Make sure that you keep these two pieces clamped together until the adhesive gets cured. It might take you a day or two to get done with this step. If you read the user instructions carefully, you will have a fair idea about how long it can take.
Melting
After you are done with the sanding process, you will need to get hold of a propane torch. Adjust the flame to make sure it is blue and lightly melt the HDPE surface. Make sure that the flame is not blue or red, as that will damage the surface completely.
Do this for around 2 to 5 seconds. In case you are working with a piece that is round in shape, it is best that you keep turning it around to ensure that all areas get heated evenly.
Once you are done doing that, test if it is done properly by putting a water droplet on the surface. If it spreads out, rest assured that it has been breached properly. And in case you see that there are beads of water in certain parts, you would have to redo the process.
When you are sure that the surface is well prepared, go ahead and apply the epoxy according to the user manual. We would suggest that you apply a generous coat to ensure that the surfaces stick well.
Keep the surfaces glued together until they get completely cured.
What types of glues work best on HDPE?
The types of glues that work best on HDPE are two-part epoxies or specialized polyurethane glue. Other alternatives include hot melt adhesives or certain types of superglues designed for use with plastics. It's always essential to follow the manufacturer's instructions for the best results.
Is it possible to glue HDPE together?
Yes, it is possible to glue HDPE together, although it can be challenging due to HDPE's low surface energy and resistance to adhesion. It typically involves a specific preparation process that could include flame or plasma treatment of the surfaces. Specialized adhesives like two-part epoxy or certain polyurethane adhesives are used following the manufacturer's guidelines.
How to glue HDPE panels?
To glue HDPE panels, there's a two-step process that is typically employed. First, the HDPE surface is treated with a flame or plasma treatment to improve adhesion. Then, a specialized adhesive such as a two-part epoxy, hot melt adhesive, or polyurethane adhesive capable of bonding HDPE is applied as per the manufacturer's instructions.
With that, we have reached the end of this informative guide.
We hope that you have been able to learn a thing or two about how to glue HDPE properly. Also, we hope that our recommendation of effective adhesives comes to your aid.
Although you started out with this guide with the thought that HDPE is difficult to handle, by now, you must have understood that this is not the case. With the right products, you can handle them easily.
But for that to happen, you need to understand the material and adhesive well. Unless you do that, you are most likely to fail. In case you have any more questions, feel free to write to us in the comments section below. And keep a watch on this space for more exciting reads.
Until next time, goodbye!
Radiator leaks are messy and dangerous, so it's not surprising that people rush to the mechanic as soon as they spot a green puddle.
Whether your car is high mileage or not, the radiator wears out and breaks with time. Repairing a broken radiator can be an expensive affair if you consult a professional. But fixing a radiator leak at home is possible if you know the correct method.
There are many ways to fix a radiator leak, and we've selected a temporary quick fix for you. In this guide, we're going to show you how to fix a car radiator leak using epoxy.
Fixing A Broken Radiator With Epoxy
If the radiator leak is severe, you have no choice but to make a trip to the mechanic to get it professionally repaired. But say you spotted a minor leak or a small puddle, taking quick action on your own can work just fine, too. Although it might not be a permanent fix, it's better than nothing for the time being.
Don't ignore the leak and continue to drive your vehicle because the car is prone to overheating since it lost coolant from the leakage. In the long run, driving with a broken radiator damages the engine and could be dangerous.
But a simple fix with epoxy can prevent further damage. This DIY method will help you save the cost of the radiator parts and the mechanic fee as well. At the very least, there won't be any leaks when you are ready to get the radiator professionally fixed.
How To Fix Radiator Leak With Epoxy
In this guide, you will learn how to find the source of the problem- the crack in the radiator. Along with that, you'll see the correct way to clean the radiator before sealing it with epoxy.
Identify The Problem
When you notice leaks and puddles forming beneath the car, it's best to check the issue as soon as you can. Firstly, check if the puddle is made up of water or coolants. This can be identified by the color. In the case of a clear puddle, it is water, and if the puddle looks suspiciously green or any other color, it could be a coolant leak. Remember that coolant leaks indicate damage or cracks in the radiator.
Cool The Engine
Now that you have figured out that the leak is indeed a coolant from a broken radiator, turn off the car engine. This is to make sure the engine cools down before you can inspect the parts. It also helps to reduce the pressure off the radiator and engine and is a general safety practice we recommend.
After the engine has cooled down, try to remove the radiator from the car. Modern vehicles have a different system that does not make the radiator accessible, and it takes an experienced hand to remove it.
But if your car is an older model, the radiator should be easy to remove without professional help. If the radiator does not come out, take other parts out of the way so you can get to the radiator.
Drain The Radiator
Once the radiator is in clear view, look around to find the cracked or broken area. Next, you'll have to remove the rest of the coolant if you want to apply epoxy. So, drain the radiator either completely or up till the part where the crack is visible.
After this, clean all sides of the radiator to remove the chemicals. A brake cleaner should be sufficient to do this job. Take your time while doing this step because the epoxy will not bond correctly unless the surface is completely clean. An additional step would be sanding the surface, although it is not mandatory.
But sanding the surrounding surface will allow the epoxy to form stronger bonds that will last for a slightly longer time. Also, before you apply the epoxy, allow the surface to dry completely. This is because moisture or dampness can interfere in the epoxy bonding process.
Seal The Radiator With Epoxy
Now you get to choose which epoxy you'd like to use for fixing the radiator leak. We've listed out a few of our favorites later in the article, so be sure to check that out. Upon opening the packaging, you'll see that the epoxy comes in strips, and you can break off as much is required for the repair.
Take a piece of the epoxy, press and rub with your hands till the warmth from your fingers makes it soft and pliable. The more you work with it, the warmer it gets, and you get a flexible piece of epoxy for repair.
Now, spread the epoxy all over the crack or broken area of the radiator. It's essential to cover the entire area so that it seals nicely, and the excess can always be removed before it dries up. It's alright if this process takes some time, but don't skimp on it.
The layering needs to be correct for the epoxy to be able to handle the pressure of the radiator. After the epoxy is applied correctly, allow it to dry and cure completely. It takes around an hour to dry, but the curing process takes 24 hours.
Check If It Works
The next day, check the radiator and the epoxy. The epoxy patch should be fully cured and solid by now, but you can also check it once to see if it is secure. Next, replace the radiator and the other parts back in the car and see if there is enough antifreeze. Start the car engine and take a look at the now repaired radiator.
Let the engine run for a while so that the pressure builds up in the radiator. Then take a look at the epoxy repair if it is still firmly in place. The patch should be able to withstand the pressure without any leaks. Finally, clean up any messes caused by antifreeze, if any, and the car is ready to use.
How To Fix A Plastic Radiator
The method which we stated earlier was applicable for the standard metal radiator, which most cars have. But what do you do when your radiator is made of plastic? In that case, repairing it takes a totally different method which we will elaborate on in this section.
Even though the process is different, fixing a plastic radiator at home is possible if you know basic welding. Besides, you are better off repairing it at home because professionals usually do not fix plastic radiators. They will probably suggest you throw the broken one out and get a brand new one that can dig deep in your pockets.
We'd suggest you try to fix the plastic radiator on your own and if there is an issue after a few weeks, get it replaced. One thing you should know before fixing the plastic radiator is that it can handle high temperatures of 94 degrees Fahrenheit and above.
So don't worry about exposing the radiator to heat, thinking it might melt. Secondly, after you finish the repair, the radiator should be able to hold hot and pressurized coolant without damaging the parts- that's when you know that the job is done well.
Method For Repairing A Plastic Radiator-
Again, cool the engine down so you can work with the radiator, then drain any water or solution till empty or beneath the break line. If the fluids from the radiator are not removed, they might spill while working. Next, clean and prep the area so that it is ready for repair work.
Now, use a heat gun to soften the plastic. As you apply high heat to the cracked edges, you'll notice that they begin to change the texture and look glossy. If the break line is too large, divide your work into 2-inch sections for easy welding. This way, you can finish one section of welding before tackling the next one.
During the welding process, try to create a V-shaped channel throughout the break line. Next, melt a nylon rod into this portion using a plastic welder. Essentially, we want the rod to melt into the hollow area completely.
We want to give you a heads-up about the fumes plastic welding creates. It can get a bit suffocating if you're not wearing the correct protective gear or there isn't enough ventilation. So, be sure to prepare these beforehand.
After the nylon rod melts into the gap in the plastic, remove the extra bits on the edges. Next, use the tip of the welder to join the nylon with the plastic radiator. You'll know it has been blended when they begin to blend into each other.
Once this is done, leave the radiator to cool for a few hours. Alternatively, if you prefer to work with epoxy instead of welding, plastic-specific products are available on the market. The method to fix the plastic radiator with epoxy will remain the same as mentioned for metal radiators.
Best Epoxy Products For Radiator Leaks
Now that the method for fixing radiator leaks with epoxy is clear, it's time to look at some of the epoxy products available. Some of the epoxy products are specially designed for radiator repair, and many of them work equally well on metal and plastic. Here are a few brands we recommend-
Radiator Weld by J-B Weld is one of the strongest epoxies for repairing leaks in radiators. It comes in a complete kit with all the items you will need for mixing and applying on surfaces. The kit comes with epoxy putty, fiberglass cloth, sandpaper, and an epoxy applicator.
J-B Weld is also one of the oldest brands with over 40 years of reputation backing it up. Their quick seal product is sure to help beginners who are unsure about using epoxies on radiators. The good thing about this product is that there is no need to remove the tank or radiator from its sitting place.
This means the epoxy can be mixed and applied even if it is not removed from the car. Impressively, this epoxy can fix 4-inch long breaks or cracks perfectly. JB-Weld epoxy is durable and resistant to chemicals and heat and can easily handle temperatures upto 250 degrees Fahrenheit.
Moreover, this product is versatile and can bond plenty of other broken items like washer fluid tanks, water tanks, storage tanks, plastic radiators, composites, and PVC.
Next, we have another radiator repair kit which is a pretty good option by the brand Versachem. This product is versatile enough to work on both metal and plastic radiators. We appreciated that it could be applied to the tank or radiator without having to remove it in any way.
If the crack or break in the radiator is visible, you can apply this product directly after cooling the engine. Furthermore, this option can withstand a decent range of temperature- from 40 to 200 degrees Fahrenheit. So, you can rest assured that high temperatures will not damage your repair work.
When we read the back of the packaging, the product description mentions that it repairs gasoline and fuel tank leaks in 20 minutes. Also, there is no draining of coolant required with this product. All in all, this kit makes a good option when it comes to radiator repairs.
Finally, we have a flexible sealant called Optimum Black Gasket Maker by Permatex. This product comes in a tube packaging of 4 ounces and can be squeezed out through a nozzle. Actually, this option comes with two different nozzles so you can adjust the amount of product you need for the project.
What's different about this option is that it has a fluid-like consistency instead of a solid stick putty. So there is no need to warm up the product in your hands. It is ready to apply as soon as the tube is opened.
We like that this sealant is resistant to auto and shop fluids and vibration, making it the perfect choice for fixing a radiator leak. Not only that, but it also retains a lot of its flexibility after drying and is an oil-resistant adhesive. This indicates that it is strong enough to withstand the pressure build-up in the radiator.
Also, it can handle high amounts of heat, with a comfortable working range of -65 to 500 degrees Fahrenheit. Additionally, the product is sensor-safe, has low odor, and is non-corrosive, making it a great choice for fixing a leaking radiator.
Final Words
So, that was our short guide on fixing a radiator leak using epoxy. Most of the aspects which people struggle with have been mentioned in the stepwise guide. Also, we know that not all car radiators are made of metal, so we decided to include a section about plastic radiators as well.
Along with the methods for repairing a radiator leak, this article also mentions a few popular epoxy brands. Although we think all of them are up to the mark, our go-to option is the Radiator repair kit by J-B Weld. We hope this informative guide helps you the next time you need to repair a radiator with epoxy.
When it comes to epoxy, we all make mistakes sometimes, don't we?
Mixing, pouring, and applying epoxy is not something you can experiment with. It is an exact technique using measured components, and anything slightly off can ruin the epoxy mixture. Each step needs care and precision because even a tiny flaw in mixing, ratios, or contamination in the tools can ruin the mix.
Today we decided to figure out all the common mistakes beginners make and compile them in one place. Along with highlighting the errors you need to avoid, we'll also be sharing a few easy methods to tackle them. So, the next time you face any of these issues, you'll be well prepared.
Without further ado, let's get started.
How To Fix Epoxy Mistakes
What Are The Most Common Epoxy Mistakes?
Incorrect Mixing Ratio
Most often, epoxies come in two parts in the kit and need proper mixing just before application. The mixing ratio is vital if you want an epoxy of the correct consistency. This is why companies mention the exact proportion in weight or volume on the packaging, which needs to be followed precisely.
Failing to mix the two components in the correct ratio results in the epoxy hardening too fast or slow, even sometimes not hardening at all.
Over Or Under Mixing The Epoxy
Overmixing the epoxy leaves a thick sludge that barely pours over and would need to be thrown out. And if you undermix the epoxy components, the slurry will leave cracks and melted bits which are far from ideal. The mixture could also become hazy and opaque, so in order to prevent this, make sure you follow the instructions to the T.
Working With The Wrong Product
We understand why so many people struggle with selecting the correct type of epoxy for their project. After all, there are so many types of epoxies available, all of which have entirely different purposes.
There are epoxy adhesives and bonding agents, casting compounds, fillers, molds, and many others. So, it’s better to read about the product before purchasing to avoid ending up with the wrong type of epoxy.
Weather And Temperature Issues
One thing we often ignore is taking the weather and temperature into consideration before beginning an epoxy-based project. Beginners might not know that epoxy is sensitive to extreme temperatures. So if you are in the middle of a frigid winter, chances are the epoxy will have trouble setting correctly.
The same is true for hot temperatures, too- the epoxy will either dry too quickly, forming bubbles or will develop cracks after drying. The best solution is to adhere to the temperature guidelines recommended by the company. You could either wait for a pleasant season or control the room temperature to match the guidelines.
Intentionally Or Unintentionally Adding Moisture
Newbies might make the mistake of adding water to thin out the solution, but let us warn you before you make the same mistake. Make it a point to stay away from moisture when working with epoxy.
If you want to save the epoxy mixture, you need to treat water and epoxy as sworn enemies. It is also possible to have water lying in the container or mixing bucket, and that's something you have to check every time.
Use Of Dirty Tools
As we mentioned earlier, epoxy is pretty sensitive to all external factors, including dirt and dust sitting on your tools. Any of the grime or dust that you mix with the epoxy will show in the final product, and no one wants that! If possible, use fresh mixing buckets, containers, and stirrers. And if you already have these tools, clean them with acetone just before using them.
Mixing Brands
Needless to say, don't mix two different brands of epoxies, assuming they are all the same. All brands and solutions have their unique mixing ratio and composition. So, you will not get an even mixture if you add a different brand to the existing mixture. Not only that, it is not recommended to mix two different solutions from the same brand either.
Improper Storage Of Epoxy
You may already know that epoxies react with molecules in the air and harden to form strong bonds. So it goes without saying that when storing, nothing less than an airtight container will do. Also, epoxies have a shelf life; make a note of the expiry date before storing them.
It's possible to keep them at the back of storage shelves and remove them way after the expiry date. In such cases, you won't be able to use the epoxy anyway. And if you do, the solution won't mix properly because it would be partially hardened.
Solutions To Epoxy Mistakes
Sticky Film On The Surface
Sometimes after hardening, a sticky layer is visible on top of the epoxy. This isn't an irreversible problem and can be fixed quickly. Take some hot water and dip a soft sponge to soak. Wipe the sticky surface with the sponge and hot water, and the sticky layer should visibly reduce.
Working indoors will protect the epoxy from external dust and dirt. It will also help in reducing the sudden changes in temperature and humidity. Also, try to work in a moisture-free zone to prevent the formation of this sticky film.
Epoxy Is Not Leveling Evenly
Almost all epoxies are self-leveling and do not need manual assistance to set in place. But if you face a situation in which the epoxy is not leveling, the resin in the mixture is probably too little.
To fix this after the epoxy has cured, you'll need to sand down the uneven areas and add a second coat. And, if the epoxy is not yet cured, you can directly apply the second coat to the previous one.
Epoxy Cures Too Quickly
If the epoxy is hardening and curing too quickly, that's not a good sign. Drying and curing are very precise, and quick curing means the polymerization of the epoxy is occurring way too fast. This happens when the temperature is too high, which leaves a substandard epoxy with cracks and haze.
To prevent this, keep the temperature constant between 68-77 degrees Fahrenheit (ideally).
Air Bubbles Have Appeared
One of the most common issues people face is the appearance of bubbles in the epoxy. These bubbles appear as a result of air trapped in the resin due to improper mixing. If the epoxy components are mixed too quickly, the air gets incorporated into the resin, forming visible bubbles.
If you notice these bubbles before the curing process is complete, you can get rid of them easily. Move a heat gun quickly over the bubbles in intervals of 10 minutes. Once fully cured, the bubbles are difficult to remove, so try to identify and remove them before it is cured.
Epoxy Does Not Stick Properly
A porous surface will absorb the epoxy easily, so the second layer of epoxy might be required to get correct results. Also, make sure that the wooden surface is dry, smooth, and clean. And ensure the solution is distributed evenly across the surface.
Ripples And Waves On Epoxy
Sometimes ripples and waves might appear while working with epoxy. If this problem arises, you'll need more than one coat of epoxy solution to fix it. Begin the process by applying a thin sealing coat. This layer should be thin enough to avoid and bubble or ripple formation, yet it must coat the surface all around.
The second step is to add the epoxy layer, which is essentially the same substance but in a thicker coat.
Epoxy Has An Orange Peel Effect
Imagine the outer layer of an orange peel. It has marks and dents all across the surface, and the orange peel effect on the epoxy layer looks very similar to that. This is definitely not the result one would expect since the ideal epoxy layer should be free of all marks, dents, ripples, or smudges.
This effect is the result of sudden temperature fluctuations; thus, the only way to prevent this is to work in a closed environment. If you find this effect when the epoxy is still wet, use a roller tool to even the upper surface.
If the epoxy has already been catalyzed and cured, you will need to scrub the imperfections using abrasive paper. To finish with a glossy look, spray a thin layer of epoxy on the surface.
Epoxy Fails To Bond
Sometimes epoxy doesn't set, and you may scratch your head wondering what went wrong. Well, it could be one of several reasons. It could be an issue of incorrect curing, which we will discuss in detail in a separate section of this article.
Another reason could be working on a contaminated surface area. That is why it is essential to clean the work area and tools before mixing and pouring your epoxy solution.
Epoxy Is Opaque
The distinct feature of export coating is a shiny, transparent, and sometimes reflective surface that it leaves behind. A fully cured epoxy coat that looks dull and opaque indicates that something in the process has gone wrong. Most often, this happens due to changes in temperature and the conditions at your workstation. Increased humidity also causes this cloudy and greying effect.
Epoxy Changed Color Due To Storage
Ever managed to safely store epoxy in a safe airtight container for later use, only to open it to find the color has changed? What does the color change mean? A few chemical reactions occur in the epoxy over time which creates a reddish-brown color.
It should be fine to use as long as the solution was sealed in an airtight container and the consistency is fluid enough to pour. The color change will reflect in the final product, so if that doesn't bother you, then it is good enough to use.
Tackling An Epoxy Mixture That Failed To Cure
You might face a situation in which the time required for the epoxy to cure has passed, but the resin hasn't hardened yet. Why did this happen? Here are a few things you can do to avoid this issue-
Epoxy Mixing Ratio
The most common error that causes the epoxy to remain wet is the incorrect mixing ratio. This means that one or the other component was too much or too little. The perfect epoxy needs to have a balanced amount of both resin and hardener to set as per the instruction manual. This is why the drying and curing time goes haywire if one or both are messed up.
The only sure-fire way to fix this is to remove the epoxy layer altogether and begin the process again. We know it sounds tedious, and it is. But there is no going back once the batch is prepared and laid out.
Using Wrong Products
Beginners often make the mistake of using a completely different type of product which doesn't cure even after the recommended time has passed. Care needs to be taken when selecting the products for applying on a table of the countertop. If you are unsure, try asking someone who is familiar with epoxy DIY or check a few products online.
The good thing about checking online is that you get reviews from fellow epoxy DIYers, and you can learn from their mistakes. Another mistake people make is mixing products from two brands together. No matter how similar they may seem, it is never recommended to mix different brands since it almost never ends up well.
If the wrong products have been used, the only thing to do is remove them immediately. Do not wait to hope that the epoxy might cure if you give it a few more hours because it most likely won't. Also, it's no use adding a correct epoxy mixture over an incorrect one. Since the incorrect layer won't be set, you'll have to redo the process from scratch.
Temperature
We've mentioned this before, but temperature plays a huge role in the correct setting of epoxy. If the season is cold or the room is set to a lower temperature, the epoxy takes a much longer time to cure. So, check for the climate. Are you in the middle of freezing winter? We can't argue with nature, but what we can control is the room temperature.
The best solution is to apply additional heat to quicken the curing process. Also, there are curing hardeners available on the market that are specifically designed to speed up the process for lower temperatures. Or you could just allow the surface more time to cure if none of the other methods are possible.
Fixing Glaze Coat Epoxy
There is another issue DIYers complain about - glazed coat epoxy. Glazed coat epoxy is the cloudy, muddy, or opaque appearance of the final product, which can be disheartening to see. The epoxy glaze is incomplete without its transparent and shiny finished look, so many users try their best to avoid it.
The glazed coat look can occur due to a number of reasons, like humidity in the air or the formation of too many air bubbles. Most of the time, when the surface looks opaque and glazed, the curing is also compromised. Since the epoxy does not cure properly, the surface has a tacky finish that does not harden.
Moisture And Humidity
If the epoxy is exposed to some moisture or the workplace has a high humidity level, it directly impacts the curing and finishing. Small molecules of condensation react with the epoxy before it cures and creates a muddy, glazed look which we want to avoid.
In some cases, this cloudy appearance is irreversible, but there is a simple method that works most of the time. Try using a heat gun to melt the glazed surface and allow it to resettle naturally. A few applications of the heat gun should be enough to remove all the moisture from a thin layer.
Air Trapped In The Epoxy
Trapped air is another causal factor for cloudy epoxy. But it can be prevented by applying the epoxy coats in thinner layers. Also, you can use the same heat gun method to remove the trapped air. If there is no rush, wait for a warmer climate to apply the epoxy since thinner layers are easily formed in higher temperatures.
Tacky Epoxy
A glazed epoxy will not harden even if you give it extra time to cure. Sadly, the only thing you can do with tacky or sticky epoxy is to remove it entirely. Adding another layer in the hopes that it will be better won't work. So, remove the epoxy sand and clean the surface, and then start the process once again.
How To Repair An Epoxy Resin Table Or Countertop
Over time, tables and countertops wear out and start peeling. Due to daily use and the action of placing pots, pans, or cutlery, they develop deep scratches. All of these issues can be fixed by adding a durable new layer of epoxy coating. Instead of throwing out that table or countertop, simply follow these easy instructions and get a shiny new surface.
Fixing A Table/Countertop With Epoxy
Begin with removing the peeled-out wooden pieces and the deep scratches from the surface. A fine to medium grit sandpaper or abrasive sheet should do the trick. Work your way into the scratches and the peeled-off surface to create a smooth and even layer.
You can use the wet sanding technique, which includes dipping the sandpaper in water before scrubbing. This method removes the scratches without creating additional marks by rubbing the sandpaper. During the process, make sure you sand parallel to the imperfections since going against them might create deeper scratches.
After this, remember to clean the surface so that there are no dust particles left behind. The next step is essential, so do not skip it out of the process. Prepare a cleaning solution containing half part of the cleaner and half part water. Use this cleansing mixture to clean out any remaining particles that might be stuck to the surface.
After that, wipe the area to remove the last bits of the cleansing solution and leave the surface to dry. Once the tabletop is dry, give it a final polish and add a thin layer of epoxy to the top. This layer acts as a sealant and ends up drying to form a clear glass-like reflective surface.
Drying this layer completely will take no less than 24 hours, and you can check to see if it is still sticky. If it is still sticky, give it a few more hours before applying the next epoxy coat.
Fixing Mistakes On A Wet Surface
Most mistakes are easier to fix when the epoxy is still in the wet stage. If there is a visible ripple, bubble, or any other imperfection, it can be smoothened out with a roller tool.
The same is true of uneven layers- tools can be used to correct the level so that no areas are left too thin or thick. If there is any dust sitting on top, removing it in the wet stage is much easier.
Final Words
Here we conclude our guide about epoxy mistakes and how to deal with them. Some errors like air bubbles on the surface and small ripples can be fixed fairly easily using heat. However, other issues like sticky and tacky epoxy need to be scrapped out and redone.
We made the same mistakes when we started out, so we know the struggle of getting it right! Keep a close watch for any of these mistakes for your next project and try to fix most of them before the epoxy cures.
Which of these mistakes did you face the most? Feel free to share in the comments below.
You can fix your wireless doorbell at home by performing several checks and narrowing down the source of the problem. These may involve battery checks, proper positioning, rebooting the device and the app, and weather damage checks, to name a few.
Wireless doorbellsare more convenient and accessible than wired ones, but like most electronics, they can sometimes malfunction. A wireless doorbell not working can become a nuisance very rapidly as you miss out on visitors standing on your doorstep.
So, to help you solve any issues with your wireless doorbell and keep it safe from future problems, we’ve created a troubleshooting guide for you to follow. The pertinent information is just a scroll away!
How Does A Wireless Doorbell Work?
A wired doorbell is simple enough: the visitor presses the doorbell button that completes an active circuit, creating a ringing sound. On the other hand, wireless doorbells are quite different since the doorbell isn’t physically connected to a speaker for the sounds to be emitted.
Most wireless doorbells work on radio wave frequencies, sending radio signals to a receiver that picks up the signal when the doorbell button is pressed. The receiver could be a dedicated remote control for the doorbell, or it could even be your smartphone. This is then followed by a sound, light or a combination of both to alert you of potential visitors.
The complexities involved in executing this process makes troubleshooting a wireless doorbell more challenging than a wired one. A wireless doorbell involves intricate circuitry, fixing any problem with which is usually left best in the hands of a professional.
That said, you can follow some of our DIY troubleshooting tips to prevent or solve some issues with the doorbell.
Troubleshoot Your Wireless Doorbells
The intricacies involved in a wireless doorbell’s workings mean that several small things could go wrong to stop it from functioning. So, we will now help you to find what’s wrong with your device and how you can fix it. You’ll only need a screwdriver and a few spare batteries.
1. Doorbell Button Not Working
When you press the button on a wireless doorbell for uPVC doors (or any other door, for that matter), it usually emits a sound from the chime unit.
Now, there are a number of issues that could lead to wireless doorbell buttons not working, with the most obvious of them being drained batteries. So, it’s recommended to check the doorbell and the door chime unit batteries before moving on to the other parts.
As for other issues like a damaged button or chime unit, you can spot them when you install a wireless doorbellfor the first time.
Solving The Issue
Use a screwdriver to remove the battery compartment of your devices and replace the batteries in your doorbell and chime units one by one. You can pinpoint which unit has the faulty batteries by checking each battery in a different device.
Once you’ve done so, try turning your units on again and see if they function normally. If they do, good job! If not, let’s move on to the next step.
Tip
Sometimes, the issue may not be with the battery but with the battery connectors. You can use cotton swabs dipped in vinegar to clean the terminals and dry the compartment with a clean cloth afterward. There’s no need to throw away fresh batteries, is there?
Since wireless doorbells work on radio wave frequencies, there’s a chance that the signal emitted by the doorbell unit no longer reaches the receiver. This can occur due to a number of factors, such as the number of walls between the unit and the receiver. In some cases, other electronics may interfere with the signal sent by the doorbell transmitter, resulting in the receiver not detecting it.
Usually, the signal range is quite liberal, with some devices ranging up to 100m, making the receiver placement the actual culprit.
Solving The Issue
Relocate the receiver so that it’s closer to the doorbell transmitter. If possible, try to limit the number of walls between the two units as well. There’s a good chance this fixes the issue, but if it doesn’t, let’s explore more options.
Tip
There’s a greater chance that your doorbell system isn’t functioning properly because of interference caused by other wireless devices. This may also result in your doorbell going off randomly, even when there is no visitor at your door. Try to relocate your receiver to a place where there are few electrical devices in its vicinity.
3. Weather Problems
Environmental factors are often overlooked when purchasing a new wireless doorbell. For example, if you live in a place where it just won’t stop raining, there’s a chance that your doorbell system simply weathered under the weather.
Likewise, too much temperature fluctuation can damage the doorbell, thereby affecting its functioning.
Most doorbells come with a protection rating that will inform you of their resistance to the weather and their capability to resist water. You can check your manual to see if this issue has occurred with your doorbell.
Solving The Issue
There are only a few things that you can try with your doorbells if the weather damage is extensive. Use a screwdriver to open the panel and check how badly the unit has been damaged. In some cases, cleaning the unit alone can solve all your doorbell woes, otherwise you may need to have it looked at by a technician.
In the worst cases, you’ll see extensive rusting in the metallic parts of the unit, or wires that have seen better days in such cases. As a result, you may have to replace the broken doorbell, but it all depends on how bad the damage is.
4. Wireless Doorbell Chime Not Loud Enough
Your doorbell may not be loud enough for you to hear from another room, or even in its vicinity. This issue occurs primarily due to two reasons: the positioning of the speaker and volume control.
If the doorbell is positioned in a way that blocks its chime box, its sound may become muffled, unable to be audible from across the house. This is an easy problem to fix in most cases.
Alternatively, your doorbell volume may not be high enough, which you can check in the bell’s instruction manual.
Solving The Problem
All you need to do if your doorbell chime box is blocked is to reposition it and give the speaker ample room. Some models have the counterintuitive design of having the speaker on the same side as the bell. In such cases, place your doorbell on a flat surface, such as a shelf, from where it can be heard easily.
As for the volume control, follow the instructions listed on the owner’s manual. Some doorbell models come with built-in volume control that you can adjust using the unit itself or with a mobile app.
5. Security Code Swap
If your doorbell was disconnected from the receiver unit, it could lead to the device not functioning at all. This is due to the security codes on both units not matching properly, resulting in the doorbell unit being unable to signal the receiver.
Solving The Problem
This issue can usually be fixed by resetting both the doorbell and the receiver units. The units should sync up once you’ve reset the consoles and input a new security code, and the doorbell should function once again. Refer to the owner’s manual for instructions specific to your doorbell, as this process may vary between different models.
6. Video Doorbell Troubles
Automated doorbell units operate using a stable internet connection and so, the issues you’ll face are likely associated with the WiFi connection or the power. A poor WiFi connection may cause the doorbell to freeze, which is when you should check if the internet services are down in your area.
Solving The Problem
If you own an automated doorbell, try turning it off and then back on again. Sometimes, a fresh reboot is all it takes to get your automated doorbell going again.
In case the issues persist, consider clearing the cache of your doorbell app to see if it resolves the issue. And lastly, reinstall the app if nothing else works.
What To Do If These Tips Don’t Work
The user’s manual is your best friend in the event of your wireless doorbell not working. Sift through every piece of information you can find in the manual pertaining to the problem and see if that solves it. If not, contact the manufacturer for help with your device-specific problem.
How To Fix A Wireless Doorbell Conclusion
Wireless doorbells, much like most wireless devices in modern times, are a boon for our daily lives. And when their convenience is interrupted by an untimely fault, they can usually be fixed without requiring professional help.
However, they are fragile and prone to failure once they have aged sufficiently. Wireless doorbells can also become non-functional when dropped, making handling it with care all the more important.
With regular maintenance and proper care, the devices will continue to serve you for a good while.
On that note, we will now wrap up today's proceedings. Until next time!
Well, who does not like vibrant-colored merchandise? No one that we know of! Today we will discuss how to separate colors for screen printers in the most effective manner.
Color printing is easy but to create the best of effects, you need to know how to separate colors. If you learn the skill, you can make the coolest of merchandise at the most affordable cost. But before you start with the process, there are a number of things that you need to know.
Today, we are discussing the techniques that you can implement to separate colors for screen printers. We are also going to share some very interesting and essential tips that will save you time, money, and potential hazards.
So, without any further ado, let’s begin!
Methods to Separate Colors For Screen Printing
Before we delve into how to separate colors, we will give you a brief idea about the various techniques that screen printers use to separate colors. Understanding the process in-depth would help you execute the separation more effectively.
Let’s take a look at the standard color separation techniques that are used.
Spot Color
This is one of the most common kinds of color separation techniques that are in vogue. It has been quite popular for decades now, especially when vector images are concerned.
The reasons behind its popularity are the ease of the technique and the excellent results that it delivers. Most design software allows you to spot or pick the color. However, with software like CorelDRAW and Adobe Illustrator, you should always ensure that the color is right before you decide on printing.
Keep in mind that this technique of color separation works best on solid tones. But if you are looking to create more shaded colors, you should opt for halftone dots in the process. If you do this, the design will get printed in the exact form as you envision it.
Four-Color Process
This technique has gained popularity in recent years and has also contributed towards the popularity that photoshop enjoys today.
If you are an artist who’s looking to create photorealistic images on a t-shirt, you can use this technique to implement halftone dots in cyan, magenta, yellow, and black. It is one of the most commonly used techniques in re-creating photorealistic images as per the industry standards.
However, it is better to be safe than sorry. So, ensure that you always double-check before it goes for printing. This way, you can make sure that the colors come out perfectly.
If you are careful, you can prevent costly mistakes from happening. After a print is done, if the colors do not come out right, it is rather costly to correct it and send it for re-printing.
Index Color
If you are new to color separation, you need to give this a try because it is the easiest of all the processes. But before you choose to go with this process, remember that the designs that you can make with it are a tad limited.
Why? Because the square pixels it uses are all of the same dimension. It does not use halftone dots that are instrumental in creating shading effects. So, with this method, the colors are a little flat.
You should opt for this process if you are looking to create simple images in high-quality prints. To be honest, it is not very suitable for realistic pictures.
Mostly, it is compatible with Photoshop, but if you want to work on it a bit more before printing, you can always transfer it to CorelDRAW or Illustrator.
Simulated-Process Color
Well, at first, this method might seem quite similar to the four-color process, but on a closer inspection, you will notice that there are significant differences.
The first difference is that this process uses halftone dots instead of solid dots that are more commonly used in the four-color process. However, the major difference becomes visible in the kind of ink colors that are used in this simulated-process color technique. And this selection has a major influence on the design once it is printed.
Once the prints are prepared, you will find that the colors are a lot more vivid as compared to the other techniques.
Also, you can use this to your advantage and make use of this process when printing on materials of darker shades. However, that in no way means that the color vividness is absent when it comes to lighter colors.
Tips To Create The Best Color Separation
Honestly, you can create perfect color separations quite simply if you follow a proper process. If that is done, you can very easily ensure that you create a good quality color separation that is quite accurate. It is true that different screen printers have different modes of working, and you have to find a good balance and understand your preference when choosing one.
In this section, we will take a look at how to smartly separate colors. Let’s check them out.
Quality Of The Artwork
When it comes to color separation, the quality of the artwork that you are using is very crucial. It has to be high-quality because if it is of lower resolution, the final print will not come out as nice.
So, if your clients send images of poor quality, ask for better images before you commence with the work. This will help you save both time and money that you would otherwise have to spend on corrections.
Knowing The Colors
Before you start with the work, it is always advisable that you check what kind of colors will be involved in the process. Make sure that you understand whether you will need to extract flat tones or shaded ones.
Once you are clear on this, color separation becomes a lot simpler. Depending on the output you desire, you can choose the color separation process more wisely. You would have to choose certain methods for unusual hues and gradations, and for flat colors, you would have to choose other options.
Take Note Of Potential Problems
Well, like any other work, this one also comes with its own set of problems. However, if you make note of the possible problems before beginning work, chances are that you will be able to tackle them better.
Depending on the color separation process that you are using, you will find different drawbacks. Conduct some research and keep the solutions handy in case you have to face similar problems. For example, if you decide to go for a four-color technique, you might have to face the trouble of color pollution when deciding to separate the colors.
So, depending on the foreseeable nature of the trouble, think about all possible solutions.
Final Words
And with that, we have reached the end of our guide!
We hope that everything we have shared about effectively separating colors for screen printing has been of help to you.
To sum it up, we have to say that it is not a difficult process once you understand its intricacies. With a little research and skill, you will be able to weave wonders with all the processes that we have mentioned.
Our one last suggestion is that you understand that it is a costly process, and you try to reduce the errors to a minimum. If you have any further questions, please feel free to reach out to us in the comments section below.
We hope you find the color separation technique that works best for you. Until next time!
When dealing with small spaces, each available corner needs to be put to good use and maximized. A sofa table represents that versatile piece of furniture that can play both a decorative, aesthetically pleasing role as well as a vital functional one. You can use it as a dinning table if your kitchen space does not permit you otherwise, as a small working desk facing your kitchen or TV, a wonderful bar that provides additional seating space at a larger party gathering, allowing you to be a part of the conversation, facing the living space or simply place it on the back of a sofa as a narrow long storage surface, filled with decorations, picture frames, flower vases, candles and so on.
Colorful, vibrant for a fresh pop modern decor, wooden, simple, basic for Scandinavian touches, or intricate, complex pieces of furniture exuding elegance and grace, sofa tables truly do come in all shapes, sizes and styles, available for each style and taste.We have gathered 17 such sofa tables to illustrate their simple beauty and functionality in an interior design. If you feel that your living room is not complete, opt for such a piece and add complexity to your vision.
Gorgeous Sofa Tables
1. a touch of complementary color to add contrast
image via sarahmdorseydesigns.blogspot.com
2. white hues and natural fibers add warmth to any interior décor
16. notice the delicate contrast between the subtle grey sofa and the oak sofa table
image source Heather Hilliard Design
17. modernity meets the old in elegance sublime composition
image source Desire to Inspire
What do you think about the idea of using a sofa table in your living space? We would love to hear your thoughts on the subject in the comment section below.
![HVLP vs. LVLP [All You Need to Know & Winner]](https://homesthetics.net/wp-content/uploads/2021/06/HVLP-vs.-LVLP-01.jpg "HVLP vs. LVLP [All You Need to Know & Winner]")
![9 Best HVLP Spray Gun [Review & Buyer’s Guide]](https://homesthetics.net/wp-content/uploads/2021/07/Best-HVLP-Spray-Gun-0011.jpg "9 Best HVLP Spray Gun [Review & Buyer's Guide]")
![How To Stabilize Wood [All You Need To Know]](https://homesthetics.net/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/How-to-Stabilize-Wood-1.jpg "How To Stabilize Wood [All You Need To Know]")
![How to Season Cast Iron: A Cast Iron Skillet Guide [2024]](https://homesthetics.net/wp-content/uploads/2023/04/How-to-Season-Cast-Iron-1.jpg "How to Season Cast Iron: A Cast Iron Skillet Guide [2024]")
![How to Remove Wood Glue [Removing Wood Glue 101]](https://homesthetics.net/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/How-to-remove-wood-glue-1.jpg "How to Remove Wood Glue [Removing Wood Glue 101]")
![How to Remove Spray Paint from Concrete [7 Methods + Guide]](https://homesthetics.net/wp-content/uploads/2021/06/How-to-Remove-Spray-Paint-from-Concrete-011.jpg "How to Remove Spray Paint from Concrete [7 Methods + Guide]")
![How To Paint Trim Near Carpet [2024] [Buyer’s Guide]](https://homesthetics.net/wp-content/uploads/2021/07/How-To-Paint-Trim-Near-Carpet-03.jpg "How To Paint Trim Near Carpet [2024] [Buyer's Guide]")
![How To Paint Aluminum 101 [All You Need to Know]](https://homesthetics.net/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/How-to-Paint-Aluminum-1.jpg "How To Paint Aluminum 101 [All You Need to Know]")
![How To Mix Epoxy 101 [Measuring & Mixing Epoxy Resin Guide]](https://homesthetics.net/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/How-to-mix-epoxy-1.jpg "How To Mix Epoxy 101 [Measuring & Mixing Epoxy Resin Guide]")
![How to Make Resin Jewelry 101 [All You Need to Know]](https://homesthetics.net/wp-content/uploads/2021/04/How-to-Make-Resin-Jewelry-101-02.jpg "How to Make Resin Jewelry 101 [All You Need to Know]")
![How To Make Resin Dice 101 [All You Need to Know]](https://homesthetics.net/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/resin-dice-1.jpg "How To Make Resin Dice 101 [All You Need to Know]")
![How To Make A Resin Geode [Complete Guide]](https://homesthetics.net/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/resin-geode-1.jpg "How To Make A Resin Geode [Complete Guide]")
![How To Harden Sticky Resin [Uncured Epoxy Solutions]](https://homesthetics.net/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/How-to-harden-sticky-resin-1.jpg "How To Harden Sticky Resin [Uncured Epoxy Solutions]")
![How to Grow Cilantro Indoors Easily [Buyer’s Guide]](https://homesthetics.net/wp-content/uploads/2020/12/How-to-Grow-Cilantro-Indoors-Easily-1.jpg "How to Grow Cilantro Indoors Easily [Buyer’s Guide]")
![How To Fix Epoxy Mistakes [Tackling Common Epoxy Problems]](https://homesthetics.net/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/How-to-fix-epoxy-mistakes-1.jpg "How To Fix Epoxy Mistakes [Tackling Common Epoxy Problems]")
